Home

R&S VSE User Manual

image

Contents

1. 198 Peak Te E 198 Auto Max Min Peak Gearch nennen enne nennen nensis 198 Se Rein BIB EEN 198 L Search Limite Left Right rbi aged ida 199 e oie nite esdi tuchi ona le 2T VEDI xpa EUERE sv aU RE S 199 L Using Zoom Lila iiec estie tanda rare taa adn nada ct 199 L Deactivating All Search Lime 199 Branch for Peak Se9tFc is iei ene re eti e Eee ee ordeo stet iet eva Pate 199 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Analysis Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command Positioning the Marker on page 365 Exclude LO If activated restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions ON The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is 2 5 x resolution bandwidth RBW Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter mediate frequency at the input mixer the LO is represented as a sig nal at 0 Hz To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0 Hz this frequency is excluded from the peak search OFF No restriction to the search range The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude on page 362 Peak Excurs
2. DISPlay SBAR STATe lt State gt This command turns the status bar on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP SBAR OFF Manual operation See Status Bar on page 102 Colors and Themes Useful commands to customize display colors described elsewhere The HCOPY commands define the print colors and thus only take effect on the display colors if the display shows the printing colors HCOPy CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt on page 402 Configuring the Software HCOPy CMAP item HSL on page 403 HCOPy CMAP item PDEFined on page 403 Remote commands exclusive to customize the display colors and themes DISPlay CMAP lt item gt DEF TT 413 RE GE CMAP lt item gt EE 413 DISPlax e lt item gt el OT 414 DISPlay THEMe CATalog c cceciesesssiiesesese annia h natat sa san senis nons natns ed aenean nhe ne n 414 p ES IA si SE eeh RR M 414 DISPlay CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt This command resets the color scheme for the display Suffix lt item gt Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 415 lt colors gt 1 4 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 3 Customized colors 4 Current screen colors setting for hardcopies Example DISP
3. 33 rp 33 UO Analyzer The UO Analyzer is the default application and provides measurement and display functions for UO data Remote command INST SEL IQ see INSTrument SELect on page 288 Analog Demodulation The Analog Demodulation application requires an additional license This application provides measurement functions for demodulating AM FM or PM signals For details see the R amp S VSE K7 User Manual Remote command INST SEL ADEM see INSTrument SELect on page 288 Vector Signal Analysis VSA The VSA application requires the Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S VSE K70 to be installed and an additional license This application provides measurements and eval uations for Vector Signal Analysis For details see the R amp S VSE K70 User Manual Remote command INST SEL DDEM see INSTrument SELect on page 288 Pulse Measurements The Pulse application requires the Pulse Measurements option R amp S VSE K6 to be installed and an additional license This application provides measurement functions for pulsed signals For details see the R amp S VSE K6 User Manual Remote command INST SEL PULSE see INSTrument SELect on page 288 Starting an Application 3G FDD The 3G FDD BTS and 3G FDD UE applications require the 3GPP FDD Measurements option R amp S VSE K72 to be installed and an
4. 263 BEE ET e 264 BEE e 264 DEVICE e d 265 DEVice CREate DevName Address Protocol Defines a new connection to a instrument to be controlled by the R amp S VSE software Setting parameters lt DevName gt string Name of the instrument to be used for subsequent reference lt Address gt string Network address of the instrument for example IP address lt Protocol gt Interface protocol used to connect the specified instrument to the network VXI11 Standard TCP IP based protocol HiSlip High performance protocol Example DEV CRE SpecAnalyzer 100 100 100 100 VXI11 Usage Setting only Manual operation See New Instrument on page 56 See Connect Disconnect on page 58 DEVice DELete lt DevName gt Deletes the connection settings of the specified instrument Note that after deleting a connection the instrument is no longer known to the R amp S VSE software Setting parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Example DEV CRE SpecAnalyzer 100 100 100 100 VXI11 DEV DEL SpecAnalyzer Usage Setting only Manual operation See Close Instrument on page 57 DEVice DELete ALL Deletes the connection settings of
5. nts Negative Peak detector Network Changing user passwords eene 254 Configuration dialog box eee 250 Configuring DNS server Login Setting up Next Minimum Marker positioning Next Peak i teca e tienes Ua aL ex reene Marker positioning Ql dmm Noise Floor RF attenuation sasini onae 134 Source NTRansitlon i cerrar ro cara uino ASSA 236 Numeric values e E 227 O OBW Deactivating limits A 199 202 IO 199 202 Offset Displayed eerte dte ter eren 42 Frequency we 142 Reference level eege ees ade 136 Online help Working With reote tert reris 49 Operation complete REMOTE c om ic e e a s es 259 Options Electronic attenuation ieee ca 137 High pass filter 129 308 Identification remote AA 259 Information 66 107 Installing 66 107 108 109 Jat inus e 66 Preambplifi amp t rer erret trien ttt rente 138 le LEE 107 Orientation EU Mm 98 Output BUffGI est oes e cte de edere en fase tti ee ee te Configuration vi Configuration remote esee 310 External reference aie ert 65 Noise source 124 131 Parameltets c dee cedes 124 Sample rate definition 118 Settings uere er te Pp 130 Dl 131 151 Overlap Player s
6. INS Tr ment GREate REPLEAS eei e sert ott nde pe exces re EES 286 INSTrument CREate NEW me INSTruoment E INS TUMent HIS RE 287 INSTr rmerntERENALrTIe ctr trt rtr exe nr top t n E Pe D e e X TERN ERAN 288 JE Wein uge lee DEN RE 295 IINSTr ment SELEC DEE 288 EAYout ADD EWINDOW cnt enr trt n tt n en e nh ern AER 302 Egeter ER TREIE Ile e RE 296 EAYeut GEOBal CATalogEWINDOw noa rt rtr rent tnt ce rnnt rentes 300 LEAYout GLOBaLIDENtify WINDOw 5 2 terere nein tene t th tnu cr rre nne re rere rh hri 301 geen EIERE Oe ER WINDOW s 301 LAY out GLOBal REPLace WINDOW tin tont nat tn rnt rtr e cen rentrer en terret rt 301 LEAYoutIDENtify WINDOW 5 oii thia terrre th rra erra rait tere nera tri E rere hr eni EE EX ER ERR 304 LAYout REMove WINDow m LAY ere Ee RTE E EAYout WINDowsn ADDY ueneno rere rr racer tnter rn EEN eror re Ea ERE E d Fac E a Ra E CY eR 305 Eas fenis d pre El RI rm 306 LAY out leede 306 LEAYout WINDowsrn 7 REPLAGB 2 rtt nna rere tre e end eese RR E ESENTA E SR REX EXE RES a oa xa Erreger s 307 MMEMOrY CAT alO LONG Pov casicsscon cesses E P PM 385 MMEMOry CAT AO G re M 384 MMEMO ry CDIRG CORY D RMS 385 MMEMORY GLE ALE 392 MMEMory CL Eaf STAF tt
7. Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 INFO This bit is set if a status message is available for the application Which type of message occurred is indicated in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Register 2to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Register The STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO register contains information on the type of messages that occur during operation of the instrument in use A separate INFO register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO EVENt You can query all messages that occur for a specific channel using the command SySTem ERRor EXTended on page 421 Table 12 5 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO register Bit No Meaning 0 MESSage This bit is set if event or state has occurred that may lead to an error during further operation INFO This bit is set if an informational status message is available for the application WARNing This bit is set if an irregular situation occurs during measurement e g the settings no longer match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily ERRor This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement e g due to missing data or wrong set tings so that the measurement canno
8. Splitting remote rites 346 Types remote 296 302 Ris e zo 43 Hpgdockiggt 47 WLAN ADDIICatiOn iere ere natare e rcnt 33 WRONG FW j ices od 63 X X axis Reference value er reae o qd 140 X value MARK c EU E 193 Y Y axis Mix max values institit saca Eck i 141 Scaling se 135 139 Scaling WO Vecto Jic teen 140 Scaling Statistics eis t tenes 141 Le I 138 Yellow star see Invalid data ICOM icc cto eei ce nat 40 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eese 129 Activating Deactivating remote 309 Z Zoom limits Search range ii trn EE Ee 207 Using for searches nette 199 202 ZOOMING E 205 208 Activating remote EEN 373 Area Multiple mode remote n 373 Area remole dero tre cierre oed b Fees 372 Deactivalirig roe ner terere rn 207 Multiple nee 206 207 Multiple mode remote 373 374 Remote Restoring original display 0 0 0 0 eee eee reece 207 Tele E 206 207 Single mode remote te 372
9. Example DEV GEN LLO SpecAnalyzer ON Manual operation See Local Lockout on page 64 Configuring an External Reference on the Instrument The following commands are required to configure the use of an external reference on the instrument in use For manual operation see chapter 13 4 1 4 Configuring an External Reference on the Instrument on page 268 DEVICE NN e TEE 268 Ip eds ali ticis e 269 RS Re e 269 BI E i e 270 BEVIGEEXTRSEDSY Bee EE 270 RSA Re 270 DEVice EXTRSE TRANUe iere ete opu ces aprum to ct tardar Bana CHAR ERE n eta Rau a Un BR EH p 271 DEVice EXTRef FREQuency lt DevName gt lt Frequency gt DEVice EXTRef FREQuency lt DevName gt This command defines the frequency of the external reference oscillator of the instru ment in use The reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 1 MHz to 20 MHz Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR FREQ SpecAnalyzer 13MHZ Sets the frequency for the SpecAnalyzer instrument to 13 MHz Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Example DEV EXTR FREQ SpecAnalyzer Queries the external reference frequency for the SpecAnalyzer instrument Result 13MHZ
10. aaa Selecting a point in the display no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 373 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 374 for each multiple zoom window 10 4 3 3 How to Zoom Into a Diagram The remote commands required to zoom into a display are described in chap ter 13 6 2 4 Zooming into the Display on page 372 The following tasks are described here To zoom into the diagram at one position on page 208 e To return to selection mode in the diagram on page 209 To return to original display on page 209 e To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram on page 209 To zoom into the diagram at one position 1 D Click on the Single Zoom icon in the toolbar Zoom mode is activated 2 Select the area in the diagram to be enlarged using the mouse pointer The selected area is indicated by a dotted rectangle When you drop the mouse pointer the diagram is replaced by the zoomed trace area 3 Repeat these steps if necessary to enlarge the diagram further uum PIN E S NUN User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 208 R amp S VSE I Q Analyzer Measurements e EQ E pp Scrolling in the zoomed display You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the right and at the bottom of the diagram To return to selection mode in the diagram
11. MMEMory LOAD TYPE Mode This command defines whether the channel specific settings that will be loaded with the subsequent MMEM LOAD STAT command will replace the current channel or acti vate a new channel Parameters Mode NEW REPLace NEW The loaded settings will be activated in a new channel REPLace The loaded settings will replace the currently active channel RST NEW Managing Settings and Results Example INST SEL SPECTRUM2 Selects measurement channel SPECTRUM2 MMEM STOR TYP CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Stores the settings from channel SPECTRUM 2 to the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum MMEM LOAD TYPE NEW Specifies that channel specific settings are to be activated in a new channel MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum to the new channe SPECTRUM2 MMEMory STORe lt n gt STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command saves the current software configuration in a dfl file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file The file extension is dfl Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 Save Saves the current software settings in the file Save dfl Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manu
12. Measurements 1 3 are started simultaneously When I Q Analyzer measurements on both instruments are finished measurements 244 are started INIT SEQ MODE SING INIT SEQ IMM Retrieve results for I Q Analyzer channel INST SEL IQ Analyzer TRAC DATA TRACE1 Returns the magnitude for each trace point 13 12 4 Basic HO Analysis This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a basic UO data acquisition and analyze the data using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment seen Activate the I Q Analyzer application Reset the software RST Default channel is I Q Analyzer with Magnitude result display For demonstration purposes create a new channel for I Q Analyzer INST CRE NEW IQ My IQ Analyzer Programming Examples Define the sample rate TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Set the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Query the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate TRAC IQ BWID Define averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER ON Define an average over 10 measurements TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Add traces with different trace modes DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH Initiate a new measurement and wait until the measurement has finished INIT WAI Format the data as 32 byte real values INST SEL My IQ Analyzer Use real 32 bit format for
13. Enable registers Remote ette em o EUR 259 Error log Error QUEUS S 238 Errors IF OVED iana peaa Y INPUT OMULD eee Messages device specific Queues recommendations Remote control programming eed RE OVL D EE BN EE WRONG FW idee geen ESE event status enable register Se ESR event status register A Essential information Loading UCI data o tnit 93 Evaluation methods EI une cte eic dasci cred eria pa ca 296 302 EVEN ge Mr 236 Event status enable register ESE 500239 eic 258 Event status register ESR 55235 2239 iem 258 3ietrjBom 198 201 REMOTE EE 362 Exporting Comment item e cae ee dese File types tone Re Functions UO data Meta datai 2 reote eddie etico dE EXT REF Status MESSAGE cci poet eterne ter esp i n e baden 37 External reference Frequency osito taie eie us ee deci eo aa 65 Loop bandwidth 65 Seu EET 65 see also Reference frequency susssss 64 Status message es 9f Tuning range 65 External trigger 148 Level remote ENEE dE 322 F FFT Fundamentals ei coti 122 Measurement speed Window functions ssssee 121 156 File input Programming example eene 423 File name Data files i ene iet a tree ette roga 79 ebe 88 92 El Te EE 81 84 File type otorage setliligs esanen
14. oerte entrega 222 Screenshots Printing s e m recipe etes 98 Search limits Activatie ie ote ed etie 199 202 RE e ET WEE 199 202 Search Mode Spectrogram markets eterne 200 Search range ZOOItI ala i Lond rete tei ptg e 207 Search settings le Analyzer cic ta Gee etl Pet een d 199 Searching V elle zi os ET 197 elle e E 61 lA Help gege tae 50 af lu 57 Select Frame Ee EE Select Marker Self alignment left De En LEE 58 63 iin E 63 Self test aiino 261 Ee e cases 30 Aborting remote 289 294 Activating remote 291 294 Mode remote eet eerie 290 294 REMOTE ET csseeles ante th ea 284 Remote control 261 Sequential commands 22291 Elko herrea tre teeter aa petrus Metus Dec 439 Service request SRQ 238 245 Service request enable register SRE 235 238 EE cT 260 Setting commands intret eet ritus 222 Settings File Hamer ette Essai diea 81 84 Loading EE 216 Recalling salo TT Recalling restrictions sussies 77 Saving 79 216 Software Preferences sss 107 Storage location 80 83 88 92 SIONN cites seo trt tae eee ee 76 77 Settling samples FRECOLOING iter eret 87 Shutdown file DEING zu ettet ertet ect n Ree 75 100 101 Signal source REMOTE tee cto ere pr bed eens eras s Cocos
15. Contact Information Customer Support Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com Customer Support North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Customer Support Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Customer Support Asia Pacific Phone 65 65 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com Customer Support China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com Creating R amp S Support Information 109 Save Device FOOD cc ccss caccetedecbeedeaes ctam karten e Eng anidan e REI e Egan 110 Creating R amp S Support Information Creates a zip file with important support information The zip file contains the sys tem configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display This data is stored to the following directory on the PC the R amp S VSE software is instal led on C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version no gt user Software Information and Support The file name consists of the unique device ID and the current date and time of the file creation Example VSE 1310 0002K02 900014 if 20140807 091003 zip If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Remote comm
16. 1 iere net rennen ternera Eun n Ia Een PER RR RR RR ERN RE RRd 33 Operating ES NOS mee E ie ees 35 Graphical User Interface Elements eene enn 35 Gn Y 36 NU ce 36 ET 37 6 1 4 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 32 6 3 3 6 3 4 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 7 1 CAA GAZ 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 2 7 7 2 8 7 2 9 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 7 3 3 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 WINDOWS 38 Understanding the UO Analyzer Display Information eese 41 Customizing the User Interface ccccccssseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeseeeseeeeseeneeeeeeeeaned 43 lee deeem 43 Displaying New Windows 46 Rearranging Windows ctae tete ed e dede e d is 47 Closing and Deactivating Windows and Bars 48 Getting Help 49 Calling Blena jeom e M 49 Using the Help Wee EE 50 Controlling Instruments and Capturing UO Data 52 Inp t SOUFCGes err ertt snus n Runner EEEPEREREXERARRRRR a NRE URERUERRRRR RR RRRRRRRS EROS RRER IRR 52 Connected Instrument 52 File NP e 53 Configuring Instruments recen nenne tine n nta ran nan Enada nnas raus 53 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols 53 Definin
17. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 366 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 367 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 367 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 367 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 368 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMG ener nnne 355 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe essere rne 355 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm GGbamzAtea atten nennen eterna 355 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea essen nnne 355 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK eeeeeeeeeeeee een 356 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK esee 356 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK ene 356 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK esee 356 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWVe sss 356 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe eese 356 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimUmM DEI ow e 356 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW sees 356 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GGbRamvMANimum NENT 357 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT
18. Sum bit The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENAB1e part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Contents of the Status Registers In the following sections the contents of the status registers are described in more detail Remote Control Basics e Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 238 e IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE esee 239 e Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 239 STATUS OPEIRSSIOn REJS srt eite ardet d c tdt ce dita ne 240 e SIATus QUEStionable Register eese eser kara rada 240 e STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register eene 240 e STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO Register 241 e STIATus QUEStionable FREQuency Reglster 2 esee 242 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register 242 e SIATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register 243 e SIATus QUEStonable POWer Rbglslef crt citt etd dt ce tg 243 e STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register icis tas 244 e STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register eeeeeeneneeeeeenennen ennt 244 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Regist
19. If you change any parameters that have an effect on the scaling of the diagram axes the R amp S VSE automatically adapts the trace data to the changed display range This allows you to zoom into the diagram after the measurement in order to show details of the trace How Many Traces are Averaged Capture Count Measurement Mode In Average trace mode the capture count and measurement mode determine how many traces are averaged The more traces are averaged the smoother the trace is likely to become The algorithm for averaging traces depends on the measurement mode and capture count capture count 0 default n Continuous measurement mode a continuous average is calculated for 10 measurements according to the following formula Trace 9 Trace MeasValue 10 Fig 10 11 Equation 1 Due to the weighting between the current trace and the average trace past val ues have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten mea R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements surements With this setting signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal n Single measurement mode the current trace is averaged with the previ ously stored averaged trace No averaging is carried out for the first measure ment but the measured value is stored in the trace memory The next time a measurement is performed the trace avera
20. Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself is case insensitive Numeric suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific channels or sources the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt n lt i gt and are replaced by a single value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 Remote Control Basics Example Definition HCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec tion used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified CD Different numbering in remote control Some standards define a fixed numbering starting with O If the numbering differs in manual operation and
21. SYSTem ERRor NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned For details on error queues see chapter 12 1 5 Status Reporting System on page 234 Usage Query only 13 12 Programming Examples The following programming examples demonstrate how to capture UO data and per form basic UO data analysis using the UO Analyzer in a remote environment Cm tee EN m TP 423 e Configuring Input from an Instrument 424 e Performing a Sequence of Measurements cccccecssccceessesseceeesssseeeesscsueeeeesenaas 425 e Basic I Q Analysis e Recording WT e cle eile tree eese dt ene cer br ni age dd 431 e Saving and Loading Measurement Geitings nern nenn nee 431 e Programming Example Complete Sequential Measurement with Data Export 432 13 12 1 Configuring File Input This example demonstrates how to configure input from a file for a measurement in a remote environment f Ek xxx x Prepare software Ckckckck ck kk kk RST Assign the file as input source for the default channel 1 in VSE x x INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR FILE Define file to load INST BLOC CHAN FILE C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 0_11 user vsa DemoSignals GSM 8PSK iq tar 866KHZ Load 10ms of measurement time st
22. VISA installation is available but a firewall may be prohibiting a connection to other instru ments in the network Try one of the following to resolve the problem Checkthe IP addresses of the instruments configured in the Instruments window and make sure you are allowed to connect to those instruments Tryusing HiSLIP protocol instead of VSI 11 e Ask your local administrator to loosen the firewall restrictions on your PC Restartthe instrument you want to connect to EET BI VISA installation is not complete or available network connections to other instruments are not possible H See Installing VISA on page 12 or contact the Rohde amp Schwarz Support Center see chap ter 14 3 Obtaining Technical Support on page 441 what to do If you place the mouse over the icon a descriptive message is displayed informing you Instrument status The displayed instrument status information depends on the type of instrument that is connected to the R amp S VSE For the supported Rohde amp Schwarz Signal and Spectrum Analyzers the following types of information may be displayed if applicable R amp S VSE Operating Basics Se The instrument is configured for operation with an external reference C 3 The input from the connected instrument is being resampled by the R amp S VSE soft ware to obtain the required sample rate Progress The progress of the current software o
23. Closing Continuing ve A jefe rige loro e 67 Duplicatllig ett teet rr ntes 72 Rer e 70 Input source nsf1 72 Measurement 5 2 22 ILI ete certet eta d Qa 73 Measurement mode alo Pausifig nee PAS Performing measurement 94 Se Toro p 73 FREPIACING EE 72 Settings display SR le lte WEE 38 Measurement Group Setup Ree ele EE Measurement groups P CONTON riserts See GOUPS e Measurement Groups IST EE Measurement in Measurement mode ccccccccceeceesseceeeeeceessseeeeeeeeeees 68 Recording irem 68 Measurement mode 2 32 91 Channels aust Groups nr l Q dala cect 2 95 Measurement Groups esses 68 Measurement points esses 117 157 Measurement sequence firepo ele 68 Measurement time Auto settings en tete tente re dn 161 Displayed 242 ek EC cente miae ner eene ees 154 ROITIOI onde a unte acl epus 332 MORUS 2 orci etn degen oat idea 36 Messages eene ET EE E out E EE Instrument responses deu Le Meta data EXPONMING ME Loading UO data TT MIN orietur ertet e ener tete Ree Yer rrr uoc RENE e a tees Min max values ECHTE 141 MIMMU HE 203 Marker positlohihg sde rre 203 INOXE 5 eon rot or deve s esca ege 203 dee 223 isoforms 225 Modulation Inverted UO remote AA 331 Inverted UO Multiple ZOON sesaria ieoa N NAN
24. DIAG SERV SINF Result C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 0 80a_63 user VSE_1310 0002K02 900014 if 20140807 091003 zip Query only See Creating R amp S Support Information on page 109 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo This command queries information about the hardware and software components Return values lt Information gt Example Usage String containing the version of hardware and software compo nents including the types of licenses for installed options DIAG SERV VERS Queries the version information Response R amp S VSE 0 80a 51 Beta Time Control Management active Analog Modulation Analysis K7 0 70 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 Software Maintenance Expires on 2018 09 30 Query only SCPI confirmed 13 8 2 13 8 3 Configuring the Software General Display DISPlay ANNotation CDA 412 SEI el Notations RE QUENCY AER 412 DIAEA INRA NE 412 DISPlay ANNotation CBAR lt State gt This command hides or displays the channel bar information Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN CBAR OFF Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency lt State gt This command turns the label of the x axis on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN FREQ OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Diagram Footer Annotation on page 102
25. Set the center frequency to 500 MHz FREQ CENT 500 MHz Set the reference level to 0 dBm DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Configure data acquisition Jeeexdx Set the measurement time to 1 ms 10 periods Programming Examples ADEM MTIM ims Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement continuously SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Set the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz BAND DEM 400 kHz Use offline FM trigger TRIG SOUR IQP Trigger when magnitude of I Q data reaches 50dBm TRIG LEV IQP 50 Configure the result display Add an FM Spectrum result display below FM Time Domain LAY ADD WIND 1 BEL XTIM FM AFSP Define two traces in the FM Spectrum 1 Clear write 2 average ADEM FM AFSP WRIT AVER OFF OFF OFF OFF Set analog demodulator to execute 30 captures with 32000 samples each at a sample rate of 8 MHz use IQP trigger trigger on positive slope with a pretrigger offset of 500 samples ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 1IQP POS 500 30 J BRK KKK ko ko ke ke ke kk kk kk Sk kk kk ko ko ke ke ke A hh e k ko k k ke ko kk hh k k k k k k k Perform a single measurement on all groups J BR RK KKK KR KR KR ko ke ke ke kk kk kk kk Ck ko ko ko ko ke ke ke ko kk Ck kk kk kk e k kk k k ko kk k k k hh k k k k k k k Measurements 1 3 are started simultaneously When I Q Analyzer measurements on both instruments are finished measurements 2
26. essent enne rennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVVel essent rennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe RPOSition esee ene DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t ER RK DISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM AREA aeta etr ener ree tt icr eh ten rt t he rona a ER DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA nennen enne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt ZOOM gt GTATe eee ener nnne DISPlay WINDOWSN gt ZOOMIS RN NEE EXPort IQ FILE EXPort IQ FORMAL crt tnr tete eterne tn e het d ee en epe ca v ar de de d e P e px EXPortIQ ME TA DATA c EXPO IQ ME TA DATA SE E EXPort IQ TEE RRE EE 398 FORMatDEXPort DSEParaltor 1 rere terrier rerit tr EX Ferre Pi KESEN AT ENINA AA NEVE 378 PORMAU DATA MM 377 HCOPy ABORt HCOPy CMAP lt item gt RI IT 402 HCOPYV OMAP Stema Qj 403 HCOPYy GMAPSitem PDEFING DE 403 HCOPy DESTination lt device gt EOP bim ds Heioo m HCOPy DEVice LANGUagedeVIC8 ecit eret n ener ct dete E nn RR Len EY rea eee y Dee 405 ACOPy ITEM AL e S 406 HCOPVITEM WINDOW TEX C 406 HCOPy PAGE ORlentatiori deVICBe uuo roter rrr en rn etn n Re tr cnet n deg
27. 12 1 3 1 Syntax for Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an aster isk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification string Remote Control Basics 12 1 3 2 Syntax for Device Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section e DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean FORMat READings DATA lt type gt lt length gt e HCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean e HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt COPy IMMediate COPy ITEM ALL e HCOPy IT COPy PAG HCOPy PAG HCOPy PAG es M LABel string EE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt GI ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait SCALe numeric value Gl MMEMory COPY file source gt lt file destination e SENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value e SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric value SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value numeric value
28. Controlling the ENABIS PaL iet en ree x o ce ea edente 419 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part 420 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part 420 General Status Register Commands SUP HE CEP 418 STATUus QuiEus H eiad ee piu aian a iaaa ere ee E a Poen Enia 418 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to O ina CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned This command is identical to the SySTem ERRor NEXT command Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part For more information on the condition part see chapter 12 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 236 STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition lt ChannelName gt
29. E 342 TRACe IQ BWIDth Ree Le e EE 375 TRACE IQ DATAIMEMORY EEN 376 TRACGETQ DATAZ EE 375 TRACe IQ RLENgth D RRE er Le KEE RRC e RE ET Re e alle EE 335 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH essen eene eerte nnne tnnt aapa e nr aeaa Eai EEEa ta ditas sena Pasa s STEE 336 Re Le ICH E 335 TRACE SNA GOR Nese E HH H E TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory ds TRAGesnsEDATA EX tinet rore tog tir e eri e robe He E HARE REED e zc EX nial 380 HESE DATAT p 378 Ree ER ene OH EE 321 TRIGger SEQuence HOLEDOffETIME icit aereo AAEE ere eere rhe o E ee ra 321 TRIGger SEQuericeFIFPower FIOLDOoff anite t tte tt te tate pete re REN IP Y a OE ETERNE XE EEEE 321 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HYSTeresis cneo nter rere en rh n npn rn e ee a 322 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower TRIGger SEQuence LEVel QPower TRiGger SEQuence LE EVel MAPOWAF ees nennt rer re enne dirt ed e nv te re TEX dg 323 TRIGger SEQuence F LU EVeLEREPOWOE isi aser ra terse rice err rr Ec re REDE RR Ee 323 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port eese nenne nennen nnne nennen 322 TRIGger SEQuence MAPowet FIOLDOolr ecouter rentrer ter eh rer rre eene enti 324 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYS Teresis cn terr rene tr rra er rir rr tt e eerta ta erat 324 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe TRIGger SEQuerice
30. Menu Reference Menu item Correspond ing icon in toolbar Description gt Replace Measure ment Channel Replaces the currently selected channel by the selected applica tion See Replace Current Channel on page 72 gt Delete Current Mea surement Channel Deletes the currently selected channel See Close on page 74 gt Measurement Group Setup Displays the Measurement Group Setup tool window See chapter 7 3 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences on page 67 Instruments gt Configures instruments to be used for input to the R amp S VSE soft ware See chapter 7 2 Configuring Instruments on page 53 New gt Search Creates a new instrument configuration See chapter 7 2 2 Defining the Connection Information Man ually on page 56 Searches for connected instruments in the network See chapter 7 2 4 Searching for Connected Instruments Auto matically on page 61 gt Delete All Deletes all current instrument configurations See chapter 7 2 5 Deleting all Instrument Configurations on page 62 Setup Hides or displays the Instrument tool window See chapter 7 2 Configuring Instruments on page 53 Preset gt Restores stored settings See chapter 8 1 Restoring the Default Software Configuration Preset on page 75 gt All Restores the default software configuration globally for the entire software
31. Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 352 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 350 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 350 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 352 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 349 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 349 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace Analysis The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker gt Marker to Trace men
32. The Help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the focused screen element is displayed If no context specific help topic is available a more general topic or the Contents tab is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g Print dialog Device Search VISA Resource String Builder etc no context sensitive help is available P To display a help topic for a screen element not currently focused a Select the Help pointer icon on the toolbar X The pointer changes its shape to a and an arrow b Select the screen element to change the focus A topic containing information about the selected now focused screen element is displayed Getting Help 6 4 2 Using the Help Window The Help window contains several tabs e View shows the selected help topic e Contents contains a table of help contents Index contains index entries to search for help topics Search provides text search The Help toolbar provides some buttons To browse the topics in the order of the table of contents Up arrow previous topic Down arrow next topic To browse the topics visited before Left arrow back Right arrow forward To increase or decrease the font DI EE TE To search for a topic in the index The index is sorted alphabetically You can browse the list or search for entries in the list 1 Switch to the Index tab 2 Select the Keyboard icon be
33. smart card reader connected to the computer via serial bus or USB e g OMNI KEY USB reader connected to a LAN to USB converter to distribute the license via the network e g DIGI AnaywhereUSB 2 Licensing support If you have any difficulties with the licensing system support is only assured when you are using the USB smart card reader that is delivered with the smart card Using the USB smart card reader 1 Included in the delivery of the software is the smart card in full format and a smart card reader aP 2 Break out the smart card in SIM format gt 3 Insert the smart card into the smart card reader B M Deinstalling R amp S VSE a Turn the smart card reader in a way that the OMNIKEY label faces upward b Insert the smart card with the chip face down and the angled corner facing away from the reader 4 Push the smart card into the reader as far as possible The smart card reader is ready for use on any USB interface Locking the computer If you have difficulties unlocking the computer while the smart card is connected because MS Windows tries to get log in information from the card after you have locked the computer You can solve this issue by editing the system registry Manual change 1 Open the Windows Start Menu and select the Run item 2 Enter regedit into the dialog box to open the system registry 3 Look for HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows Cur
34. 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 12 1 3 4 Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semico lon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path e The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it both single and double quotation marks are possible The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 e Hexa HF3A7 e Block 21312 A white space ASCIl Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates the header from the parameters 12 1 3 5 Structure of a command line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by one of the following 12 1 3 6 Remote Control Basics e a lt New Line e a lt New Line gt with EOI e an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line
35. 65 Resetting the Default Values eacceeeeiueecees enses ctetu cna ep nnnm a cuan tena ra RRn Re sb ai REM e 65 Reference Frequency Input Source Various sources are available to provide a reference frequency to the instrument in use depending on the type of instrument The available reference parameters also depend on the instrument type For details see the instrument s User Manual Remote command DEVice EXTRef SOURce on page 270 Tuning Range The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per mil lion 10 For more information see the instrument s User Manual Remote command DEVice EXTRef TRANge on page 271 Frequency Defines the external reference frequency to be used for variable connectors only For more information see the instrument s User Manual Remote command DEVice EXTRef FREQuency on page 268 Loop Bandwidth Defines the speed of internal synchronization with the reference frequency The setting requires a compromise between performance and increasing phase noise For more information see the instrument s User Manual Remote command DEVice EXTRef LBWidth on page 269 Reference Frequency Output The instrument in use can provide a reference frequency to other instruments that are connected to this instrument If one of t
36. CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CONT on page 344 Frame Count Determines how many frames are plotted during a single sweep measurement as opposed to a continuous sweep The maximum number of possible frames depends on the history depth see History Depth on page 178 For more details see Time Frames on page 169 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt on page 344 Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate on page 344 10 3 7 Adjusting Settings Automatically Depending on the instrument in use some settings can be adjusted by the instrument automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a mea surement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting from the R amp S VSE select the corre sponding function in the Auto Set toolbar or in the configuration dialog box for the set ting where available Configuration Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the instrument in use should behave e de
37. IQ STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC 1Q STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Y Max Y Min on page 141 Frequency CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer sessi nennen nennt 318 SENSeJ FREQuency EEN eraus SCENE EEN ENEE See 319 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP eeeeseeeeeesenn nennen nennen renes e ss se sena sas asa sa sas dada 319 SENSe PREQUSnGOV CENTeESTEPJAU TO EE 319 ISENS amp JFREGOUEnCEDFESGE iciatis d eri Pd dei eod 320 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Center Frequency Marker Frequency on page 203 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command
38. The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 384 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 79 Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQTar on page 279 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i CSV on page 273 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQW on page 274 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i MAT on page 275 File Type Various file types are supported for UO data import and export Note For best performance and to ensure comprehensive meta data is available use the iq tar format This is a widely used file format for Rohde amp Schwarz products For details on the supported file formats see chapter A 5 Reference Supported File Formats on page 453 iq tar Compressed file format for an individual measurement channel or several channels with identical capture settings sample rate band width csv Comma separated ASCII file format iqw Binary file format contains only UO data from a single channel with out any meta data mat Matlab file format v 4 or v 7 v 7 requires Matlab Runtime installation Remote command Exporting UO recording files EXPort IQ FORMat on page 397 Comment Inserts a descri
39. The Set to Default function restores the original default settings for the user defined color set You can select which of the three default settings are restored Remote command DISPlay CMAP item PDEFined on page 414 9 3 How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing You can configure the style and colors with which various screen objects are displayed or printed To select a color set 1 Select File gt Preferences gt Theme Color 2 In the Screen Colors area select a predefined set of colors to be used for screen display or select User Defined Colors to configure the color set yourself Software Information and Support 3 In the Print Colors area select a predefined set of colors to be used for printing screenshots or select User Defined Colors to configure the color set yourself Activate the Show Print Colors on Display option to see a preview of the print col ors To configure a user defined color set 1 In the Theme Color tab of the Preferences dialog box select User Defined Colors either for the screen or the print colors 2 Select Modify User Defined Colors The Screen Color Setup dialog box is opened 3 From the Selected Object list select the object to which you want to assign a color 4 Select a color from the Predefined Colors or select the Userdefined Colors button to define a different color The Preview area indicates the currently selected col
40. Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the specified input connector or input channel of the instrument in use meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 149 Note Which input and output connectors are available depends on the connected instrument For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the instrument s Getting Started manual Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 TRIG SOUR EXT4 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S VSE starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency The third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 UO Power Trigger Source This trigger source is only available in the UO Analyzer application and in applications that process UO data Configuration Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the bandwidth setting for UO data acquisition See Analysis Bandwidth
41. DEV INFO OPT MyFSW Define the use of an external reference on MyFSW DEV EXTR SOUR MyFSW EXT DEV EXTR FREQ MyFSW 13MHZ Assign MyFSW as input source for default channel 1 INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV INST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV MyFSW Configure connection to YourFSW at 100 100 100 99 using HiSlip protocol DEV CRE YourFSW 100 100 100 99 BiSlip S EEK K K k K k K k k k k A k k k k k k k k k A k A k k k k K k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Configure four channels eex x S EEE K K k K k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k 1 default IQ Analyzer I Q Analyzer for instrument input from MyFSW 2 AnalogDemodFSW AnalogDemod for instrument input from MyFSW 3 Your IQ Analyzer I Q Analyzer for instrument input from YourFSW 4 AnalogDemodFile AnalogDemod for file input Create channel 2 INST CRE NEW ADEM AnalogDemodFSW Duplicate default channel 1 to create channel 3 INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST CRE DUPL Result IQ Analyzer 2 INST REN IQ Analyzer 2 Your IQ Analyzer Create channel 4 INST CRE NEW ADEM AnalogDemodFile Query list of channels INST LIST Result IQ IQ Analyzer ADEM AnalogDemodFSW IQ Your IQ Analyzer Programming Examples ADEM AnalogDemodFile Configure input sources for each channel INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV INST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV MyFSW INST
42. DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 141 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 319 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 142 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW 13 6 1 5 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This
43. IESSE User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 38 Graphical User Interface Elements 6 1 4 2 In the default configuration the channel bars for multiple channels are displayed in separate tabs in the same window Depending on which result display is currently active the corresponding channel information tab is displayed However you can sep arate the tabs into individual windows See chapter 6 3 Customizing the User Inter face on page 43 Channel specific settings The channel bar provides information on channel specific settings for the measure ment A bullet next to the setting indicates that user defined settings are used not automatic settings A green bullet indicates this setting is valid and the measurement is correct A red bullet indicates an invalid setting that does not provide useful results Channel information varies depending on the active application For details see the individual user manuals Instrument settings In addition to the channel specific settings the channel bar also displays information on general instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values This information is displayed in gray font and only when applicable for the current measurement as opposed to the channel specific settings that are always displayed The instrument settings depend on the type of instrument that is connected to the R amp S VSE For the
44. Manual mode The RBW can be defined by the user The required Sample Rate Record Length and the Meas Time on page 154 are adapted accordingly A single window is used thus the Window Length corresponds to the Record Length A Flatop window function is used Advanced FFT mode The RBW is determined by the advanced FFT parameters Using advanced FFT mode multiple overlapping FFT windows can be used with an averaging transforma tion algorithm see Combining Results Trace Detector on page 122 10 2 3 2 FFT Calculation Methods FFT calculation can be performed using different methods Single In single mode one FFT is calculated for the entire record length that means the win dow length is identical to the FFT length and both are identical to the record length Fig 10 1 FFT parameters for single FFT calculation Averaging In averaging mode several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are combined to determine the final FFT result for the record The number of FFTs to be combined is determined by the Window Overlap and the Window Length R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements ee HEN wincow tencth o weg Overiap E FFT Length Fig 10 2 FFT parameters for averaged FFT calculation Window Functions In advanced FFT mode the Fourier transformation is not performed on the entire cap tured data in one step In this case an averaging transformation algorithm is used which u
45. Manual operation See Frequency on page 65 DEVice EXTRef LBWidth lt DevName gt lt Bandwidth gt DEVice EXTRef LBWidth lt DevName gt Defines the loop bandwidth that is the speed of internal synchronization with the refer ence frequency on the instrument in use The setting requires a compromise between performance and increasing phase noise For a variable external reference frequency with a narrow tuning range 0 5 ppm the loop bandwidth is fixed to 0 1 Hz and cannot be changed Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 0 1 Hz 1 Hz 3 Hz 10 Hz 30 Hz 100 Hz 300 Hz The possible values depend on the reference source and tuning range see instrument documentation Default unit Hz Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR LBW 3 Manual operation See Loop Bandwidth on page 65 DEVice EXTRef 0100 DevName State DEVice EXTRef 0100 lt DevName gt If enabled a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the REF OUTPUT 100 MHZ con nector of the instrument in use Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR 0100 ON Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 65 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data DEVice EXTRef O6
46. Menu Reference Menu item Correspond ing icon in toolbar Description Channel Infos gt Displays the channel bar with global channel information for the selected meausrement channel See Channel bar on page 41 Active Windows gt Selects a result display as the active window the corresponding channel is also activated See Active windows selected window on page 46 Configure Selected Result Window Displays the Window Configuration dialog box to configure result specific settings Help Menu The Help menu provides access to help support and licensing functions Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Help E Opens the Online help window See chapter 6 4 Getting Help on page 49 License Licensing version and options information See chapter 9 4 1 Licensing Versions and Options on page 107 Support Support functions See chapter 9 4 2 R amp S Support Information on page 109 Register VSE Attempts to create an email with the default mail program if available to the Rohde amp Schwarz support address for registra tion Online Support Opens the default web browser and attempts to establish an Internet connection to the Rohde amp Schwarz product site About Software version information UO Analyzer Menus The following menus are only available if an UO Analyzer measurement channel is selected I
47. POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 151 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 148 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs For troubleshooting tips see Uncompleted sequential commands blocked remote channels on page 439 Parameters Source Example Manual operation IMMediate Free Run EXT EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 Trigger signal from the corresponding TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the instrument in use or the oscillo Scope s corresponding input channel For details on the connectors see the instrument s Getting Star ted manual RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications viDeo Video
48. SMALI With this smaller deviation 0 5 ppm a very narrow fixed loop bandwidth of 0 1 Hz is realized With this setting the instrument can synchronize to an external reference signal with a very pre cise frequency Due to the very narrow loop bandwidth unwan ted noise or spurious components on the external reference input signal are strongly attenuated Furthermore the loop requires about 30 seconds to reach a locked state During this locking process NO REF is displayed in the status bar WIDE The larger deviation 6 ppm allows the instrument to syn chronize to less precise external reference input signals Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR TRAN WIDE Manual operation See Tuning Range on page 65 Loading Input Files The following commands are required to load measurement data from files to be used as input See also chapter 8 3 4 Recalling Measurement Data from Files on page 91 Useful commands for using input files described elsewhere INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings SOURce on page 281 EXPort IQ META DATA I VALue on page 398 Remote commands exclusive to loading input files INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i CSV seen 273 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i CURRent SAMPle suse 273
49. The path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards possible to query a certain type of files only If you use a specific file as a parameter the command returns the name of the file if the file is found in the specified directory or an error if the file is not found 256 File name not found EA Jis Return values lt FileNames gt List of file and directory names separated by commas If no files are found an error is displayed 256 File name not found Example MMEM CAT C R_S Instr user SPOOL PNG Returns all files in C R_S Instr user whose names start with SPOOL have 6 letters and the extension PNG e g SPOOL1 PNG SPOOL2 PNG SPOOL3 PNG Example MMEM CAT C R_S Instr user SPOOL6 PNG Query whether the file SPOOL6 PNG also exists in the directory Result 256 File name not found MMEMory CATalog C R_S Instr user SPOOL6 PNG Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files on page 80 See Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files on page 88 Managing Settings and Results MMEMory CATalog LONG Path This command returns the contents of a particular directory with additional information about the files Query parameters Path String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory The path may
50. Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously Initial marker setup is performed using the Marker dialog box Analysis Selected Specifics for 1 Magnitude The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active P Place New Maket araisa bibis epa ue eren ar Mb nbn 192 LH Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 193 Sirac TI MER 193 IET TS ESISTENTE TITIO QE E TQ DL TD LLL 193 Marker Position X Value un ccrte erret eot n ea ee dere cit abate weder 193 Frame Spectrogram only uiii coe geet Lir ene SERA eege 194 Marker hue 194 Reference Marker eene nennen nnne nnn nennen enne nnne nnn 194 Linking to Anotlisr EE 194 Assigning the Marker to a Trage rere truces enacted s 194 el ET EE 195 All Markata OUR c 195 amp Place New Marker Activates the next currently unused marker and sets it to the peak value of the current trace in the current window If a spectrogram is active an edit field is displayed for the frame number s 0 in which the marker is to be placed Analysis vm Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 When you select the arrow on the marker selection li
51. icon in front of the IQ Analyzer measurement channel 2 Select File as the input type 3 Select the icon to open the Load UO File dialog box and select the storage location and the file name 4 Select the Capture icon for the IQ Analyzer measurement channel The stored data is loaded from the file and evaluated in the IQ Analyzer result displays Setting and Moving a Marker Markers are useful to determine the position of particular effects in the trace The most common use is to determine a peak which is the default setting when you activate a marker We will set a marker on the peak in the Magnitude display of the IQ Analyzer measurement 1 Tap the Magnitude display to set the focus on that window 2 Select the amp New Marker icon from the toolbar R amp S VSE Trying Out the R amp S VSE Marker 1 is activated and automatically set to the maximum of trace 1 The marker position and value is indicated in the diagram area as M1 1 X IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude CF 10 GHz 1001 pts 3 Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram X IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude 1001 pts User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 26 Measurement Concept 5 Measurements and Results 5 1 The R amp S VSE provides several applications for dif
52. lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 207 See Restore Original Display on page 207 See X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 207 13 6 3 Retrieving Results The following commands can be used to retrieve the results of the UO Analyzer mea surement e Retrieving Captured UO Data 375 e Retievinig VO Trace Dalai tete sat rl cea ued 377 e Retrieving Marker and Peak Search Results 380 User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 374 13 6 3 1 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Retrieving Captured UO Data The captured UO data is output in the form of a list three different formats can be selected for this list see TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 375 For details on formats refer to chapter A A Reference Format Description for UO Data Files on page 451 TRACE IO DATAT i e tet eee vata redde eve et e ee veda Te eld un 375 BK E WR e EE 375 TRACE E enee 376 T
53. 02 235 12 1 5 2 Remote Control Basics e IST PPE The IST flag Individual STatus like the SRO combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request Output buffer The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENAB1e part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers States events or summary bits of other registers owes V y YF PP PV PV A 14 13 12 CONDition part 3 2 t 9 Li i 15 14 13 12 PTRan
54. 6 1 1 6 1 2 Graphical User Interface Elements Menu bar with general and measurement specific menus Toolbar with general and measurement specific tools Tool window for measurement group tool Tool window for instrument configuration Tabs for individual measurement channels Channel bar for active channel settings Result display for first measurement channel yellow line Result display for second measurement channel purple line Four result displays for third measurement channel green line 0 Status bar with error messages progress bar and instrument status for active channel DO D JO OS GObh Menus Most functions in the R amp S VSE are available from the menus at the top of the window The following menus provide basic functions for all applications e File e Window Help These functions are described in this manual An overview is provided in chapter A 1 Menu Reference on page 442 Other menus are application specific and provide different functions depending on the selected measurement channel for example e Input Measurement Setup e Trace e Marker Limits These menu functions are described in the individual application s User Manual and in chapter 10 I Q Analyzer Measurements on page 111 Toolbars Standard functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbars The toolbars can be docked anywhere alongside the outer edge of the R amp S VSE win dow
55. ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 336 Upper Level Hysteresis Auto Settings Configuration When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier if available of the instrument in use are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 337 Lower Level Hysteresis Auto Settings Configuration When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier if available of the instrument in use are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 337 Analysis 10 4 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc can be config ured via the Analysis button in the Overview Trace COMMGUAUOM E 162 CEMITERIO LLLI 185 e Zoomed Displays eiii irme ceci eto ii ee IL D
56. Activate all channels and groups for measurement INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 AnalogDemodFSW Programming Examples INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 Your IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 AnalogDemodFile INST BLOC USE 1 Group 1 INST BLOC USE 1 AdemodGroup L Configure the I Q Analyzer application J BRR RRR RRR kk KK KA e k e Ck kk kk kk KC A KOC k k k k k Ck k ok k ok ck ko ko ko ko k k k k k KG KK Select the channel INST SEL IQ Analyzer Configure data acquisition Define the sample rate TRAC IQ SRAT 32MHZ Set the record length number of samples to capture to 1000 samples TRAC IQ RLEN 1000 Query the bandwidth of the resampling filter determined by the sample rate TRAC IQ BWID Format the data as 32 byte real values FORM DATA REAL 32 List all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC IQ DATA FORM IQP f Ek xxx Configure the trace ckckckck ck ck ck kk Define averaging for the I Q trace TRAC IQ AVER ON Define an average over 10 captures TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Change the trace modes DISP TRAC1 MODE WRIT DISP TRAC2 MODE MAXH DISP TRAC3 MODE MINH tt Configure the Analog Demod measurement channel x J BRR RR KR RR KKK KK A KAA A A k k k k A k k k k k k A k KC KCkCkCkCkCkCk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck k k k k k k k k Select Analog Demod channel INST SEL AnalogDemodFSW
57. CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea on page 359 Exclude LO If activated restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions ON The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is 2 5 x resolution bandwidth RBW Due to the interference by the first local oscillator to the first inter mediate frequency at the input mixer the LO is represented as a sig nal at 0 Hz To avoid the peak marker jumping to the LO signal at 0 Hz this frequency is excluded from the peak search OFF No restriction to the search range The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude on page 362 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 362 Auto Max Min Peak Search If activated a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum AUTO on page 366 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO on page 367 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Ana
58. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN Span This command defines the bandwidth around the marker position Parameters Span Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R amp S VSE model RST 596 of current span Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK FUNC BPOW SPAN 2MHz Measures the band power over 2 MHz around the marker Manual operation See Span on page 205 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe State This command turns markers for band power measurements on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates or turns marker 4 into a band power marker Manual operation See Band Power Measurement State on page 204 See Switching All Band Power Measurements Off on page 205 Using Delta Markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE eese 371 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHonBbOWerREGu 372 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN essere enne 372 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNGCHon BbOWert GTATel seee eeerererererersrersenen 372 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer MODE Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are dis played 13 6 2 4 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters Mode POWer Result is displayed as a power in dBm DENSity Result is
59. Example INST BLOC LIST Result for 3 measurement channels Analog Demod IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer 2 Usage Query only INSTrument BLOCk MOVE lt Predecessor gt This command moves the selected group to a different position within the measure ment sequence Tip To move an individual channel between groups see INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel1 MOVE on page 291 Parameters lt Predecessor gt String containing the name of an existing group after which the selected group will be inserted Use an empty string to move the new group to the first position in the sequence Usage Event INSTrument BLOCk SELect lt GroupName gt This command selects a measurement group for further operations for example chan nel functions Parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group Usage Setting only INSTrument BLOCk USE lt State gt lt GroupName gt If activated the specified group is included in the measurement sequence Parameters State 1 0 Setting parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group 13 4 6 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Example INST BLOC USE 1 Group 1 Manual operation See Activate Deactivate Group on page 69 Controlling Measurement Sequences The following commands are required to control measurement sequences in a remote environment The functions for manual operation are described in chapter 7 3 1 Sequence Functions on pa
60. Frequency domain TSTable Transient Spectrum Table Table 13 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for VSA application Parameter value Data source default result display CBUFfer Capture buffer Magnitude absolute MEAS Meas amp Ref Magnitude relative REF EQualizer Equalizer EVECtor Error vector EVM Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Data source default result display MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy Result Summary MERRor Modulation Errors Magnitude error SYMB Symbols Hexadecimal Table 13 7 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 3GPP FDD application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CCONSt Composite Constellation CDPower Code Domain Power CDEPower Code Domain Error Power CEVM Composite EVM CTABle Channel Table EVMChip EVM vs Chip FESLot Frequency Error vs Slot MECHip Magnitude Error vs Chip MTABle Marker table PCDerror Peak Code Domain Error PDSLot Phase Discontinuity vs Slot PECHip Phase Error vs Chip PSLot Power vs Slot PSYMbol Power vs Symbol RSUMmary Result Summary SCONst Symbol Constellation SEVM Symbol EVM SMERror Symbol Magnitude Error SPERror Symbol Phase Error Table 13 8 lt WindowType gt parameter values for WLAN application Parameter value Window type BITStream Bitstream CMEMory Magnitude Capture CONStellati
61. INSTrument BLOCK CHANnel SETTings FILE i CURRent TIME eeesesssss 274 INSTrument BL OCkCHAhNnelt SET Tings EI EslscOW aiaiai 274 INSTrument BL OCkCHANnelt GE TTmngoslELEslscMAT een 275 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i OVERIap AVG OFF eese 276 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i OVERIap AVG ON eese 277 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i STARtSAMPle esses 278 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SET Tings FILE lt i gt STARt TIME ccececceeecaeeeeeeeneseeeenenes 278 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i STOP SAMPlIe esee 278 INSTrument BLOCK CHANnel SETTings FILE i STOP TIME eese 279 INSTrument BL OCkCHAhNnelt GE TTngoslE EststiOTag eneren erener eeereeo 279 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CSV lt FileName gt lt ABW gt lt IQChannel Assigns the specified csv file as the input source for the currently selected channel The file is automatically loaded to the R amp S VSE software and assigned the sequential number provided as the FILE lt i gt suffix Subsequent commands concerning file input from this file must use the same suffix Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of the source Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file name of the file to be loaded lt ABW gt The anal
62. OK 5 Inthe Instruments window select Connect to establish a connection to the specified instrument The connection state should turn green and indicate connected PS Measurement Group Setup 9 Mew Instrument j 9 Search J FSW 26 x Interface Woe Vxi 11 M IP Address AN Resource String TCPIP 10 ANN 1 5 TR l Advanced j Calibration State calibrated Self Alignment Connection State connected Infos amp Settings J L Disconnect Capturing and Analyzing Data from a Connected Instrument 4 1 2 Assigning the Instrument to a Channel Now we must assign the configured and connected instrument as the input source for the default measurement channel 1 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window for the default group 1 select the icon in front of the default measurement channel IQ Analyzer 2 Select Instrument as the input type 3 From the Instrument selection list select the instrument to be used for the mea surement 4 From the Input Source selection list select RF Instruments eas nent Group Setup New Group Channel BS Replace Channel Ix 3 m strument e rsw 26 xj put Source RF M 5 Select the Capture icon for the IQ Analyzer measurement channel Since the default measurement mode is continuous a continuous measurement is started immediately on the connected instrument The results are displayed in t
63. Opens the LXI configuration home page for the instrument in use This allows you to configure or operate the instrument directly from a Web browser For details see the instrument s user documentation 7 2 5 Deleting all Instrument Configurations You can delete the connection settings of all defined instruments in one step using the File gt Instruments gt Delete All menu item Note that after deleting a connection the instrument is no longer known to the R amp S VSE software Instrument configurations are also deleted when you use the preset function File gt Preset gt All amp Delete Instruments see Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Configurations Preset All amp Delete Instruments on page 75 Remote command DEVice DELete ALL on page 263 Configuring Instruments 7 2 6 Initializing a Self Alignment on the instrument in use Once configured you can perform a self alignment on any instrument connected to the R amp S VSE software When you put the instrument into operation for the first time or when strong tempera ture changes occur it may be necessary to align the data to a reference source During instrument start the installed hardware is checked against the current firmware version to ensure the hardware is supported If not self alignment fails until the firm ware version is updated The correction data and characteristics required for the alignment are determined by comparison of
64. See Restoring All Default Settings Preset All on page 75 gt All amp Delete Instru ments Restores the default software configuration globally for the entire software and deletes all instrument configurations See Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Con figurations Preset All amp Delete Instruments on page 75 gt Selected Channel Restores the default software configuration for an individual channel See Restoring Channel Settings Preset Selected Channel on page 76 gt Reset VSE Layout gt Digital Standards Restores the default layout of windows toolbars etc in the R amp S VSE software See Restoring User Specific Settings Reset VSE Layout on page 76 VSA application only Menu Reference Menu item Correspond ing icon in toolbar Description gt Restore VSA Factory Settings VSA application only Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz availa ble at the time of delivery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Preferences gt Configures global software settings See chapter 9 1 General Software Behavior on page 100 gt General See chapter 9 1 General Software Behavior on page 100 gt Displayed Items Hides or shows individual screen elements See chapter 9 2 1 Displayed Items on page 101 gt Theme
65. The following commands are required to configure initial instrument settings relevant for control by the software DEVice GENetaliDISPlAY uicc tra tr e eee er cou nte etn tac oa dav esa pd e eau edge Eden 4e 267 E GEET H e 267 DEVice GENeral DISPlay lt DevName gt Activates or deactivates the display update function on the specified instrument Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The instrument display is updated while it is being controlled remotely e g by the R amp S VSE software OFF 0 The instrument s display is deactivated while it is being control led remotely This improves performance during remote control RST OFF Query parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV GEN DISP SpecAnalyzer ON Manual operation See Display Update on page 64 DEVice GENeral LLO lt DevName gt Activates or deactivates the local lockout function on the specified instrument 13 4 1 4 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Instrument is set to be controlled remotely that is by the R amp S VSE software OFF 0 Instrument is set to be operated locally via its graphical user interface RST OFF Query parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262
66. The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher mi
67. The spectrogram is updated with each new measurement Clear the displayed spectrogram to start a new one CALC2 SGR CLE Configure a continuous spectrogram for a series of measurements The display is not cleared when a new measurement is started CALC2 SGR CONT ON Set the number of frames to be recorded per measurement to 100 CALC2 SGR FRAM COUN 100 Set the number of frames to be stored to 1000 10 measurements CALC2 SGR HDEP 1000 Define a gray scaled coloring low values light gray high values dark gray DISP WIND2 SGR COL GRAY Define a color map for a range that comprises 40 of the measurement range excluding 30 at each end The colors are not scaled linearly the light gray colors are stretched to distinguish low values better DISP WIND2 SGR COL LOW 30 DISP WIND2 SGR COL UPP 70 DISP WIND2 SGR COL SHAP 0 8 Select single capture mode INIT CONT OFF Define 10 captures to be performed per measurement SENS AVER COUN 10 Programming Examples Initiate a new measurement and wait until the captures have finished INIT WAI The spectrogram is updated with each new capture Includes all frames in the memory in the search area CALC2 MARK SGR SAR MEM Set marker to the frame 1 second after measurement begin Note the negative value CALC2 MARK1 SGR FRAM 1s Set marker 1 to the minimum level in this frame CALC2 MARK1 MIN Set marker 1 to the minimum level for the same f
68. WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 139 13 6 1 3 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S VSE adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Ref Level Position on page 139 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scalin
69. While you are in zoom mode selecting points in the display changes the zoom area In order to select or move a trace or marker you must switch back to selection mode R Select the Selection mode icon in the toolbar To return to original display Q 1 1 Click on the Zoom Off icon in the toolbar The original trace display is restored Zoom mode remains active however To switch off zoom mode and return to selection mode select the Selection mode icon in the toolbar To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram 1 G Click on the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar Multiple zoom mode is activated 2 Select the first area in the diagram to be enlarged as described in To zoom into the diagram at one position on page 208 The selected area is indicated by a dot ted rectangle When you have completed your selection the original trace is shown in an over view diagram with the selected area indicated by a dotted rectangle The zoomed trace area is displayed in a separate window see figure 10 21 3 In the overview diagram select the next area to be enlarged The second zoom area is indicated in the overview diagram and a second zoom window is displayed 4 Repeatthese steps if necessary to zoom into further trace areas up to four ES User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 209 Analysis To move or change zoom areas In multiple zoom mode you can change the size or position of the individual zoom a
70. amp Color Configures the style of individual screen elements See chapter 9 2 2 Display Theme and Colors on page 102 gt Network amp Remote Configures the network settings and remote access to or from other devices See chapter 12 2 Network and Remote Control Settings on page 249 gt Recording Configures general recording parameters See chapter 8 3 2 General Recording Settings on page 86 Print Opens Print dialog to print selected measurement results See chapter 8 4 Printing Current Measurement Results on page 96 Exit Closes the R amp S VSE software A 1 1 2 Window Menu The Window menu allows you to hide or show individual windows Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Player Displays the Player tool window to recall UO data recordings See chapter 8 3 4 2 Restoring the Measurement Results R amp S VSE Player on page 93 Instrument Setup Displays the Instruments window to configure input instruments See chapter 7 2 Configuring Instruments on page 53 Measurement Group Setup Displays the Measurement Group Setup window to configure a measurement sequence See chapter 7 3 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences on page 67 New Window gt Inserts a new result display window for the selected measure ment channel See New Measurement Window on page 73 A 1 1 3 A 1 2
71. and various other items such as lines or traces etc can be stored as well see chapter 8 2 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 79 7 Select Save A file with the defined name and path and the extension df1 is created To recall configurable measurement settings 1 Select the E Open icon from the toolbar 2 In the Recall dialog box switch to the Recall tab 3 In the file selection dialog box select the file name and storage location of the set tings file Note The File Type indicates whether the file contains instrument settings for all channels or only those for the current channel 4 If several items were saved select which items are to be restored 5 f channel settings were saved select whether the settings will replace the settings in the current channel or whether a new channel with the saved settings will be opened How to Export UO Data 6 Select Recall The settings and selected items from the saved measurement are restored and you can repeat the measurement with the same settings 11 6 How to Export UO Data Note that in order to export the raw data you must start recording directly at the time of capture Once the data has been captured without being recorded it can no longer be exported as raw data To save results of data that has been captured but not recorded use the Save set tings functions see chapter 11 5 How to Save and Load Measurement Settings on page 216 To rec
72. essere 357 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eese 357 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz GbECirooram v MAximumfPDEAkRT 357 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOWVe essen 357 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWVe eeeeeeeeseee 357 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELOW ener 357 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOw eese 357 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT sesseseseseeeene rennen 357 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT essen 357 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eese 358 CAL Culate nzM Abkerzm GbECtrooram v MiNimumt PEAR eene 358 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a marker on a particular frame Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the
73. if not set to Blank is displayed after the next measurement How to Display and Configure a Spectrogram Step by step instructions on how to display and configure a spectrogram are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Spectrogram Settings on page 176 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 13 6 2 2 Configuring Spectrograms on page 343 The following tasks are described here To display a spectrogram on page 181 e To remove the spectrogram display on page 182 To set a marker in the spectrogram on page 182 To configure a spectrogram on page 182 To select a color scheme on page 183 e To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders on page 183 To set the value range numerically on page 184 To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider on page 185 To set the color curve shape numerically on page 185 To display a spectrogram 1 Select a Magnitude or Spectrum result display 2 From the Trace menu select Spectrogram The Spectrogram is automatically displayed as a subwindow of the selected result display where each subwindow is the same size 3 To enlarge the Spectrogram to the full window size select State Full 4 To clear an existing spectrogram display select Clear Spectrogram Analysis 5 Close the dialog box The spectrogram is updated continuously with each new ca
74. logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 316 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 315 Y Axis Max Defines the maximum value of the y axis in the currently selected diagram in either direction in Volts Thus the y axis scale starts at lt Y Axis Max and ends at lt Y Axis Max This command is only available if the evaluation mode for the UO Analyzer is set to IQ Vector or Real Imag Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 315 Scaling Statistics Displays For Statistics displays scale settings are available for both the y axis and the x axis X Axis Reference Value usana 1a ratur tr trete tE tutue ne nenen n nanne na 140 cro EEN 140 OS E 140 TE ME EE 141 PETS CUM 141 X Axis Reference Value The reference value on the x axis in the current unit The reference value is the highest value displayed on the x axis Remote command CALCulate n 1Q STATistics SCALe X RVALue on page 317 Range Range of x axis in dB Remote command CALCulate n 1Q STATistics SCALe X RANGe on page 317 Offset Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the x axis is changed accordingly Remote command CALCulate n 1Q STATistics SCALe X RLEVel OF
75. marker indicates the value of the marker relative to the specified reference marker by default marker 1 In addition special functions can be assigned to the individual markers The availability of special marker functions depends on whether the measurement is performed in the frequency or time domain and on the type of measurement Temporary markers are used in addition to the markers and delta markers to analyze the measurement results for special marker functions They disappear when the asso ciated function is deactivated Activating Markers Only active markers are displayed in the diagram and in the marker table Active markers are indicated by a checkmark in the marker selection lists By default marker 1 is active and positioned on the maximum value peak of trace 1 as a normal marker If several traces are displayed the marker is set to the maximum value of the trace which has the lowest number and is not frozen View mode The next marker to be activated is set to the frequency of the next lower level next peak as a delta marker its value is indicated as an offset to marker 1 A marker can only be activated when at least one trace in the corresponding window is visible If a trace is switched off the corresponding markers and marker functions are also deactivated If the trace is switched on again the markers along with coupled functions are restored to their original positions provided the markers have not been used on
76. n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT esses nennen CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MlNimum ABOWe essen 361 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT essen CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK CAL Culatesn gt DEL lamarkersim gt TRAGO xt ioter co eere er bi nas aei era kr reve o aped x RE EES CALC late E E Kl EE 351 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkeremo XRELative ccrtc ri ctp SEENEN ee etapa 380 CAL GCulatesr DEETamarkersti Y io certa cesar tridente era ce A rece Ene rta tee 380 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe CALCulate n IQ STATistics SCALe X QUANITize ettet enn tinte n n nna 317 CAL Culatesn gt lQ S TATistics SCALe E 317 CAlCulate cnzJOGTATlsttce GCAlexvhRlEVelOptGet ener 317 CALOCulate n IQ STATistics SCALe X RVALue CAL Culate cnzMAbker mz EUNGC on BbOWer GPDAN nennen nnns nn nnne 371 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer STATe essere enne 371 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CEN T6r creo cetera oett pl eR th vere up dubie dui CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence CAL Culate cnz M Ah ker mz UNK TOMAbRkercmz enne ren
77. on page 153 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the software uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 Magnitude offline Trigger Source For offline input from a file rather than an instrument Triggers on a specified signal level Remote command TRIG SOUR MAGN see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For gated measurements this setting also defines the gate level For details on su
78. see chapter 11 4 How to Perform a Sequence of Measure ments on a Single File or Instrument on page 215 How to Import UO Data for Analysis To import data via the Measurement Group Setup window 1 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the icon in front of the measurement channel 2 Select File as the input type 3 Select the icon to open a file selection dialog box and select the storage loca tion and the file name Alternatively select a file from the selection list of recently imported files 4 Select the Capture icon for the measurement channel The stored data is loaded from the file and evaluated in the selected application To import data via the Input dialog box Alternatively to the procedure described above starting in the Measurement Group Setup tool window you can also import data via the Input dialog box 1 From the Input amp Output menu select Input Source 2 Select UO File as the input source 3 Select Select File to open a file selection dialog box and select the storage loca tion and the file name 4 Setthe state of the UO file input source to On 5 Close the Input dialog box 6 Select the Capture icon for the measurement channel The stored data is loaded from the file and evaluated in the selected application R amp S VSE How To Perform Measurements with the R amp S VSE 11 3 How to Perform Measurements on Multiple Files
79. that is beneath the menu bar above the status bar or on the left or right edges of the window For details see chapter 6 3 Customizing the User Interface on page 43 For information on how to hide or display individual toolbars see chapter 6 3 4 Clos ing and Deactivating Windows and Bars on page 48 Note that some icons are only available for specific applications Those functions are described in the individual application s User Manual Graphical User Interface Elements An overview of all available toolbar functions is provided in chapter A 2 Reference of Toolbar Functions on page 447 6 1 3 Status Bar The software status instrument status errors and warnings and any irregularities in the instrument in use are indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the R amp S VSE win dow EB PA LS mA Hiding the status bar You can hide the status bar display e g in order to enlarge the display area for the measurement results File Preferences Displayed Items See chapter 9 2 1 Displayed Items on page 101 Software status The status bar indicates the state of the VISA installation on the PC running the R amp S VSE software The VISA installation is required in order to connect the R amp S VSE to other instruments The following VISA status icons may be displayed Table 6 1 VISA status icons VISA installation is available network connections to other instruments are possible
80. yes Clear EVEN parts of the regis yes yes ters Clear ENABle parts of all yes yes OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 Fill PTRansition parts with 1 yes yes 7 Clear NTRansition parts Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing yes yes yes and input buffer 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA TOR clears the output buffer 12 1 6 General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In con trast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Command sequence As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Other wise the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first see also chapter 12 1 4 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution on page 232 Reacting to malfu
81. 1 Installing and Starting the R amp S VSE Software After installing all required components you can install the R amp S VSE It is recommen ded that you copy the file from the installation CD ROM to your hard disk before you execute it To install the R amp S VSE software 1 Insert the R amp S VSE CD ROM in the PC If the start page does not open automatically select the start htm file in the main directory 3 3 Using the Smart Card Reader Switch to the Installation tab Select the link to the VSESetup_XXX exe file Select a storage location on your hard disk From the hard disk select the VSESetup_ XXX exe file o m RB o Nw Select the required options to be installed Unless you have ensured the required Microsoft NET Framework versions are installed manually before starting the R amp S VSE installation be sure to keep the R amp S VSE NET installation option selected 7 Select Install The installer performs the following actions Checks for the required Microsoft NET Framework versions on the PC and if nec essary downloads the required version from the Internet before installing both ver sions Installs the R amp S VSE software including an uninstall tool Creates a shortcut on the desktop optional If necessary the software will specifically ask you to set the required environment variables This step may require administrator rights on the PC When the installation is
82. 1 Trace Configuration on page 162 This menu is application specific Table 1 3 Trace menu items for the I Q Analyzer Menu item Description Trace lt x gt Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is highlighted blue Copy Trace Copies trace data to another trace Reference of Toolbar Functions Menu item Description Spectrogram Trace Opens the Traces configuration dialog box A 1 2 4 Marker Menu The Marker menu provides access to marker specific functions This menu is application specific Table 1 4 Marker menu items for the UO Analyzer Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Place New Marker c e Place New Marker on page 192 Select marker x MI le Select Marker on page 195 Marker to Trace Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 194 All Markers Off All Markers Off on page 195 Marker Individual Marker Setup on page 191 Search 7 y IR Marker Search Settings on page 197 Marker Function chapter 10 4 2 Marker Usage on page 185 A 2 Reference of Toolbar Functions Common functions can be performed via the icons in the toolbars Individual toolbars can be hidden or displayed Hiding and displaying a toolbar 1 Right click any toolbar or the menu bar A context menu with a list of all available toolbars is
83. 1 is blue trace 2 black trace 3 green and the markers are turquoise The background is always printed in white and the grid in black Screen Colors Print Selects the current screen colors for the printout The background is always printed in white and the grid in black Screen Colors Hardcopy Selects the current screen colors without any changes for a hard copy User Defined Colors Selects the user defined color setting Remote command HCOPy CMAP item DEFault colors on page 402 Showing Print Colors on Display Temporarily shows the currently selected print colors on the screen display This func tion can be used as a preview for printing Modifying User Defined Color Assignments You can configure the colors used to display and print individual screen objects according to your specific requirements The colors are configured in the identical Screen Color Setup Printer Color Setup dialog boxes Display Settings Selected Object Background Ennn Si LI O TE IM as Feo Preview OK Cancel Userdefined Colors Selecting the Object Modifying User Defined Color Assignments Selects the object for which the color is to be defined Colors can be defined for the following objects e Background Grid Individual traces Display lines Limit lines and check results Markers and marker information Remote command Each object is assigned to a specific suffix
84. 13 7 Managing Settings and Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 In UO Analyzer application for Real Imag UO for example 1 852719887E 011 0 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 116 See I Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 Managing Settings and Results The commands required to store and load software settings and import and export measurement results in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 8 Data Management on page 75 Addressing drives The various drives can be addressed via the mass storage instrument specifier lt msis gt using the conventional Windows syntax The internal hard disk is addressed by deg For details on storage locations refer to chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 79 The file names lt FileName gt parameter are given as string parameters enclosed in quotation marks They also comply with Windows conventions Windows file names do not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase notation Wildcards x The two characters and can be used as wildcards i e they are variables for a selection of several files The question mark replaces exactly one character the asterisk
85. 4 are started INIT SEQ MODE SING INIT SEQ IMM S EEE K K k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Retrieve results for I Q Analyzer S BRR KKK KK k ko ke ke ke ke kk hh e ko ko ke ke ko ko kk k kk k e ke ke kk ke ke ke ke ke ke e ke Return the magnitude for each trace point INST SEL IQ Analyzer TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 Change the result display to Real Imag I Q LAY REPL WIND 1 RIMAG Configure searches to search both I and Q branches CALC MARK SEAR MAGN Query the result of the peak search on both branches CALC MARK Y Return the first 500 samples of the stored I Q data for the measurement Programming Examples For each sample first the I value then the Q value is listed TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 500 Return the second half of the 1000 captured sample values TRAC IQ DATA MEM 500 500 J BRR KKK KKK kk ke ke ke ke kk I ck kk ko ko ko ko ke ko kk A k k kk kk kk kk ko ke ke ke ke kk kk ke k k eee Retrieve Results for Analog Demodulation x J BRR KKK ko ko ke ke ke ke ko kk hh e e ko ko ke ke ke kk hh e e e k E k k k k ko ke KKK INST SEL AnalogDemodFSW Query the carrier power CALC MARK FUNC ADEM CARR Result 10 37 dBm Retrieve the trace data of the most recent measurement trace 1 TRAC DATA TRACE1 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 18721
86. 79 Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQTar on page 279 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CSV on page 273 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQW on page 274 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt MAT on page 275 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation Essential Information Defines the channel specific information required to re configure the recorded mea surement If the I Q data file contains measurement information it is displayed read only For iqw files or files stored by applications other than R amp S VSE that do not con tain this information the essential information must be provided manually Sample Rate Essential Information If a stored sample rate is available it is indicated for reference only and cannot be changed If not available the sample rate used to obtain the stored data must be specified manually Acquisition Bandwidth Essential Information The bandwidth of the data that was stored to the file If the bandwidth of the stored data is available it is indicated and cannot be changed If the bandwidth was not stored a default value of 0 8 Sample Rate is used This value can be changed manually UO Format Essential Information Determines how the stored UO data is to be interpreted The available formats depend on the file type IIQQ First all l values are listed then the Q values
87. 80 l G data oc ec ten deeem edens 91 VG orari P 93 Instrument settings 4 216 Me et data eerte eerta td 93 Sample Rate Lut ite ds tend ee tas 93 TE de Le EE 76 7T Local lockout fe d LEE 64 Login N t 2 oen t ee ea ee eoe 253 Logo lune M 98 Loop bandwidth External reference ecciesie ttes 65 Lower Level Hysteresis erret 161 LTE APpIICAHOR quee 33 LXI Instrument connection iieii 62 M Magnitude Evaluation methodi tt etii cen 111 VQ EE 111 Marker Search area softkey ocior 201 Search type softkey AA 200 Marker functions D actiValingi usciti ertt i ritenere ti i ata 205 Marker search Spectrograms programming example 430 Marker search area Remote Conto E 362 Marker table Evaluatioty methodi cr ttti ene 116 Marker to RE Ire En EC Assigned trace as elt Reie Band power remote control ssssss 370 Basic settings Configuration Configuration remote Control 348 Deactivating a Delta marKers i iiiii eterne ides ente 194 ee 186 348 Linking MINIMUM areas coce cas Hes canst ertsc sad candia tevacted aver seniorneemet vies 203 Minimum remote control sesse 362 365 Next minimum Next minimum remote control 362 365 E BEE Next peak remote control i geom n Peak remote control sss
88. ASCII format 10 kBytes 4 Binary format 2 kBytes Parameters NORM This value is always NORM 0 This value is always 0 lt SampleRate gt Sample rate for the data acquisition Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32000000 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer lt TriggerMode gt Selection of the trigger source used for the measurement IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower For IMM mode gating is automatically deactivated RST IMM lt TriggerSlope gt Used trigger slope POSitive NEGative RST POS lt PretriggerSamp gt Defines the trigger offset in terms of pretrigger samples Nega tive values correspond to a trigger delay This value also defines the interval between the trigger signal and the gate edge in samples Range 461373339 to 461373339 RST 0 lt NumberSamples gt Number of measurement values to record including the pretrig ger samples See chapter 10 2 2 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth on page 118 RST 1001 Example TRAC IQ SET NORM 0 32MHz EXT POS 0 2048 Reads 2048 l Q values starting at the trigger point sample rate 32 MHz trigger External slope Positive TRAC TO SET NORM 0 4 MHz EXT POS 1024 512 Reads 512 I Q values from 1024 measurement points before the trigger point filter type NORMAL sample rate 4 MHz trigger External slope Positive Manual operation See Record Length on page 154 TRACe IQ SRATe
89. CHAN FILE STAR SAMP 10 INST BLOC CHAN FILE STOP SAMP 1000 INST BLOC CHAN FILE CURR SAMP 120 Data from the input file is replayed starting with sample number 10 and ending with sample number 1000 The current display is at sample 120 Manual operation See Playback Settings on page 95 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i CURRent TIME Time This command defines the absolute time within the input file i which is currently displayed Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel Parameters lt Time gt double value Absolute time Range O0 to meas time of stored data Default unit s Example INST BLOC CHAN FILE STAR TIME 0 32s INST BLOC CHAN FILE STOP TIME 0 64s INST BLOC CHAN FILE CURR TIME 0 40s Data from the input file is replayed starting at 0 32 s and ending at 0 64 s of the captured data The current display is at 0 40 s Manual operation See Playback Settings on page 95 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQW lt FileName gt lt ABW gt lt SampleRate gt Format lt IQChannel Assigns the specified iqw file as the input source for the currently selected channel The file is automatically loaded to the R amp S VSE software and assigned the sequential number provided as the FILE lt i gt suffix Subsequent commands concerning file input from this
90. Defines which data and settings are stored or will be recalled Depending on the File Type only channel settings or global settings are available Which items are available also depends on the installed options see also chapter 8 2 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 79 Remote command MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL On page 390 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault on page 390 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings on page 390 MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL on page 391 MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE on page 391 MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive on page 392 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings Save File Saves the settings file with the defined file name Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt STATe on page 395 MMEMory STORe lt n gt STATe NEXT on page 395 Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel Restores the measurement settings as saved in the selected settings file If the set tings file contains settings for a specific channel only select Recall in New Channel to activate a new channel with the stored settings or Recall in Current Channel to replace the current channel settings Note If a measurement channel with the same name as the channel to be restored in a new channel is already active the channel name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number E IQ Analyzer E In remote commands you must append this number to the channel name as we
91. Detector types Detector Abbrev Description Positive Peak Pk Determines the largest of all positive peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Negative Peak Mi Determines the smallest of all negative peak values of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point Analysis Detector Auto Peak Abbrev Ap Description Combines the peak detectors determines the maximum and the minimum value of the levels measured at the individual frequencies which are displayed in one sample point RMS Rm Calculates the root mean square of all samples contained in a measurement point To this effect R amp S VSE uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are squared summed and the sum is divided by the number of samples root mean square For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the square sum For linear display the root mean square value is displayed Each measurement point thus corresponds to the power of the measured values summed up in the measurement point The RMS detector supplies the power of the signal irrespective of the wave form CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Correc tion factors as needed for other detectors to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Average Av Calcu
92. Fig 6 4 Screen elements in the I Q Analyzer application 1 Color coding for windows of same channel 2 Channel bar with measurement settings 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area with marker information 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display Channel bar The channel bar shows the most important settings for the corresponding application IESSE User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 41 Understanding the I Q Analyzer Display Information Select a setting in the channel bar to open the corresponding configuration dialog box and change the setting quickly and easily Right click a setting to display a context menu for it For the UO Analyzer application the channel bar shows the following settings Table 6 4 Information displayed in the channel bar for the UO Analyzer application Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Ref Offset Reference level offset Freq Center frequency Meas Time Measurement time Rec Length Defined record length number of samples to capture SRate Defined sample rate for data acquisition RBW Spectrum evaluation only Resolution bandwidth calculated from the sample rate and record length Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information IO Analvzer 1 Maanitude Fig 6 5 Window title bar i
93. Group 1 J IQ Analyzer 3 Move the Help window anywhere on the screen for example next to the R amp S VSE window 4 Toresize the Help window select the window frame and drag it to the required size 4 1 6 Adding Further Measurement Channels In addition to the default I Q Analyzer measurement channel we will add a second channel for UO Analysis 1 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the Channel button to add a new measurement channel to the group 2 Select the I Q Analyzer measurement mode mm EIN RON CO CAN NN NU User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 22 R amp S VSE Trying Out the R amp S VSE The channel bar and the default result displays for the new IQ Analyzer measure ment channel are displayed If necessary the previously displayed windows are cumulated in tabs to create room on the display Fle _ Input amp Output _ Meas Setup b uoe BEB k UA Ro 2 Fig 4 3 Second IQ Analyzer measurement channel IQ Analyzer 2 3 Select the configured instrument as the input type for the new measurement chan nel Instruments BESEEEIUCTHI DIE EST US TS UTR m xI New Group channel P Replace Channel de Group 1 u el IQ Analyzer gt il gt e x Instrument rsw 26 z Input Source g IQ Analyzer 2 gt Il x Instrument Fsw 26 z Input Source User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 23 Capturing and Analyzing Data fro
94. Group Functions on page 68 Tweet adentro haa dera Ca tron Te aae ri a e atu n pao rodean 289 INUTIateBLOCIE CONMGGS tit oce ice coenae t deb oreet oo eo rotae enden ven 289 INI Tiate Reie eech ue 290 INITiate BL OCklMMediate nennen nnne nnn nnn nnn sne nnns sisi ssh ii sss se sn nsi s4n 291 INSTr mentBLOOCK e TER MOV irt pac eoo send cu cett d e ote aeo ett cec cen 291 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SET Tings EUSE aiii eene iaaii 291 INS TrumentBEOCIGOREaleE NEW iie roa eee edo exer ince Eye Rt baee 292 INS TiamentBE oce DELEGIS E 292 INS Tr melbBEOCIC DIST oriri m o trio Eee etude in toes Pa pisce uer 293 INSTIumentBEOCICM OVE ease ENEE SES Nec cU pan SS EES NEE SEENEN 293 INS Tru mentBE OK SE Lect ee eterne tpe ne ta uc atia ipn ENEE co LR PES ier REO 293 INS Troment BLOCK SE ouai eta rentre eec rca ce ba eb Peg neE t v eens 293 INITiate BLOCKk ABORt This command stops the currently active measurement group To continue the measurement for the group use INITiate BLOCk CONMeas on page 289 To start a new measurement for the group use INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 To abort the entire measurement sequence use INI Tiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 294 Usage Event Manual operation See Pause Cont on page 70 INITiate BLOCk CONMeas lt GroupName gt This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single capture mode The measuremen
95. Group Setup tool window toggle the icon Input Type Assigning the Channel Input Source Selects an instrument or a file as the type of input provided to the channel Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings SOURce on page 281 INPut SELect on page 309 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences Instrument Assigning the Channel Input Source Specifies a configured instrument to be used for input Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings DEVice lt d gt on page 280 Input Source Instrument Assigning the Channel Input Source Configures the source of input and channel on the selected instrument to be used RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Oscilloscope input channel 1 2 3 or 4 Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings SOURce TYPE on page 281 File Assigning the Channel Input Source Specifies the UO data file to be used for input Select a file from the list of recently loaded files or select to open the Load UO File dialog box see chapter 8 3 4 1 Loading the UO Data File and Essential Mea surement Information on page 91 Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt IQTar on page 279 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CSV on page 273 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQW On page 274 INST
96. IQBLock L 1 1 1 1 1 Q Q Q Q Q Q iqw format only IQIQ IQPair One pair of UO values after the other is listed 1 Q 1 Q 1 Q iqw format only Complex iq tar format only cannot be edited Polar iq tar format only cannot be edited Meta Information Provides additional general information on the data file if available This information is provided for reference only and cannot be edited 8 3 4 2 Restoring the Measurement Results R amp S VSE Player In order to replay the stored measurements in individual channels the R amp S VSE soft ware provides a special tool the R amp S VSE Player Using the R amp S VSE Player you can play back the entire measurement or only a specific time span and you can define how to process multiple records The R amp S VSE Player is available via the Window gt Player menu item Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation ETT Analog Demod IQ Analyzer 8 gt 1 fo File Playback Start Time 00s Current Position 0 05 Stop Time ED Overlap Averaging On 75 0 Ze of meastime Averaging Off 750 of meastime If available the loaded UO file for the selected measurement channel is displayed You can also load a different UO file directly in the R amp S VSE Player Alternatively to the R amp S VSE Player you can use the Play function in the Mea surement Group Setup tool window to replay a channel for which the Input Source File is selected
97. If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided CH Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S VSE User Manual 10 3 Configuration The easiest way to configure an UO Analyzer measurement channel is via the I Q Ana lyzer Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Meas Setup gt Overview menu item Alternatively you can access the individual dialog boxes from the corresponding menu items The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 13 6 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer on page 307 Configuration e Gonfigurauorm OVebVibW ee sett tente de rn xr d ox a 126 Datalnputand Output Set figs E 128 le Te 132 e Prequeney Songa xod ec Mene O Deed bee tue tee c ites 141 LEES n 142 e Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Gettngs AA 152 e Adjusting Settings Automatically sss 159 10 3 1 Configuration Overview The easiest way to configure an UO Analyzer measurement channel is via the I Q Ana lyzer Overview dialog box which is displayed when
98. Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Function Config tab Then select the Band Power button Select Band Power Config Les o 1325 GHz Norm S on E 1 325 GHz Norm AA o 1 325 GHz Norm pic e 1 325 GHz Norm pris Off 1 325 GHz All Bandpower Markers Off Specifics for 2 Spectrum z For more information see Measuring the Power in a Channel Band on page 190 Band Power Measurement Gate 204 iso E 205 Power Mode re a t an Re am rd ail e ge ceto ts Genio aes a E e x 205 Switching All Band Power Measurements On 205 Band Power Measurement State Activates or deactivates band power measurement for the marker in the diagram Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements not zero span in the Spectrum application If activated the markers display the power or density measured in the band around the current marker position 10 4 2 5 10 4 3 Analysis For details see Measuring the Power in a Channel Band on page 190 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 371 Span Defines the span band around the marker for which the power is measured The span is indicated by lines in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN on page 371 Power Mode Defines the mode of the power measurement result Power The result is an absolute power level
99. Length If enabled all available records for a channel are stored The Number of Records is ignored and disabled Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation If disabled only the most recent Number of Records on page 86 are stored Remote command RECord MAXimum RLEN on page 401 Additional Settling Samples Stores additional samples in addition to the specified capture time for the channel to compensate for settling effects This setting is required for connected instruments that require resampling The addi tional samples compensate for settling effects in the filters used by the resampler You can recognize the use of a resampler by the Resampler active message in the status bar of the R amp S VSE Remote command RECord SETTling TIME on page 401 8 3 3 Exporting Recorded UO Data Recorded data from a instrument in use can be stored to a file permanently You can then use the data in the export file as input for analysis at a later time or using a differ ent application Measurement results are recorded using the Export UO File dialog box which is dis played when you select the i Save UO Recording icon from the main toolbar or the File Save IQ Recording menu item o het i MESI I Drive amp C OS 7 Path temp C temp E General Files Size 3 File Type dgtar x a E IQ Analyzer 3 RsDistributortmp EN F8E35228 016E 4673 97CB
100. Remote Control Settings e csseseeiieectsee ete 249 e Howto Set Up a Network and Remote Control 250 12 1 Remote Control Basics Basic information on operating an instrument via remote control is provided here This information applies to all applications and operating modes on the R amp S VSE See also chapter 7 2 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 53 12 1 4 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI commands messages are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The R amp S VSE supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status reg isters The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed informa tion on concepts and definitions of SCPI Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers 12 1 2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories R amp S VSE Network and Remote Operation pae Sey e Interface messages Interface messages are transmitted t
101. S VSE also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time The commands required to configure spectrograms in a remote environment are described here For details and manual operation see Spectrogram Settings on page 176 When configuring spectrograms the window suffix is irrelevant The settings are always applied to the spectrogram window or to all spectrogram windows if several are active for the same measurement channel For commands to set markers in spectrograms see Marker Search Spectrograms on page 354 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement 343 Configuring the Color Map 346 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement CALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate esses nennen 344 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate sese 344 CALCulatesmsSORam CONT ies etd rob nta quce tonta nd tantae core tede 344 CAL Culate n SPECtrograntiCON E 344 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam FRAMe COUNL cccccecsceneccncenseeseteneedeceeeceeaeeeeeeneneeeneneneneneas 344 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNLE sessi ne nnne rrr rns 344 CALGulate n SGRam FRAMe SELacl 2 cito baste csva cane dea Rau e Y Ra EEN 345 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect sisse ener enhn 345 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam HDEPIN eceeececec
102. SEL AnalogDemodFSW INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV NST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV MyFSW w w INST SEL Your IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV INST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV YourFSW D D INST SEL AnalogDemodFile INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR FILE INST BLOC CHAN FILE C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 10a_62 user vsa DemoSignalsNGSM 8PSK iq tar 866KHZ Load 10ms of measurement time starting at 1ms current display at 2 5ms from start INST BLOC CHAN SETT FILE STAR TIME 0 001 INST BLOC CHAN SETT FILE STOP TIME 0 01 INST BLOC CHAN SETT FILE CURR TIME 0 0025 t EEEk hh Configure two groups CKCkckckck ck ck kk ck S EEK KK k k k kk k k k kk k k k kk k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k kk k k k k k Measurements on one instrument cannot be performed simultaneously gt Separate channels using same instrument as input into different groups Group 1 default Group 1 channels 1 3 Group 2 AdemodGroup channels 2 4 Create new group 2 INST BLOC CRE AdemodGroup Group 1 Move channels 244 to new group INST BLOC CHAN MOVE AdemodGroup AnalogDemodFSW INST BLOC CHAN MOVE AdemodGroup AnalogDemodFSW AnalogDemodFile Query list of channels in group 2 INST BLOC LIST Result AnalogDemodFSW AnalogDemodFile Query list of channels in group 1 INST BLOC SEL Group 1 INST BLOC LIST Result IQ Analyzer Your IQ Analyzer
103. SOUR DEV NST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV MyFSW D w NST SEL Your IQ Analyzer NST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV INST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV YourFSW D D NST SEL AnalogDemodFile INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR FILE NST BLOC CHAN FILE C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 0 90a_32 user vsa DemoSignalsNGSM 8PSK iq tar 866KHZ f Ek xx Configure two groups kckckckckckckckckck Measurements on one instrument cannot be performed simultaneously Programming Examples gt Separate channels using same instrument as input into different groups Group 1 default Group 1 channels 1 3 Group 2 AdemodGroup channels 2 4 Create new group 2 NST BLOC CRE AdemodGroup Group 1 Move channels 244 to new group INST BLOC CHAN MOVE AdemodGroup AnalogDemodFSW NST BLOC CHAN MOVE AdemodGroup AnalogDemodFSW AnalogDemodFile Query list of channels in group 2 NST BLOC LIST Result AnalogDemodFSW AnalogDemodFile Query list of channels in group 1 NST BLOC SEL Group 1 NST BLOC LIST Result IQ Analyzer Your IQ Analyzer Activate all channels and groups for measurement x INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 AnalogDemodFSW INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 Your IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 AnalogDemodFile INST BLOC USR 1 Group 1 INST BLOC USE 1 AdemodGroup Perform a single measurement on all groups
104. STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition lt ChannelName gt R amp SSVSE Remote Commands J 4 J J e STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition lt ChannelName gt These commands read out the CONDition section of the status register The commands do not delete the contents of the CONDition section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 13 10 1 3 Reading Out the EVENt Part For more information on the event part see chapter 12 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Sta tus Register on page 236 STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStio
105. UO File dialog box See chapter 8 3 4 1 Loading the UO Data File and Essential Measurement Informa tion on page 91 10 3 2 3 Output Settings The R amp S VSE can control the output provided by the instrument in use to special con nectors for other devices For details on the output connectors refer to the instrument s Getting Started manual Output settings can be configured via the Input amp Output Output menu item Which output settings and connectors are available depends on the instrument in use Configuration IF Video Output IF Out Frequency a MHz Noise Source i5 On WES Trigger 2 Output Trigger 3 E Output IE VIDEO DEMODJ CUIU doo ari sa eta n ro ex ra gta oh rk eerie 131 IF Out PrequeriGy inui oen a od rtr ce dedi ed Gr dre e ots 131 Beete eege 131 GGG CR ec M E A E 131 Ed ER 132 L EE 132 BEC 1E c ROTER 132 BE o Es NONEM 132 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is currently not available IF Out Frequency This function is currently not available Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on the instrument in use on or off if available External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the instrument in use itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT For details see chapter 10 2 4 1 Input from Noise Sources on page 124 Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 31
106. Y value of the marker Function Activated marker or measurement function Function Result Result of the active marker or measurement function Searching for Signal Peaks A common measurement task is to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum signal levels The R amp S VSE provides various peak search functions and applications e Setting a marker to a peak value once Peak Search e Searching for a peak value within a restricted search area Search Limits User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 188 R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements EH Peak search limits The peak search can be restricted to a search area The search area is defined by limit lines which are also indicated in the diagram In addition a minimum value threshold can be defined as a further search condition When is a peak a peak Peak excursion During a peak search for example when a marker peak table is displayed noise val ues may be detected as a peak if the signal is very flat or does not contain many peaks Therefore you can define a relative threshold Peak excursion The signal level must increase by the threshold value before falling again before a peak is detec ted To avoid identifying noise peaks as maxima or minima enter a peak excursion value that is higher than the difference between the highest and the lowest value mea sured for the displayed inherent noise Effect of peak excursion settings example The following figure sho
107. a Frequency Reference for the Connected Instrument An instrument in use can use the internal reference source or an external reference Source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators A crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source If an external reference is used all internal oscillators of the instrument in use are synchronized to the external reference frequency External references must be connected to the instrument in use correctly For details see the instrument s Getting Started manual Info amp Settings FSW 8 EEE General Reference Info Reference Frequeng Input Internal Reference Tuning Range 0 5 ppm External Reference 10 MHz 9 6 ppm External Reference 1 20 MHz External Reference 100 MHz Frequency 10 0 MHz o oo eo Loop Bandwidth 10 Hz Sync Trigger Reference Frequency Output Output 100 MHz On Off Output Sync Trigger On Off Output 640 MHz On Off Set To Default References are configured in the Instruments tool window Window gt Instruments In the configuration area for the instrument select Infos amp Settings then select the Reference tab The default setting is the internal reference When an external reference is used EXT REF is displayed in the status bar Reference Frequency Input Source 65 Mmm E 65 Re E 65 Configuring Instruments Wero suit imos pon p eMe creceeraaaaveen 65 Reference Frequency Output
108. a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge up to four different areas of the trace simultaneously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom areas can be moved and resized any time The zoom area that corresponds to the indi vidual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars IQ Analyzer 4 Spectrum ei Cw Gg 63 73 dBm 1 000070000 GHz Fig 10 20 Single zoom emecdw ae 65 49 dBm 1 000070000 GHz ml wi 1 CF 996 481457385 MHz 15777 pts 385 17 kHz ais Hz eem 187 38 kHz Span 1873780091 MHz 51659076 MHz CF 999 937540664 MHz 14071 pts 34353 kHz Span 3 Fig 10 21 Multiple zoom User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 206 Analysis The selected zoom area can be used to restrict the search range for a peak search but only in single zoom mode see Using Zoom Limits on page 199 o Using the zoom area to restrict a peak search 10 4 3 2 Zoom Functions The zoom functions are only available from the toolbar SIMO ZOOM MP sende 207 Multip
109. a new window with the selected result display for the measurement channel Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences x Close Removes the measurement channel from the group and closes all windows Select Channel IQ Analyzer 7 Selects a channel from the list of configured channels in the Control toolbar In the Measurement Group Setup window the selected channel is highlighted The corresponding channel bar info is displayed and the focus is set on the default window for that channel The menus are adapted to the selected application Remote command INSTrument SELect on page 288 Restoring the Default Software Configuration Preset 8 Data Management The captured data and measurement results from the R amp S VSE can be stored to files Furthermore measurement and software settings can be stored e Restoring the Default Software Configuration Preset ssssesssss 75 e Storing and Recalling Measurement Gettngs AA 76 e Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation 84 e Printing Current Measurement Results eene 96 8 1 Restoring the Default Software Configuration Preset When delivered the R amp S VSE has a default configuration You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements This is often rec ommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise Preset fun
110. a running measurement Cont continues a measurement including any averaging procedures that was tem porarily interrupted To restart averaging with the next measurement use the Capture function after stopping the last measurement Remote command ABORt on page 282 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 283 Measurement mode Single Continuous Defines how data is captured during the measurement For details see Measurement mode on page 31 Single A single measurement is performed that is data is captured for the specified measurement time For the Input Source File a single record is replayed To replay subsequent records continue the measurement using the J Pause Continue function CO Continu A continuous measurement is performed that is data is captured ous continuously until the measurement is stopped manually using the the I Pause Continue function For the Input Source File the data from the UO file is replayed continuously until stopped Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 284 Record Starts a measurement and stores the measurement data to a temporary file You can then use the data in the stored file as input for analysis at a later time or using a differ ent application For details see chapter 8 3 1 Recording Measurement Data on page 85 Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings RECord on page 285 New Measurement Window Adds
111. aFile HCOP DEST MMEM Prints the data to a file HCOP DEV LANG BMP Selects bmp as the file format MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER Screenshot bmp Selects the file name for the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Prints all screen elements HCOP ITEM WIND TEXT ACLRResults Adds a comment to the printout 13 7 7 6 13 8 13 8 1 Configuring the Software HCOP Stores the printout in a file called Screenshot bmp HCOP NEXT Stores the printout in a file called Screenshot 001 bmp Printing on a Printer HCOP DEST2 SYST COMM PRIN Prints the data on a printer SYST COMM PRIN ENUM FIRS SYST COMM PRIN ENUM Returns the available printers e g LASER on LPTI1 D Means that one printer is available SYST COMM PRIN SEL2 LAGER on LPT1 Selects the printer for the print job on device 2 HCOP PAGE ORI2 LAND Selects the landscape format for the printout HCOP TDST STAT2 ON Includes date and time on the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Prints all screen elements HCOP Initiates the printout Configuring the Software e Software Support and Information 410 e ap Display drei rt rrt to eee c re ee eee 412 e Colors and Theme 412 ent ul 415 Software Support and Information The following commands are required to obtain information concerning optional func tionality licenses service functions or system messages DiAGmnosticcSERVIGE SINEO9 ecl uen een ie bene x vane d
112. activated YG For spectrogram displays define which frame the next minimum is to be searched in For the Next Min Up Down functions the search is automatically performed in all frames above or below the currently selected frame respectively Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 367 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 369 Center Frequency Marker Frequency al Sets the center frequency to the selected marker or delta marker frequency A peak can thus be set as center frequency for example to analyze it in detail with a smaller span Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer on page 318 Reference Level Marker Level ER REF Sets the reference level to the selected marker level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence on page 311 Analysis 10 4 2 Band Power Marker For each of the 16 markers band power measurement can be activated Band power measurement markers are configured in the Band Power Config dialog box using the Band Power function The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box see Individual Marker Setup on page 191 Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the Marker dialog box and vice versa To display the Band Power Config dialog box do one of the following e
113. active for the selected win dow see State on page 177 Points 1001 Capture Count 0 Select Frame 0 Continue Frame On Off Frame Count 1 Spectrogram Clear Specifics for 1 Magnitude Fig 10 10 Capture settings with active spectrogram gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Inthe configuration Overview select Bandwidth and switch to the Capture tab e From the Meas Setup menu select Capture oc eege 157 e ZS ESS NR EP 158 Capture COUN iie nii d redet rr i e t d e Ev EE dud 158 Selecting a frame to display n teinte tnn terr i dba ERES Ha EUER E RReRR 158 EE Hrs eer re nnde e mte ry pase rcm de E ue mee ba Ee V EE FN AE 159 Sin ET e ES 159 Clear Spectrogram EE 159 Points This value defines the number of measurement points that are evaluated and dis played in the result diagrams In Auto mode the number of capture points is coupled with the FFT Length In Manual mode or Advanced FFT mode the number is user definable Configuration Note The capture settings are window specific For some result displays the points may not be editable as they are determined automatically or restrictions may apply For the I Q vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Points Thus the points are not editable for this result dis
114. all defined instruments Note that after deleting a connection the instrument is no longer known to the R amp S VSE software Usage Event Manual operation See Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Configurations Preset All amp Delete Instruments on page 75 Queries the names of all defined instruments whether they are currently connected or not Defined instruments with no valid IP address are also included The names are returned as a comma separated list in the order of their definition Return values lt InstName gt string Name of the instrument Example DEV LIST Result FSW 8 New Instrument New Instrument 2 zk Usage Query only DEVice STATe lt DevName gt Queries the connection status of the specified instrument Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Instrument is connected to the network OFF 0 No connection to the instrument established RST OFF Query parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Example DEV STAT SpecAnalyzer Usage Query only Manual operation See Connection State on page 58 DEVice TARGet lt DevName gt lt Address gt lt Protocol gt Changes the network address and optionally the interface protocol of the specified instrument Setting parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a c
115. and a file is loaded For details see Play on page 68 Changing data acquisition settings for a stored measurement When replaying stored measurement data from a file you can change the Data Acqui sition and Bandwidth Settings for example e Sample rate Analysis bandwidth The R amp S VSE provides an internal resampler which allows you to change the sample rate or bandwidth or both of the replayed UO data Center frequency You can shift the center frequency of the current measurement compared to the stored measurement data The maximum shift depends on the channel s current analysis bandwidth For details see Center frequency on page 141 land Q paths Swap the and Q values for the measurement for example to com pare the data to another measurement in which the instrument ports were swap ped ecl c Q 94 Pause CON m 95 Measurement mode Single Continuous sse 95 d cC EE 95 Playback SQuin QS m 95 EE E 96 Capture Starts replaying the data from the UO file from the beginning for the measurement channel Any averaging procedures are restarted In Single measurement mode the first record in the UO data file is replayed Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation In Continuous measurement mode the entire measurement in the I Q data file is replayed continuous
116. are described here QD For best performance and to ensure comprehensive meta data is available use the iq tar format This is a widely used file format for Rohde amp Schwarz products File format File extension Comment iq tar iq tar An iq tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g thesample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addi tion the file format allows a preview of the I Q data in a web browser and inclusion of user specific data Limitations Recorded files gt 2 GB do not contain an xml preview of the UO data IQW IQIQIQ iqw A file that contains float32 data in a binary format values are stored interleaved starting with the first value The file does not contain any additional infromation as a header CSV CSV A file containing UO data as comma separated values CSV Additional metadata can be saved Matlab v4 mat A file containing UO data in Matlab file format v4 Channel related information is stored in matlab variables with names starting with Chx x represents the number of the channel with a lower bound of 1 e g the variable Chl_Channel1Name contains the name of the first channel The corresponding data is contained in Chx Data Optional user data can be saved to v
117. are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 21 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENAB1e part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABIe bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENAB1e bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENABI1e bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user as required Its contents are not affected by reading
118. area defined for a single zoom see Single Zoom on page 207 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 364 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 363 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe on page 365 Branch for Peak Search Defines which data is used for marker search functions in UO data This function is only available for the display configuration Real Imag I Q see Real Imag I Q on page 113 Note The search settings apply to all markers not only the currently selected one Real Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the I Q measurement Imag Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the UO measurement Magnitude Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the and Q data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch on page 363 Analysis Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results but also the sweep history Thus when searching for peaks you must define the search settings within a single time frame x direction and within several time frames y direction These settings are only available for spectrogram displays These settings are available in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this ta
119. average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Tip To continue all measurements in a group use the INI Tiate BLOCk CONMeas command Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the measurement counter to 20 measurements INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 mea surements INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 measurements and waits for the end Result Averaging is performed over 40 measurements Usage Event Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Manual operation See Pause Cont on page 73 See Pause Cont on page 95 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see chapter 12 1 4 Command Sequence and Synchro nization on page 231 If the measurement mode is changed for a measur
120. be relative or absolute Using wildcards is possible to query a certain type of files only Return values lt UsedDiskSpace gt Byte size of all files in the directory lt FreeDiskSpace gt Remaining disk space in bytes lt Filelnfo gt lt NameFileN gt lt SuffixFileN gt lt SizeFileN gt Describes the individual file lt NameFileN gt Name of the file lt SuffixFileN gt Type of the file Possible suffixes are ASCii BINary DIRectory STAT lt SizeFileN gt Size of the file in bytes Usage Query only MMEMory CDlIRectory lt Directory gt This command changes the current directory Parameters lt Directory gt String containing the path to another directory The path may be relative or absolute Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory COMMent lt Comment gt This command defines a comment for the stored settings Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Example MMEMory COMMent ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 MMEMory MMEMory STORel STATe 1 ACP T As a result in the selection list for recall settings the comment ACP measurement with Standard Tetra from 23 05 is added to the ACP entry Managing Settings and Results Manual operation See Comment on page 81 MMEMory COPY lt SourceFile gt lt DestinationFile gt This command copies one or more files to another directory Parameters lt SourceFile gt String containing the path and file name of the source file l
121. buffer This function is only available if a spectrogram is selected Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate on page 344 Color Map Settings The settings for color mapping are displayed in the Color Mapping dialog box that is displayed when you select Color Mapping in the Spectrogram menu or select the color map in the spectrogram display For more information on color maps see Color Maps on page 170 In addition to the available color settings the dialog box displays the current color map and provides a preview of the display with the current settings Analysis Copy Trace Trace Math Spectrogram 40dBm 0 096 Shape 0 39 Stop 9 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale Auto Set to Default Specifics for 1 Spectrum Fig 10 18 Color Mapping dialog box 1 Color map shows the current color distribution 2 Preview pane shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme 3 Color curve pane graphical representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme 4 5 Color range start and stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the distribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of the spectrogram R
122. cc adu aav uae ead 59 Address et E DEE 60 See 60 HOSt e EE 60 EE EE 60 LAN device ET EE 60 VISA Resource SMG i 60 e UE 61 Pe A m 61 Alias A logical name used to identify the instrument more easily in the network and connec tion settings in the R amp S VSE software Timeout Time in which the network connection to the instrument must be established before the the attempt is aborted Interface Type Specifies the interface protocol used to connect the instrument to the network Configuring Instruments For details on interfaces see chapter 7 2 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 53 VXI 11 Standard TCP IP based protocol HiSlip High performance protocol Remote command DEVice TARGet TYPE on page 265 Address format Defines the format used to specify the instrument s network address IPv6 Internet protocol version 6 IPv4 Internet protocol version 4 Host name Computer name of the instrument instead of IP address IP address Unique IP address of the connected instrument The five most recently selected IP addresses are available from the dropdown list To delete this list select File gt Preset gt Reset VSE Layout see Restoring User Specific Settings Reset VSE Layout on page 76 The IP address consists of four number groups separated by dots Each group con tains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but als
123. certain level This is useful for example to trigger at the end of a burst similar to triggering on the rising edge for the beginning of a burst If a drop out time is defined the power level must remain below the trigger level at least for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Y v o Drop out times for falling edge triggers T Drop Out Fig 10 7 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger Trigger Holdoff The trigger holdoff defines a waiting period before the next trigger after the current one will be recognized Frame 1 Frame 2 Holdoff Fig 10 8 Effect of the trigger holdoff See Trigger Holdoff on page 150 Configuration 10 3 5 2 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Which settings are avail able depends on the instrument in use Trigger settings can be configured via the Input amp Output Trigger menu item Trigger In Out BE uio ol Level 14V Drop OutTime on Offset 005 Slope Em Hysteresis 3 0 dB Holdoff 0 0 s i Gate settings are currently not available External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instru ment in use are configured in a separate tab
124. combination used for different traces Auto detector If the R amp S VSE is set to define the appropriate detector automatically the detector is set depending on the selected trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Max Hold Positive Peak Min Hold Negative Peak Average Sample Peak View Blank Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode If several measurement are performed one after the other or continuous measurement are performed the trace mode determines how the data for subsequent traces is pro cessed After each measurement the trace mode determines whether e the data is frozen View e the data is hidden Blank e the data is replaced by new values Clear Write e the data is replaced selectively Max Hold Min Hold Average o Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The trace mode also determines the detector type if the detector is set automatically see Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 162 The R amp S VSE supports the following trace modes Table 10 3 Overview of available trace modes Trace Mode Description Blank Hides the selected trace Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default set ting All available detectors can be selected Analysis Trace Mode Max Hold Description The maximum value is determined o
125. complete the dialog box turns green and all selected options are indicated as OK To start the R amp S VSE software gt Start the software via the Windows Start Menu entry or the shortcut on the desk top Demo mode Without the use of the Smart Card Reader see chapter 3 3 Using the Smart Card Reader on page 13 the software starts in Demo Mode In this case all installed options and remote commands are available However no instruments can be config ured no UO files and no measurement settings can be loaded or saved Using the Smart Card Reader The software is licensed by a smart card licensing system This licensing system requires a smart card to be connected to the PC when you are using the software The smart card and reader R amp S FSPC are provided with the R amp S VSE software CD You can connect the smart card in two ways e Connect the smart card in SIM format Using the Smart Card Reader If you want to connect the smart card in SIM format use the USB smart card reader that is included in the delivery of the software e Connect the smart card in its full format If you want to connect the smart card in full format an interface compatible to the card format is required The following devices are able to read the smart card in full format smart card reader integrated in a keyboard smart card reader integrated in a notebook smart card reader integrated in a desktop PC e g OMNIKEY
126. data FORM DATA REAL 32 List all I values first then all Q values in the trace results TRAC TO DATA PORN IQP Query the magnitude for each trace point TRAC DATA TRACE1 TRAC DATA TRACE2 TRAC DATA TRACE3 Change the result display to Real Imag I Q LAY REPL WIND 1 RIMAG Configure searches to search both I and Q branches CALC MARK SEAR MAGN Query the result of the peak search on both branches CALC MARK Y Query the first 500 samples of the stored I Q data for the measurement TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 500 For each sample first the I value then the Q value is listed 13 12 4 1 Programming Examples Query the second half of the 1000 captured sample values TRAC IQ DATA MEM 500 500 Programming Example Configuring a Spectrogram This example demonstrates how to configure a spectrogram for a basic UO measure ment in a remote environment The spectrogram is displayed in a subwindow of the Spectrum display In addition the usage of special spectrogram markers is demonstra ted see Marker Search Spectrograms on page 354 Preparing the Measurement Reset the I Q Analyzer channel settings but not the instrument assignment INST SEL My IQ Analyzer SYST PRES CHAN Add a Spectrum result display LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH FREQ Result is window name 2 Display a Spectrum as a subwindow of the Spectrum window 2 in split size CALC2 SPEC STAT ON CALC2 SPEC SIZE SMAL
127. details on the format of UO export files using the I Q Export function seechap ter A 5 Reference Supported File Formats on page 453 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files COMPatible IQBLock IQPair mode Q Data 1 512k I Data Q Data OF 512k Q Data x X N 512k I Data X N 512k Q Data Fig 1 1 I Q data formats Note 512k corresponds to 524288 samples For maximum performance the formats Compatible or IQPair should be used Fur thermore for large amounts of data the data should be in binary format to improve performance In binary format the number of l and Q data can be calculated as follows Sof DataBytes ofi Data of Q Data a For the format QBLock the offset of Q data in the output buffer can be calculated as follows Gt of DataBytes Q Data Offset 2 LengthindicatorDigits with LengthIndicatorDigits being the number of digits of the length indicator including the In the example above 41024 this results in a value of 6 for LengthIndica torDigits and the offset for the Q data results in 512 6 518 Reference Supported File Formats A 5 Reference Supported File Formats Various file types are supported for UO data import and export see chapter 8 3 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation on page 84 The most important characteristics as well as optional and mandatory data elements for each for mat
128. dialogs HWSettings in SCPI The selection is not reset by PRESET or RST As a consequence the results of a SCPI script using the MMEMory LOAD STATe com mand without a previous MMEMory SELect ITEM command may vary depending on previous actions in the GUI or in previous scripts even if the script starts with the RST command It is therefore recommended that you use the appropriate MMEMory SELect ITEM command before using MMEMory LOAD STATe Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file to load The string may or may not include the file s extension Managing Settings and Results Example MMEM SEL ALL Save all items User Settings All Traces All Limit Lines from the R amp S VSE MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user TESTOL Reloads all items In the Recall dialog select only User Settings and All Limit Lines MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user TESTOL Reloads user settings and all limit lines RST Reset software MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user TESTO1 Selected items are retained Reloads user settings and all limit lines Restart the software MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user TESTO1 Selected items are set to default Reloads only the user set tings Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Recall on page 78 See Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel on page 82
129. displayed in dBm Density The result is a power level in relation to the bandwidth displayed in dBm Hz Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer MODE on page 370 Switching All Band Power Measurements Off Deactivates band power measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 371 Deactivating All Marker Functions All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step Use the All Functions Off button in the Marker Functions dialog box Zoomed Displays You can zoom into the diagram to visualize the measurement results in greater detail Using a mouse pointer you can easily define the area to be enlarged Zoom and the number of trace points Note that zooming is merely a visual tool it does not change any measurement set tings such as the number of trace points You should increase the number of trace points before zooming as otherwise the func tion has no real effect see chapter 10 2 1 How Much Data is Measured Capture Count and Measurement Points on page 117 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoor tme thee k iine 206 QEP couuice Le 207 Howto Zoom Into a Diagram iioii coiere better erret e o Eee tcu od Eee eo E Puppe o Rud 208 R amp SSVSE UO Analyzer Measurements Two different graphical zoom modes are available single zoom and multiple zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by
130. eee eee 250 439 Tuning range External referee ice ttr rrr 65 U MIA e 227 Reference level cccccccessscecececssssteeeeeeeeesssteeeeeeess 136 MP et choi os etui Het en c e ets aie Me PH ciet an ba 227 Upper Level Hysteresis eres 161 Usable UO bandwidth IB ue 118 User interface Customizing creen rte etre perna 43 User sample rate BI ue 118 User settings FRESIOMING p 76 Users PASSWOMG EE 254 V Resource string Resource string instrument sesessessesesseserenesseeesee 60 VSA Vector Signal Analysis APDIICAWOM EE 32 K Bee 55 Ww Wait ios E 261 Waiting for trigger Status T gister aee o ERO NN RESI UR ERR AHO 240 WAIE SPACE rnein p 229 Window functions Characteristics munsi i reete detta 121 Vater 45 Window title bar information e EE 42 Windows ji 46 AGING ER 46 73 Adding remote 296 302 CIOSIAG TT 46 48 Closing remote A 301 304 306 CONG BD s roe ti E E ret ees 43 t ue Udlale E 127 Deactivating 46 48 Blend ET 43 DOCKING NEE 47 Maximizing remote A 346 viu 47 New POSION S T 45 PAIMIN Te RE 98 Querying remote 300 301 304 IseactlValilig eec ot et ie patere rr e eer DR oaa 48 Rearranging 21 47 ISeplacilig eo ori e et e toca us roe he ORE Re 47 Replacing remote n aca Selected EE EE Spectrogram remote
131. eet 309 SNIE ZOOM EEN 206 207 Slope ele 151 Trigger is Smart card Softkeys Clear Sp ctrogram orrainn airin iiin 159 178 Golor Mapping titre terrore tenen 178 Be Tun 159 History Depth rne metre 178 Marker Search Area ccccccccccssseeeceeessesseeeeeeeeeesees 201 Marker Search Type terrent 200 Isecall File o ertet rr erroe run 78 Select Frame sereine i 158 177 Startup Recall On Off tren 83 Span Band power measurement 1 0 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 205 Special characters SGP M 226 Specifics for Configulatioti EE 127 Spectrograms Activating Deactivating eee 177 Clearing ct eto eint eec eic 159 178 Color curve 171 179 184 Color Mapping ssiri iriste 170 178 183 Color mapping remote control s 346 Color scheme 170 180 Config ring TEE 182 Configuring remote control sssssss 343 DiE 167 DISPIAVING ET 181 Frames remote control eessssssss 343 History deptli teer treten e inre 178 Markers o iaeiiai 182 191 Markers remote control sseees 354 Programming example 2 rnnt 428 Ee lee TEE 182 SCAO 170 Selecting frames 158 177 Iur 176 EE 177 Size MEMOS EE 345 dl EI UE
132. entire status information in a single bit It can be read by means of a parallel poll see Parallel Poll on page 246 or using the command IST The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using commands PRE and read using com mand PRE Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EVENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE corresponds to the ENAB1e part of a SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ES E Table 12 3 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instr
133. example e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of measurements on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Average Count e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the signal on the Marker tab Remote Control Basics 12 Network and Remote Operation The R amp S VSE software can capture and analyze data from a connected instrument in a network In this case the R amp S VSE software controls the connected instrument remotely The R amp S VSE software in turn can be controlled remotely from another PC in the network Various methods for remote control are supported e Connecting the host PC with the R amp S VSE software installed and the instrument in use to a network to capture data directly from the instrument This is the basic operating scenario for the R amp S VSE software and is described in detail in chapter 7 Controlling Instruments and Capturing UO Data on page 52 Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network to work with the R amp S VSE software interactively e Connecting a controller PC to the network to operate both the R amp S VSE software and the instrument in use remotely from the same PC How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in chapter 12 3 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 250 e Remote Control Basl6S ee ciere tapete nn ER emet pam nk Eg hn nk De RR e RR CER RR UA tape 221 e Network and
134. for use with sinus oidal signals Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 338 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level The instrument in use automatically determines the optimal reference level for the cur rent input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized This function is not available on all supported instruments Configuration You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 161 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 312 E Auto Settings Configuration For some automatic settings additional parameters can be configured The Auto Set Config dialog box is available when you select the icon from the Auto Set toolbar Meas Time Value 1 0 ms Hysteresis Upper Value 1 0 dB Lower Value 1 0 dB Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value Auto Settings Configuration To determine the optimal reference level automatically a level measurement is per formed on the instrument in use You can define whether the duration of this measure ment is determined automatically or manually To define the duration manually enter a value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 337 SENSe
135. gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram over all frequencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all
136. icon in the toolbar Bl PUE eso nimio ibiq iitegm senten bnc hamceendeiideins iun cipue 98 El t Ee eaanutetestasminateste 98 eo EM 98 xij O 98 Print Date and TIIYiB scout eta ette a Eee ea sue Paves eren Ein trs a rro dead a v Een uade 98 LET n RITTER TTE EO 98 lee Co HO 98 t e CTETUR 98 roc cR E mE 98 WIBIOWS e EE 99 COMO S M 99 Printing Current Measurement Results ke Print Starts printing out all measurement results displayed on the screen diagrams traces markers marker lists limit lines etc Optionally comments and the date and time are included at the bottom margin of the printout All displayed items belonging to the soft ware user interface e g toolbars or dialog boxes are not printed out Remote command HCOPy ITEM ALL on page 406 HCOPy IMMediate device on page 405 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT on page 405 Print to Specifies a printer configured for the PC the R amp S VSE software is installed on Copies Defines the number of copies to be printed Print Logo Activates deactivates the printout of the Rohde amp Schwarz company logo in the upper left corner Remote command DISPlay LOGO on page 402 Print Date and Time Activates deactivates the printout of the current date and time at the bottom of the screenshot Remote command HCOPy TDSTamp ST
137. lt SampleRate gt This command sets the final user sample rate for the acquired I Q data Thus the user sample rate can be modified without affecting the actual data capturing settings on the R amp S VSE Parameters lt SampleRate gt The valid sample rates depend on the instrument in use Refer to the instrument s documentation Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32 MHz Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 153 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer TRACe IQ TPISample This command queries the time offset between the sample start and the trigger event trigger point in sample TPIS Since the R amp S VSE usually samples with a much higher sample rate than the specific application actually requires the trigger point determined internally is much more precise than the one determined from the down sampled data in the application Thus the TPIS indicates the offset between the sam ple start and the actual trigger event TPIS sample trigger start event This value can only be determined in triggered measurements using external or IFPower triggers otherwise the value is 0 Example TRAC IQ TPIS Result for a sample rate of 1 MHz between 0 and 1 1 MHz i e between 0 and 1 us the duration of 1 sample Usage Query only Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 150 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe State This command determines whether the wideband provided by bandwidth extension options is use
138. measurement it is stored on the instrument in use The R amp S VSE software accesses this data to analyze and display the results for the channel If the captured UO data is required for further analysis at a later time or in a different application possibly using different settings you can record the captured data In this case the I Q data is stored to a temporary file on the PC running the R amp S VSE soft ware These files can then be exported that is stored to a file permanently at a user defined storage location Exported UO data can then be recalled and used as input for further measurements and analysis by the R amp S VSE software Difference between Save and Export functions The Save function described in chapter 8 2 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings on page 76 stores the finished measurement results and settings so that the same results can be restored later in the same application However if you would like to store the raw UO data as it is captured without further evaluation functions applied in order to evaluate it using other functions or in a differ ent application you must use the Save UO Recording functions described here Note that in order to export the raw resampled data you must start recording directly at the time of capture Once the data has been captured without being recorded it can no longer be exported as raw resampled data 8 3 1 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for E
139. mode is available in the time domain and only in the Spectrum application MAGNitude For offline input from a file rather than an instrument Triggers on a specified signal level RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Trigger Source on page 148 See Free Run on page 148 See External Trigger lt X gt on page 148 See IF Power on page 148 See UO Power on page 148 See RF Power on page 149 See Time on page 149 See Magnitude offline on page 149 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters Interval 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000 s RST 1 0s Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The measurement starts every 50 s Manual operation See Repetition Interval on page 149 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instrument in use OUTPUE TRIGG pore Dl RE CHON EE 326 OUTPut bRIGSersporb LEV EE 326 OUTPUETRIGOS PO OTY PE r ios aeree EENS DOERNER edd 327 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate ener nnn 327 OUTbutTRlGoer zportz PULL Se ENG 327 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the t
140. multiplied by the sample rate The maximum record length is 524288 but may not exceed the instrument in use or the number of samples provided by the input file FFT Length Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes If you use the arrow keys or the mouse wheel to change the FFT length the value is incremented or decremented by powers of 2 If you enter the value manually any inte ger value from 3 to 524288 is available If the FFT length is longer than the Window Length the sample data is filled up with zeros up to the FFT length The FFT is then performed using interpolated frequency points Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing For an FFT length that is not a power of 2 a DFT discrete Fourier transform is per formed which requires more time for calculation but avoids the effects of interpolation In order to display all calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length the num ber of measurement points is set to the FFT length automatically in advanced FFT mode Window Length Defines the number of samples to be included in a single window in averaging mode Values from 3 to 524288 are available However the window length may not be longer than the FFT Length If the window length is shorter than the FFT Length the sample data is filled up with zeros up to th
141. must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example MMEM COPY Testi MeasurementXY HCOP ITEM ALL This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the MMEM system the second command belongs to the HCOP system If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM This command line contains two commands Both commands are part of the HCOP command system i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM A new command line always begins with the complete path Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted withou
142. nn tnn rr renean 391 MMEMory SELect CHANnel I TEMJ NONE rrr tenuere ront re therein 391 MMEMory SELect CHANnel I TEMISGEGSI eir tarot eo ntn robert cette etna entere ea E EPEN 391 MMEMory SELect CHANnel I TEM TRACe ACTive eese nnne rennen 392 MMEMOry SEMSct MEM AU utens erneut eria eta pee renda pexp aab tra D Ree cro m cix sabe eg eae xe E OA Wa anges 390 MMEMory SELect ATEM DBEF ult rtt orn ert rn reti e rne ne t teer Den 390 MMEMory SELect TEM FIWWSettings iint eroe rere tn e retener thin rere Rn etia 390 dee EN le TE DE 391 MMEMory SELect ITEM NONE uncctei oin rrr rne rhet en rr rcr er a e ee x C TER 391 MMEMory SELect l TEMISGRal itinera rotten nire rir tro ri E ERR e EY EFE ABER MER EY FEY EE ERST 391 MMEMory SELsct I TEMETRAGe ACTIVE root Ebene er epe ertet pen npe epe eae i onto 392 MMEMory STOResn GQ COMME Dinine ote ote tt tette er ne t na ee ee eds 399 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe MMEMBGFY STORESSA SGRAM DE MMEMory STOResn SPECtrogfatm ctetuer it ctn tat nente uar t o cn nte te ned oet 400 MMEMory STOResn 9TAT6 ni e e E c cere cn tette ie Portes aun entities 395 MMEM M e RN TE WEE 395 MMEMory S TORSSIDP IVP ee ertet eec tete nett eee ette dnte Pr t te ridens duc 396 OUTPut IRIGger port DIReCIOR rro rri ee nh rere ront e t ee rrr eee t eei te ATEA 326 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTPut TRI
143. number of frames to be stored in the R amp S VSE memory lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters History The maximum number of frames depends on the number of sweep points Range 781 to 20000 Increment 1 RST 3000 Example CALC SGR SPEC 1500 Sets the history depth to 1500 Manual operation See History Depth on page 178 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam SIZE lt Size gt CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram SIZE lt Size gt This command maximizes the size of the Spectrogram in the selected result display window temporarily Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the Spectrogram subwindow in the selected window to full window size Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the Spectrogram subwindow in the selected window to its original size RST SMALI Example CALC2 SPEC LARG Manual operation See State on page 177 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam STATe State CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram STATe State This command turns the spectrogram on and off lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC SGR ON Activates the Spectrogram result display Manual operation See State on page 177 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam TRACe lt Trace gt CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram TRACe lt Trace gt This command determines the trace in the result display the Spectrogram is based o
144. of the dialog box Output Type User Defined 7 Level hion UE D nen Pulse Length 1008 us Send Trigger JL Trigger 3 Input Output det e 148 TEE 148 L External THIS O Louise atero ai rr Feed a abore ruat 148 M xxl RN T UR 148 Bici A set 148 B 21 UP 149 ETE acces Sea Ceca D 149 L Magnitude Cal BE eani laa ton xti ret 149 Re ere et E 149 Repetition Interval m iicet eo A ETLL IIR EAT E HEEL ERR YA 149 Drop Out TITIB EE 150 dire EET T D 150 DI ECIAM 150 Tigger Holdoff carcere re ero nri ete HE Pre Prod rede ias 150 Configuration OPS T M 151 ONG CT T N aE 151 GER e NND EE 151 dto Dm 151 L Pulse JE LIE m 152 B Ms ERE crates aieded E 152 Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is dis played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated For more information see Trigger Source on page 144 Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 324 External Trigger lt X gt
145. on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 137 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 137 Configuring a Preamplifier NPE GAINES TAT P 314 Hiat GAIN AE autero reu roc ette etd dea ened den cet tx recedat eadein an 314 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on the instrument in use on and off It requires the additional preamplifiier hardware option on the connected instrument Depending on the instrument in use the preamplification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 138 INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 314 The com
146. output is described in Configuring the Trigger Output on page 326 DIAGnostit SERVICE NS OUNCE 1 aera decet asta treo ck ipa ga PO EE ii ger kel paamewsdendaieuswbbtinwunnds 310 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the instrument in use on and off For details see chapter 10 2 4 1 Input from Noise Sources on page 124 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 131 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment e Amplitude Geitings A 310 e Gotnfiguiing the ATI on EE 312 e Configuring a Preaimplifier erret er ees cr nnne eR nee kan 314 e Scaling th VANS iss se cance cs tated sees terea oc cfe pret Ue hti d e ge due eee id d d 315 Amplitude Settings The tasks for manual configuration are described in chapter 10 3 3 2 Amplitude Set tings on page 135 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence essen 311 CAL Culate lt m gt UNIT e m 311 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectvlSCALelRLEVel een 311 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeeeesesssssess
147. overload may lead to hardware damage For details see RF Attenuation on page 134 Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 312 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 313 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the instrument in use you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Note that restrictions may apply concerning which frequencies electronic attenu ation is available for depending on which instrument is connected to the R amp S VSE software Check your instrument documentation for details In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however Configuration When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe o
148. page 381 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used when describing UC data processing in the R amp S VSE software in general and in the I Q Analyzer applica tion in particular is provided here for a better understanding of the required configura tion settings User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 116 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Principally the R amp S VSE and all its applications analyze data that was captured on a connected instrument or directly from a file with stored UO data The software itself does not capture data Complex baseband data In the telephone systems of the past baseband data was transmitted unchanged as an analog signal In modern phone systems and in radio communication however the baseband data is modulated on a carrier frequency which is then transmitted and must be demodulated by the receiver When using modern modulation methods e g QPSK QAM etc the baseband signal becomes complex Complex data or Q data con sists of an imaginary Il and a real Q component The R amp S VSE software is capable of analyzing the individual and Q components of the complex signal UO Analyzer analyzing complex data The I Q Analyzer is a standard application used to analyze UO data with the R amp S VSE By default it assumes the UO data is modulated on a carrier frequency e How Much Data is Measured Capture Count and
149. performed very quickly by the software Measurement sequences consist of a number of measurement groups and each group may contain multiple channels However only channels with distinct input types can be active within a group during a measurement sequence The groups themselves can also be activated or deactivated individually When you start a measurement sequence the individual groups are processed sequentially in the order of their defini tion The measurements for a single group are started simultaneously and only when all channels in the group have completed the next group is processed Measurement Concept Instruments PRCERU Cael cel emetic a New Group Q Channel ES Replace Channel a Group 2 IO Ki IQ Analyzer 2 Pince x p Instrument File Instrument Fsw 26 T Input Source Instrument TT File C VSE wedma_1_030_GHz iq tar IQ Analyzer ke Fig 5 3 Example for a measurement sequence Active groups are indicated by a checkmark in front of the group in the Measurement Group Setup tool window Measurement sequences are a convenient way to perform multiple measurements on an input signal in a quick succession and to obtain results from different applications in a relatively short measurement time without having to switch between applications manually For stable input data a measurement sequence can provide results in vari ous applications for
150. rate is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 lt Format gt IIQQ IQPair The format in which the UO data is provided IIQQ First all l values are listed then the Q values LL LLEI Q Q Q 0 Q Q IQPair One pair of UO values after the other is listed 1 Q 1 Q 1 Q RST IQPair IQChannel ID of the UO channel in the stored file which is to be restored to the selected measurement channel If this parameter is omitted the first channel found is restored Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the UO channel is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 Example INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN FILE MAT C Users ImportFile mat 10MHZ 32MHz IIQQ 2 The data from the second I Q channel stored in the file is used as input for the current measurement channel IO Analyzer The displayed bandwidth is restricted to 10 MHz A sample rate of 32 MHz is applied The data is interpreted in the format IIQQ Manual operation See File on page 72 See File Name on page 88 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt OVERlap AVG OFF lt Percentage gt The overlap settings determine how successive records within one data file are replayed This command defines the behaviour if a non averaging trace detector is used Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data After the first record has been repl
151. remote control it is indicated for the corresponding command Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP o Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ON refers to window 2 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parame ters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to chapter 12 1 3 3 SCPI Parameters on page 226 Example Definition HCOPy DEVice CMAP COLOr RGB red green blue Command HCOP DEV CMAP COL RGB 3 32 44 Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibi
152. select New Window 3 Select the result display you want to add a window for The available result display types depend on the selected application User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 46 Customizing the User Interface For other applications see the application specific documentation A new window for the result display is opened If not enough display space for all active windows is available the existing win dows are combined into one window using tabs while the new window is displayed in maximum size To replace the contents of a measurement window 1 In the window whose contents you want to replace in the window title bar select the HJ Replace icon 2 Select the result display The window displays the newly selected result display for the selected measure ment channel Remote commands LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow on page 296 LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow on page 301 6 3 3 Rearranging Windows To dock or undock a window gt Select the Dock amp Undock icon in the window title bar If the window was docked it is detached and can be moved and resized independ antly of the R amp S VSE window If the window was undocked it is docked to its default position in the R amp S VSE window For details see Docked and undocked windows on page 43 To change the position of a window or bar gt Select the bar or window title bar and drag it to a new position on the screen Pos sible docking positions fo
153. supported Rohde amp Schwarz Signal and Spectrum Analyzers the following types of information may be displayed if applicable Table 6 2 Instrument settings displayed in the channel bar PA The preamplifier is activated 75Q The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 Q DC AC An external DC or AC calibration signal is in use Result Displays Measurement Windows Measurement results can be evaluated in many different ways for example graphi cally as summary tables statistical evaluations etc Optional applications add their own specific measurements and result displays Thus the result display is highly con figurable to suit your specific requirements and optimize analysis For each measurement a separate measurement channel is activated Each measure ment channel can provide multiple result displays All windows that belong to the same measurement including the channel bar are indicated by a colored line at the top of the window title bar R amp S VSE Operating Basics IQ Analyzer Ie ig IQ Analyzer3 IQ Analyzer 4 Ref Level 0 00 dBm Meas Time 81 pus SRate 320 MHz Att 10 dB Freq 40 GHz Rec Length 1001 RBW 23 kHz W IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude 1AP Clrw 1001 pts IQ Analyzer 2 2 Spectrum 1AP Clrw r3 W f 3 IQ Analyzer 3 2 Spectrum 1APClw rm Wi Fig 6 3 Color coded windows Window title bar The contents of the individual result displays are described in detail in the applicatio
154. switch channels the corresponding measurement settings are restored The global information and results for each channel are displayed in separate windows or tabs on the screen The results from multiple applications can be displayed at the same time with display space being the only limiting factor Each application may pro vide different result displays see the applications user manual for details The mea surement windows can be rearranged and configured in the R amp S VSE to meet your requirements see chapter 6 3 Customizing the User Interface on page 43 The measurement channels are labeled with their default name If that name already exists a sequential number is added However the name of the measurement channel can be changed For details and an overview of default names see 1NSTrument LIST on page 287 In the R amp S VSE measurement channels are controlled and initially configured in the Measurement Group Setup tool window Measurement Concept Instruments PME mel cel Meu New Group Channel ao Replace Channel E F IQ Analyzer gt Ill gt e x Instrument TEN File cvtemp IqRecording_1233 iq tar IQ Analyzer Ld Eh IT IQ Analyzer 2 gt Il oe EN es File Instrument e rsw 26 Se Input Source Instrument rsw 26 T Input Source Fig 5 1 Measurement Group Setup tool window For each channel the input
155. the R amp S VSE software is closed The shutdown file contains information on the defined connections as well as measure ment sequence and channel configuration such as which input sources are used for which measurement channels and which result displays are active When the R amp S VSE software is started again the previously stored configuration is restored If you delete the shutdown file see Deleting the Shutdown File on page 101 the R amp S VSE software starts in the default configuration the next time Display Settings The shutdown file is stored located at C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version number Nresults Shutdown dfl Reconnect saved connections after recall If activated when stored measurement settings are recalled a connection is automati cally established to all configured instruments see chapter 8 2 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings on page 76 If deactivated the instrument configurations are restored in the Instruments window however the connections must be established manually see Connect Disconnect on page 58 Deleting the Shutdown File In the Windows Start menu Start gt All Programs gt Rohde Schwarz gt VSE gt lt ver sion_number gt gt Delete Shutdown File an additional function is provided to delete the file that stores the current software configuration during shutdown if available see Create Shutdown File on page 100 If you delete the shutdo
156. the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 129 Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 129 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 129 See Unit on page 136 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S VSE 13 6 1 2 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer This command is identical to INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings SOURce on page 281 applied to the currently selected channel and block Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector FIQ IO data file RST RF Manual operation See Input Type on page 71 See Radio Frequency State on page 128 See I Q File State on page 130 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input
157. the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters lt SweepCount gt When you set a capture count of 0 or 1 the R amp S VSE performs one single measurement in single measurement mode In continuous measurement mode if the capture count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 measurements is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe SWEep POINts lt MeasPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to analyze after a measure ment Note that the number of measurement points is limited to 10001 when measuring spu rious emissions Parameters lt MeasPoints gt Range 51 to 524288 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Points on page 157 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the measurement time Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Meas Time on page 154 TRACe IQ BWIDth Th
158. the capture mode is defined If no group parameter is provided the currently selected group is configured see INSTrument BLOCk SELect on page 293 Example INITiate BLOCk CONT OFF Group 2 Manual operation See Measurement mode Single Continuous on page 70 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data INITiate BLOCk IMMediate lt GroupName gt This command starts a new measurement for all active channels in the selected or specified group Depending on the capture mode a single or continuous measurements are performed see INITiate BLOCk CONTinuous on page 290 Setting parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group for which a measure ment is started If no group parameter is provided the currently selected group is started see INSTrument BLOCk SELect on page 293 Usage Event Manual operation See Capture on page 69 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel MOVE lt GroupName gt lt Predecessor gt lt ChannelName gt This command moves the specified channel to a different group This command is use ful to change the order in which the measurements are performed within a sequence within a single group all measurements are performed synchronously To move an entire group within a sequence see INSTrument BLOCk MOVE on page 293 Setting parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group in which the channel is to be included For a list of available groups s
159. the display is off during remote control operation Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON Manual operation See Remote Display Update on page 250 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory This command resets the query to IDN to its default value Usage Event Manual operation See Reset to Factory String on page 249 SYSTem IDENtify STRing String This command defines the response to IDN Parameters String String containing the description of the instrument Manual operation See Identification String on page 249 13 10 Working with Status Registers Using the Status e 417 13 10 1 Using the Status Register For more information on the contents of the status registers see e STATus OPERation Register on page 240 e STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register on page 240 e STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register on page 242 e STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register on page 242 e STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register on page 243 e STATus QUEStionable POWer Register on page 243 e STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register on page 244 13 10 1 1 13 10 1 2 Working with Status Registers e STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register on page 244 e General Status Register Commandes AAA 418 e Reading Out the CONDON Part iiit nre eene e ianaeeiinhadeesseerineg 418 e Reading Out the EVENt Part eiecaceee Ie ieee cernunt eee teh Ene tt eda add ud 419
160. the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Band Power Marker The following commands control the marker for band power measurements Using Markers CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHon BbOwWerMODE nne 370 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESUIt lees 370 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN cccccesccccsesceceeseecesecesseseeeanees 371 CAL Culate nzM AbkermzFUNGCHonBbOWert GTATel rnnr nnne 371 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer MODE Mode This command selects the way the results for a band power marker are displayed Parameters Mode POWer Result is displayed as a power in dBm DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RST POWer Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Configures marker 4 to show the measurement results in dBm Hz Manual operation See Power Mode on page 205 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESult This command queries the results of the band power measurement Return values lt Power gt Signal power over the marker bandwidth Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example Activate the band power marker CALC MARK FUNC BPOW STAT ON Select the density mode for the result CALC MARK FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Query the result CALC MARK FUNC BPOW RES Response 20dBm Hz Usage Query only
161. the right to 90 dBm Adjusting the reference level and level range Note that changing the reference level and level range of the measurement also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear i e the colors on the color map are distributed evenly If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range The color curve shape can be set numerically or graphically 10 4 2 Analysis To set the color curve shape graphically using the slider gt Select and drag the color curve shape slider indicated by a gray box in the middle of the color curve to the left or right The area beneath the slider is focussed i e more colors are distributed there 110dBm 100dBm 90dBm S dBm 70dBm 60dBm S dBm 40dBm BOdBm 20dBm 10dBm start 0 0 Shape Si stop Ero e Hot Cold C C Grayscale auto sempe 0 ce 0 To set the color curve shape numerically gt Inthe Shape field enter a value to change the shape of the curve e Anegative value 1 to lt 0 focusses the lower values e Odefines a l
162. trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword For offline input from a file this command does not apply In this case use TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDoff on page 324 Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event In the UO Analyzer application only EXTernall is supported Suffix port Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 7 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2
163. type instrument or file and the input source type must be configured Detailed configuration for the measurement can then be performed via the specific configuration Overview which is available for each application For details see the applications user manual You can define any number of measurement channels at the same time restricted only by memory resources However only one measurement channel can be started man ually at any time Before you can start another channel you must stop the previous measurement channel first Measurement groups As opposed to manual channel control multiple measurements on different instru ments or files can be performed in parallel if controlled by the software All measure ment channels that are to be started at the same time must be configured within a group When the group is started all included active measurement channels are star ted and provide results independently as soon as their measurements are completed Measurement Concept Note however that the individual measurements are not synchronized in any way and the results are totally independent as the input data is different for each channel Configure triggers to synchronize the individual measurements Multiple groups of measurement channels can be configured for example to define individual test scenarios Measurement groups are a convenient way to start multiple measurements at the same time Instruments SAYE
164. value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 See Marker Position X value on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 195 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt lt State gt This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 See Marker State on page 193 See Marker Type on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a
165. you select the Za Overview icon in the main toolbar or the Meas Setup Overview menu item Overview THEE o TREE E ME x Ref Level 0 0 dBm Level Offset 0 0 dB Mech Att 10 0 dB Center 4 0 GHz Source Free Run Input RF El Att 0 0 dB Freq Offset 0 0 Hz Level Power Sensor Preamp off Freq Offset 0 0 Hz Gated Trigger off Lei p S GE ES Input Amplitude Frequency Trigger Gate GJ ER ie Output Bandwidth L Analysis Video Out IF Sample Rate 32 0 MHz Trace 1 Clear Write Trigger Out off Filter BW 25 6 MHz Detector Auto Peak Meas Time 31 28 us Marker 1 off Record Length 1001 Limits Lines off O rennen Secor Viren Fig 10 4 Configuration Overview for I Q Analyzer The Overview indicates the most important currently defined settings for the mea surement channel and provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The Overview varies depending on the application for detailed descriptions see the corresponding application s User Manual Configuration The Overview for the UO Analyzer provides quick access to the following configura tion dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Inp
166. 0 MOTHERBOARD 123456 002 1300 3080 02 00 00 00 Query only See Infos amp Settings on page 58 See Options on page 66 Returns the instrument identification for the specified instrument Query parameters lt DevName gt Return values ID Example Usage Manual operation string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Rohde amp Schwarz device type gt lt part number gt serial num ber gt lt firmware version gt DEV INFO IDN SpecAnalyzer Rohde amp Schwarz FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 1 30 Query only See Infos amp Settings on page 58 See Identification String on page 66 DEVice INFO OPT lt DevName gt Queries the options included in the specified instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Query parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Return values Options The query returns a list of all installed and activated options separated by commas where B lt number gt describes hardware options K lt number gt describes software options Example DEV INFO OPT SpecAnalyzer B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B10 B22 B30 B31 K7 K70 Usage Query only Manual operation See Infos amp Settings on page 58 See Options on page 66 13 4 1 3 General Instrument Setup
167. 0 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of variable trigger input output connectors on the instrument in use Which output settings are available depends on the type of instrument in use For details see the instrument s documentation Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the instrument in use No further trigger parameters are available for the connector 10 3 3 Configuration Output The instrument in use sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 326 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 326 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the instrument in use triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the instrument in use is in Ready Armed for trigger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 of the instrument in use if available For details see STATus OPERation Register on page 240 and the instrument s documentation User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 327 Level Outp
168. 0 100 99 HiSlip Start capturing data from MyFSW Select default channel 1 INST IQ Analyzer Start measurement on channel 1 INIT IMM WAI Programming Examples 13 12 3 Performing a Sequence of Measurements This example demonstrates how to configure and perform a sequence of measure ments in a remote environment It assumes the instruments MyFSW and YourFSW have been configured as described in chapter 13 12 2 Configuring Input from an Instrument on page 424 f kk xxx Prepare software kckckckckckckckckck RST Configure four channels 1 default IQ Analyzer I Q Analyzer for instrument input from MyFSW 2 AnalogDemodFSW AnalogDemod for instrument input from MyFSW 3 Your IQ Analyzer I Q Analyzer for instrument input from YourFSW 4 AnalogDemodFile AnalogDemod for file input Create channel 2 INST CRE NEW ADEM AnalogDemodFSW Duplicate default channel 1 to create channel 3 NST SEL IQ Analyzer INST CRE DUPL Result IQ Analyzer 2 NST REN IQ Analyzer 2 Your IQ Analyzer Create channel 4 NST CRE NEW ADEM AnalogDemodFile Query list of channels INST LIST Result IQ IQ Analyzer ADEM AnalogDemodFSW IQ Your IQ Analyzer ADEM AnalogDemodFile Configure input sources for each channel NST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV NST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV MyFSW INST SEL AnalogDemodFSW NST BLOC CHAN SETT
169. 1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 207 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 207 See Restore Original Display on page 207 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 207 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA sese eene 373 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe neee ererersrsrsrnrnrnn nnn nn ne 374 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on M User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 373 R amp S VSE Remote Commands 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define
170. 169 KI ue cec mede 171 183 Spectrum e Analyzer ote rice e ei tp dotes 112 UO Evaluation method AAA 112 SRate hardware setting AA 42 SRE service request enable register 238 SRQ service request sss 238 245 Star yellow see Invalid data ICON ite ttes 40 Startup recall REMOUG psoty 393 Startup Recall ife c a 83 Statistic Evaluation method ertt 114 Status CONNEG OM e 61 Display scsi H 37 PULID qM 246 Status bar Hidihdg r storing seein cla eae 102 Status byte E ue 258 260 Status byte SERA 238 Status byte register STB sss 235 Status registers rne net eter e P nn 235 COND INO MN ele Ee EE 236 ENABIG oett ee 236 ele ET otc EE 236 PTRansition 236 STATus OPERation 240 STATus QUEStionable 240 STATus QUEStionable EXTended 240 STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO 241 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency 242 STATus QUEStionable LIMit 242 STATus QUEStionable L MARgin we 243 STATus QUEStionable POWer a 243 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature 11 244 STATus QUEStionable TIME sessss 244 Status reporting system 5 nennen 234 Application a COMMON ei
171. 17 For spectrogram displays the capture count determines how many captures are com bined in one frame in the spectrogram i e how many captures the R amp S VSE performs to plot one trace in the spectrogram result display For more details see Time Frames on page 169 Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 342 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker Configuration This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more details see Time Frames on page 169 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 345 Continue Frame Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes Max Hold Min Hold and Average This function is available in single sweep mode only On When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account e Off The average or peak values are determined from the results of the newly swept frames only Remote command
172. 2 channel CFshift max Configuration If the file does not provide the center frequency it is assumed to be 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 319 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the mouse wheel the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 319 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 G
173. 4 Configuring the Result Display eene nennen nnn nnn 295 Global Layout Commands iioue kaderen eein aee netu oe ied e ti NEEN EEES 296 Working with Windows in the Display 302 General Window Comnmands 2 ree eren eek ee e i ee 307 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer eeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeneeennn 307 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements enne 308 ePi 338 Retrieving Results dineros editi reete dedo teda e ee Eed 374 Managing Settings and Results esee nennen nnn nnns 382 Restoring the Default Configuration Dreset 383 General Data Storage and Loading Commande 383 Selecting the Items to Giore eene nnns 389 Storing and Loading Measurement Gettings sse 392 Exporting Recorded VQ Data 396 Storing or Printing Screenshots 402 Examples Managing D ta 2 2 etcetera retento ete denied niae ce 408 Configuring the Software eese eene enne nnne nnn nennen inn nnn 410 Software Support and Information 410 er rry 412 Colors and Thettes reete ride n chatte i ette re idee eo rk aa ceu raul edd ku EEN 412 CMAP Suffix ln EE 415 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation eeeeeeeeeeeee 416 Working with Status Registers eee nnns 417 Using the Status Register semana abe poda aae Ra a e Eua 417 Retrieving Error Messagos eice
174. 40 DevName State DEVice EXTRef 0640 lt DevName gt If enabled a 640 MHz reference signal is provided to the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ con nector of the instrument in use Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR 0640 ON Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 65 DEVice EXTRef OSYNc lt DevName gt lt State gt DEVice EXTRef OSYNc lt DevName gt If enabled a 100 MHz reference signal is provided to the SYNC TRIGGER OUTPUT connector of the instrument in use Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR OSYN ON Manual operation See Reference Frequency Output on page 65 DEVice EXTRef SOURce lt DevName gt lt Source gt DEVice EXTRef SOURce lt DevName gt This command selects the reference oscillator for the instrument in use The external reference must be connected to the instrument in use Note that depending on the type of instrument connected to the R amp S VSE software not all options may be available Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Parameters Source INTernal the internal reference is used 10 MHz EXTernal the external reference from the REF
175. 512k of values is followed by a block 512k of Q values fol lowed by a block of values followed by a block of Q values etc 4 1 Q Q Q Q LIII Q Q Q Q IQBLock First all l values are listed then the Q values LLLL1 Q Q Q Q Q Q IQPair One pair of UO values after the other is listed 1 Q 1 Q 1 Q RST IQBL TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the UO data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S VSE By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters By default the amount of available data depends on TRACe 10 SET Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in rela tion to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples you want to query beginning at the offset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples gt lt offset samples gt with lt of samples gt maximum number of captured values RST lt of samples gt Return values lt lQData gt Measured value pair 1 Q for each sample that has been recor ded The data
176. 60 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe sse 360 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe eese 360 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimuUM DEI ow nee 360 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW eene 360 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbam vMAimumNENT 360 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT essen 360 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eese 361 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooramv MAximumt PEART 361 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum ABOWe esses 361 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooram v MiNimum AbBOye rennene 361 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum BELOW eee 361 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOwW eese 361 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGGbam v MiNimum NENT 361 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT eese 361 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbRam vMiNimumtPEART er seeseeerersrerersssrsnnen 361 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGbEChrooram v MiNimum PEAK nenene n eeneneeenne 361 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command
177. 7355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 Retrieve the averaged trace data for all 30 measurements trace 2 TRAC DATA TRACE2 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 J BRR RRR RRR KKK KK k k KKK A k k k k kk k k KK J KRRKKKKKKK Configure recording KKKKKKKKKK J RR RRR KKK KR ko ko ke ke ke ko k KK ke kk kk ke KKK Store most recent 10 measurements 10 1000 records REC COUN 10 REC MAX RLEN OFF Configure default comment to be FSW data REC COMM FSW data Store additional samples for settling time for demonstration purposes only REC SETT TIME ON Perform the measurement INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN REC Export the recorded data Include minimum set of meta data except for input path plus preamplifier input impedance EXP IQ META DATA SET MIN EXP IQ META DATA SET CUST EXP IQ META DATA InputCoupling OFF EXP IQ META DATA PreampState ON Store the data to an iq tar file Programming Examples EXP IO FORM IQTAR EXP IQ FILE C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 10a_62 user MyFSW IQanalyzer results iq tar J BRR RRR RRR KR KK KK k KAA k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k Store the channel settings J BR RRR KKK KR ko ko ke ke ke kk hh hh k ko ko ko ke ke kk hh k k k k k k k Sel
178. 8 Trigger point in sample TPIS ssssse 335 1 Q format Loading VO CEET 93 UO Power B ERIS 148 Trigger level remote eese 323 UO Vector Evaluation method rrt 113 UO Analyzer Markers Y axis scaling Icons Window title bar eie nete ies 40 Identification E ue 258 String instr ment ert cte 66 String R amp S VSE 249 String resetting R amp S VSE AAA 249 IF Power TEIG nter ertt rt P tren 148 Trigger level remote sees 322 Impedance Ee c cid n Ul ec UE eus 309 SOLOING 129 Importing FUNCOMS ME 80 UO data 2 E Information IriSttutTleiE s codon chee eens Bre edic ero o es 58 COPTOMS TC 66 107 bie 66 107 Input iere Tele M 128 Coupling remote incide 308 cc M 53 RE uu 128 130 E Le EE 128 138 Signal pafrarmieters i t etr tren 124 Input sample rate ISR IR alt Lol cista ee ree ese Pages 118 Input source EE ET Instrument jd fe TEE 72 INPUT ee 128 Basics wee OD EN Il EE 71 i ze 72 95 Instrument seoeenaaaa 72 128 Radio frequency RF sss 128 Installing V Ee TEE 108 109 Instrument connection Programming example Instrument messages oe neret rnnt rn 222 Instrument settings Channel bat use HB tie 39 I
179. 8 IC channel Dat aive ese or ren Rd tore Doctrine aad 39 Debugging Remote control programs esee 439 pp 227 Default values une 260 Deleting Instr ments 5 2 armenia cecus a va sa eoo eene 57 62 Recently used IP addresses sss 76 ale 100 101 Delta markers DEMN em ES Detectors OV EIIGW M Remote control Trade S Device specific commande eee ee eects teeeeeneees 222 Devices see Instruments oce re det cote natn dense 56 DHCP Diagram area Hardware Settings torret ente Rt 42 Status display nem nette ei d ente o nd oasis 37 Diagram footer Hiding restorilK attentione 102 Informatio oen ttd edet oreet i e et ex ets 42 Dirty flag see Invalid data ICOM ege gedoe entier me 40 Display COolORS 1 cu tic t ts Customizing Elements UO Analyzer esses 41 Settings tere eer tt ieri rra 101 Thieme na 102 Theme remote 412 Update remote 250 Update Instrument Seidel dei 64 DNS server IP AOdE6SS ele cte ed Yee to ue ee 253 Docking areas Display elements cde etr tnn 44 Docking positions Display elemehlts 2 nee rn 45 Double dagger dd pe Drop out time El 145 150 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 285 E Edge gate ele caccia icc tec Electronic input attenuation i i
180. ACe 10 TPISample command If supported by the instrument in use Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 321 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power or Magnitude offline trigger sources The range of the value depends on the instrument in use For more information see Trigger Hysteresis on page 144 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 322 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYSTeresis on page 324 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Configuration For more information see Trigger Holdoff on page 146 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 321 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDoff on page 324 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 324 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of variable trigger input output connectors on the instrument in use Which output settings are available depends on the type of instrument in use For details see the instrument s docu
181. AP30 Limit and Margin Check Text CMAP31 Limit and Margin Check Margin CMAP32 Table Overall Title Text CMAP33 Table Overall Title Background CMAP34 Table Overall Text CMAP35 Table Overall Background CMAP36 Table Value Title Text CMAP37 Table Value Title Background CMAP38 Table Value Text CMAP39 Table Value Background CMAP40 Trace 5 CMAP41 Trace 6 these settings can only be defined via the theme DISPlay THEMe SELect and are thus ignored in the SCPI command Commands for Remote Instrument Operation The following commands are required to shutdown or reboot the R amp S VSE from a remote PC SYS Tent CLOG Qin M 416 S orent DISPlay UP DIE EE 417 SYSTem IDENtify FACTO E 417 SYSTemulbENUNVD STRIS prairie tette eater reote e beer aeo cre ts eto oet ee cae stude 417 SYSTem CLOGging State This command turns logging of remote commands on and off Parameters State ON Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file The destination is C R_S instr ScpiLogging ScpiLog txt OFF RST OFF Manual operation See O Logging on page 250 Working with Status Registers SYSTem DISPlay UPDate State This command turns the display during remote operation on and off If on the R amp S VSE updates the diagrams traces and display fields only The best performance is obtained if
182. ARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 368 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee enean nni 368 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 369 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM Aimum RICH 369 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 369 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT esee nnns nn ennt nans 369 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 369 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 370 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next hi
183. ATe device on page 406 Comment Defines an optional comment to be printed with the screenshot of the display Maxi mum 120 characters are allowed 60 characters fit in one line In the first line at any point a manual line feed can be forced by entering The comment is printed below the diagram area but not displayed on the screen Remote command HCOPy ITEM WINDow TEXT on page 406 Windows Selects the result display windows to be included in the screenshot By default all active windows are included Orientation Selects the page orientation of the printout portrait or landscape Remote command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation lt device gt on page 406 Scaling Selects the scaling of the printout on the paper A preview using the selected setting is displayed in the dialog box Printing Current Measurement Results Maintain The diagram is scaled only as required to fit the available paper size aspect ratio while maintaining the original aspect ratio Size to fit Default Scales the printout to fit the paper size optimally Windows Page Defines the number of diagrams to be printed on a single page Colors Opens the Print Color dialog box to configure the colors for printing screenshots For details see Print colors on page 104 g d 9 1 General Software Behavior General Software Preferences Some basic software settings can be configured independently of the selected operat ing mode or applicat
184. AYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Configuring the Result Display lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow command Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result y 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particu
185. Allowed parameters are Numeric values e Special numeric values Boolean parameters e Text Character strings Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description Remote Control Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The man tissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENS FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENS FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Units For physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are e G giga e MA mega MOHM MHZ e K kilo M milli e U micro e N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special numeric values The
186. Analyzer Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 See Marker State on page 193 See Marker Type on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE on page 350 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x
187. Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 13 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod Pulse R amp S VSE K6 PULSE Pulse GSM R amp S VSE K10 GSM GSM VSA R amp S VSE K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS BWCD 3G FDD BTS R amp S VSE K72 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Name 3GPP FDD UE R amp S VSE MWCD 3G FDD UE K72 WLAN R amp S VSE K91 WLAN WLAN LTE R amp S VSE K10x LTE LTE Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST RE
188. C804049F3A51 commen 1013125281 1139335354 616863898 2935992371 IEEE a g C3 1353199104 1170118069 545387953 595003383 SC 2 1383874137 1247249424 2015442866 2374511138 1587313167 1127055173 3212448685 2192200498 CJ 1603838632 1274379481 591404171 1040958883 162126723 1211841363 3052778369 1137295505 1805130444 1110545169 4245816997 2165776339 1807548149 1114946039 3939932830 3540278881 C3 1819357448 1266711213 1149726126 2263275203 gt 7 Amplitude Parameter gt 4 Frequency Parameter E Input Parameter gt 7 VQ Parameter gt 7 Trigger Parameter File Name MyREcording Results can only be stored for the currently selected measurement channel and only after measurement data has explicitely been recorded see chapter 8 3 1 Recording Measurement Data on page 85 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Eiles AA 88 ler Nepgen ett Roi itta QR e Iscr EES EES 88 SIE ETE 88 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation COMMER ir elei ema dace rere ba ea rt er c te ead ees bv Uo a eit Dre d 88 Mata Dala SOOS me EIE EFIE IE i S 89 QU MM 90 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the I Q data file on the PC or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder
189. CMAP DEF2 Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Screen colors on page 104 DISPlay CMAP lt item gt HSL Color This command selects the color for various screen elements in the display Suffix item Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 415 Configuring the Software Parameters Color hue tint sat saturation lum brightness The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters Example DISP CMAP2 HSL 0 3 0 8 1 0 Changes the grid color DISPlay CMAP lt item gt PDEFined Color This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements Suffix item Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 415 Parameters Color BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta Example DISP CMAP2 PDEF GRE Manual operation See Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors on page 106 DISPlay THEMe CATalog This command queries all available display themes Parameters Themes String containing all available display themes Example DISP THEMe CAT Usage Query only DISPlay THEMe SELec
190. CenterFrequency Hz 100 0000000E 007 DatalmportExport EndHeaderSection Example Channel l Example Channel Q 5 9390777E 006 3 4644620E 006 9 8984629E 007 8 4631858E 005 5 9885701E 005 4 1078620E 005 2 0786772E 005 7 8692778E 005 4 9492314E 006 1 5095156E 004 1 6332464E 005 1 8312156E 005 5 4936470E 005 4 5532928E 005 4 8997390E 005 9 7004937E 005 1 1383232E 005 4 5532928E 005 8 2157239E 005 3 2170003E 005 A 5 3 A 5 4 Reference Supported File Formats IQW File Format IQW is a binary file format containing one channel of complex IQ data Format description details e l QDataFormat Complex e QDataType Float32 Byte order Intel e Data order IQIQIQ I Q paired or interleaved or IIIQQQ UO blocks default Currently the R amp S VSE software saves UO data in interleaved order for IQW file format Mandatory Data Elements Only the binary UO data Optional Data Elements None Matlab v 4 v 7 3 File Format In Matlab amp files channel related information is stored in matlab variables with names starting with Chx X represents the number of the channel with a lower bound of 1 e g the variable Chi ChannelName contains the name of the first channel The corre sponding data is contained in ChX Data Optional user data can be saved to variables named UserDatax where x starts at 0 The variable U serData Count contains the number of UserData variables For com patibility reasons user data nee
191. Color WIELER Recording i SRate 32 0 MHz Identification String Rohde amp Schwarz VSE RE Remote Display CX e gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt VO Logging Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this connection V rsint net CN Local Area Connecho g Local Area Connection Status a Broadcom NetXtreme Networking Connect using E Broadcom NetXtreme 57xx Gigabit Controller This connection uses the following items Client for Microsoft Networks d Microsoft Network Monitor 3 Driver len Packet Scheduler iB File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 4 Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 K ntemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder I SS ISS Install Uninstall Descripti Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks windbg D sem std 6 Select the Properties button 7 n the General tab select Use the following IP address 8 Enter the IP Address for example 10 0 0 10 The IP address consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maximum 9 Enter the Subnet Mask f
192. D Wie E 336 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE Mode This command defines how the resolution bandwidth is determined Parameters Mode AUTO MANual FFT AUTO Default The RBW is determined automatically depending on the sample rate and record length MANual The user defined RBW is used and the FFT window length and possibly the sample rate are adapted accordingly The RBW is defined using the SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution command FFT The RBW is determined by the FFT parameters RST AUTO Example TQ BAND MODE MAN Switches to manual RBW mode IQ BAND RES 120000 Sets the RBW to 120 kHz Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 155 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth manually if SENSe 10 BANDwidth BWIDth MODE is set to MAN Defines the resolution bandwidth The available RBW values depend on the sample rate and record length For details see chapter 10 2 3 1 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 119 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO mode is used Example IQ BAND MODE MAN Switches to manual RBW mode IQ BAND RES 120000 Sets the RBW to 120 kHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See RBW on page 155 SENSe IQ FFT ALGorithm Method Defines the FFT calculation method Paramete
193. E EVENt Table 12 11 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TIMe register Bit No Meaning 0 not used 1 Sweep time too low This bit is set if the sweep time is too low and thus calibration fails Note the STATus QUEStionable bit for CALibration is not affected by this error 2to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 12 1 5 4 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why Parallel poll of all devices Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller A service request is a request from an instrument for information advice or treatment by the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the con troller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from fig ure 12 1 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the statu
194. EXamples x reete axi d ire ento ptr reu eua na ees asia deoa vex 423 13 4 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S VSE follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation 13 2 13 3 Common Suffixes If
195. FSet on page 317 Configuration Quantize Bins For Statistics displays this value defines the number of quantize bins used to create the histogram that is the number of different measurement values the statistical occurrence is determined for Remote command CALCulate lt n gt 1IQ STATistics SCALe X QUANtize on page 317 Y Max Y Min Defines the displayed range using minimum and maximum values Values in the range fe lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n IQ STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 318 CALCulate lt n gt IQ STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 318 10 3 4 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Select the Input gt Frequency menu item Frequency Center 13 25 GHz Center Frequency Stepsize Stepsize Center 7 Value 1 0 MHz e caisse ne EE 141 Center Frequency EE 142 Ce CP 142 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal 0 Hzs Toanter s fmax fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Note For file input you can shift the center frequency of the current measurement compared to the stored measurement data The maximum shift depends on the chan nel s current analysis bandwidth ep APW me ABW ile
196. Gger port PULSe IMMedi te 2 retten terere tt i erret rr nna 327 OUTPURTRIGJer port PULSE LENG EE 327 RECord COMMent DEFaUlt a hiasi rre rre teret ren ipei rr E D Xe ee EE a 400 FRE Gord COUN m 401 EENS 401 Ke ee Rp He H 401 GMT elei per elt Ta TEE 418 STATus OPERaltion ENADB G ertet tr teret tenet h eoe censa EI Yo AXE FE S FERRE FEXVI EE FUIS EH ABE EXE KNIE S eU eve KO NY I e SEE 419 STATUS OPERAation NTRARSIEHOD cootra rrr tp rena d n raya Ex eere ehe Reap 420 STATus QUEStUonable ENABIG tornei retirer eege egene 419 STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDLDIEOnm uaiccs creat teer http recte ettet pede dece 418 S TATUs QUEStionable EXTended ENABIG 2 rta coa rare tas Hie En Erase Ree E dees STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO ENABle sse eene eene ethernet nnns STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO NTRansition iieri rettet petto 420 SGTATusOUEG onable ExfendedINFO P hbRansiton nennen 421 STATusOUEGttonable ExTended INFOTEMENO nennen nennen tnn innen 419 STATus QUEStionable EXTended N TRarisition sue 2 2 trat rtr e reir chr On etna 420 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition 421 STATusOUEGtonabie FR Ouencvl EVEN 419 STATus QUEStionable LIMit nis CONDIEOT iusto teet erret stp re cette tpe eta eR eed 418 S TATUs QUEStionable EIMiten ENABIS 12 retirer
197. HAN DEV MyFSW Manual operation See Instrument on page 72 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings SOURce Type Selects an instrument or a file as the source of input provided to the channel Parameters Type FILE DEVice NONE FILE A loaded file is used for input See chapter 13 4 2 Loading Input Files on page 272 DEVice A configured device provides input for the measurement See chapter 13 4 1 Configuring Instruments on page 261 NONE No input source defined Manual operation See Input Type on page 71 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings SOURce TYPE Source Configures the source of input to be used from the selected instrument See also chapter 7 1 Input Sources on page 52 Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Oscilloscope input channel 1 2 3 or 4 RST RF Manual operation See Input Source on page 72 Configuring Measurement Channels The following commands are required to configure a measurement channel and select the application in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 7 3 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences on page 67 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Useful commands for configuring measurement channels described elsewhere INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings USE on page 291 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel
198. Hz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 320 10 3 5 Triggers Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger settings can be configured via the Input Trigger menu item Which settings are available depends on the instrument in use Configuration Trigger In Out Source Ext Trigger 1 S Level 14V Drop OutTime 0 0s Offset 005 Slope E Fin Hysteresis 3 0 dB Holdoff 005 External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instru ment in use are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger 2 Input Mein Output Type User Defined Level High Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger SL moes EB oou e Triggered Measurements aieeececeeceeeeec epe etiarn ete kk qan trn Edna REDE EAR anie ded a 143 e WhHGGCH SSUINGS zer eere eedem te b tale ter ce a eas 147 10 3 5 1 Triggered Measurements In a basic measurement with default settings the measurement is started immediately when you select the Capture icon However sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled on the instrument in use for example a signal level is exceeded or in certain time intervals For these cases you can define a trigger for the measurement An Offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in t
199. INPUT 1 20 MHZ connec tor is used with a variable frequency if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar E10 the external reference from REF INPUT 1 20 MHZ connector is used with a fixed 10 MHZ frequency if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar E100 the external reference from REF INPUT 100 MHZ connector is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar EAUTo the external reference is used as long as it is available then the instrument switches to the internal reference SYNC the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar Parameters for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV EXTR SOUR EXT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Frequency Input Source on page 65 DEVice EXTRef TRANge lt DevName gt lt Range gt DEVice EXTRef TRANge lt DevName gt Defines the tuning range of the external reference for the instrument in use The tuning range is only available for the variable external reference frequency DEV EXTR SOUR EXT It determines how far the frequency may deviate from the defined level in parts per million 10 13 4 2 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Parameters Range The possible values depend on the reference source see instru ment documentation
200. INter ENUMerate NEXT This command queries the name of available printers You have to use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt for this command to work properly Return values lt PrinterName gt String containing the name of one printer as defined in Windows To get a complete list of printers you have to send this query several times until no more printers could be found In that case the return value is an empty string Further queries after the empty string result in an error Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect lt device gt lt PrinterName gt This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R amp S VSE Use HCOPy DESTination lt device gt to select another output destination Suffix lt device gt 1 2 Printing device Parameters lt PrinterName gt String containing the printer name Use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt and e SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT to query all available printers RST NONE Managing Settings and Results 13 7 7 Examples Managing Data SLOWING Datel TY 408 Loading Dala EE 408 e Storing Software Settings occid etes leer tree Eee INE Re eee Ene Pa eR 409 e Loading Software Geitings A 409 Ping oa Ell neut dee bonne tcx diete oe D dn e ede ca 409 e Printing Ona d adipi E 410 13 7 7 1 Storing Data MMEM MSIS C
201. IO META DATA PreampState ON EXP 1IQ META DATA Impedance Ohm ON Includes minimum set of data except for input path plus mechanical attentuation preamplifier input impedance Manual operation See Meta Data Settings on page 89 EXPort IQ META DATA SET Set Defines which meta data is included in the data file Either a fixed set of data can be specified or a user defined set of data types can be included Note that only the settings used during recording are stored subsequent changes to the settings are ignored For iqw file format no meta data is available To query the values of the stored meta data after loading the file see EXPort 10 META DATA I VALue on page 398 Parameters Set Defines a fixed set of meta data For a detailed description of these sets see Meta Data Settings on page 89 MINimum The minimum set of measurement settings required to restore the channel later are stored MAXimum All available meta data from the entire signal processing chain input path to the output is stored CUSTom A user defined set of individual data types is included The data types are defined using EXPort 10 META DATA on page 397 Example EXP IQ META DATA SET MIN Includes minimum set of meta data Manual operation See Meta Data Settings on page 89 EXPort IQ META DATA I VALue lt Datatype gt Queries the meta data stored in the specified input source file if available s
202. IR iiie t cte BEE ec Pg EE SENSE QEF T WINDOW LENG hisini a a aaa SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVERIap SENSE NO FFT WINDOW TY PE iiie reed cele Hee Du ea el neal Meee cn SIE Ee ET H SENSe SWEep COUN EE SENSE Ee el CC EISE Ee il KEE 257 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer MODE CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN ssessseeeeeneneee nennen nennen CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe CAL Culatesn DEETamarkerstme LlINK so roo rii rh ere chere ette tete iE Entre ete kx eno REDE CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKEr lt m gt cccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeesecaeeeseeeeeseneeeeseeeeeees CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt MAXimum LEF T uae upto tpe Le ette cei on un CALCulate n DELTamarkersm MAXim rm NEXT iac cuiu c ce eoe cette eek tre cr iore tnb a EYE ruo CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumy PEAK essent nennen CALCulatesn DEETamarkersme MINim m EEF T iioc ra iecit rere te te trier tb cb iru CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNimmumNENT nennen enne nennen nnne nnns enne CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGH m CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmumfPEART nnne CALCulate nz DEI Tamarker m
203. ImportFile iqw 10MHZ 32MHz IIQQ 2 The data from the second UO channel stored in the file is used as input for the current measurement channel IQ Analyzer The displayed bandwidth is restricted to 10 MHz A sample rate of 32 MHz is applied The data is interpreted in the format IIQQ Manual operation See File on page 72 See File Name on page 88 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt MAT lt FileName gt lt ABW gt lt SampleRate gt Format lt IQChannel Assigns the specified mat file as the input source for the currently selected channel The file is automatically loaded to the R amp S VSE software and assigned the sequential number provided as the FILE lt i gt suffix Subsequent commands concerning file input from this file must use the same suffix Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of the source Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file name of the file to be loaded lt ABW gt The analysis bandwidth to be used by the measurement The bandwidth must be smaller than or equal to the bandwidth of the data that was stored in the file Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the ABW is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 lt SampleRate gt The sample rate used to obtain the stored data Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the sam ple
204. MODE etn E EEEE OAE IEEE CAL Culatesn DELTamarkersmo MREE rettet rra a a geed dee CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMG A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea e CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimumg PEAK eese CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MlINimum PEAK eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe essent eene CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT sss CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK esee CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz GGbam v MiNimum APBOVe eene CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum BELoOw essen enn CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe essen eene nennen CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea essent CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK esee CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABONWe seen CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw eese CALOCulate
205. MOVE on page 291 chapter 13 4 3 Configuring Channel Input Sources on page 280 chapter 13 4 2 Loading Input Files on page 272 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 383 Remote commands exclusive to configuring measurement channels ABORU EE 282 ll ee 283 INITiate er i ge He 284 INI fiatesns p IMMediale EE 284 INSTrumenttBLOCk CHANnel SETTings RECord ceee eee ie einen nnns 285 IN Trument ChRtate DU cate nenne enn rada Eaa iadaa a sns sse aas 285 INS Trent OR Eate NEW tt dede ped cerae e de eher qu cete es etta aie 286 INS Tramelt CREIO REPLACE iiio PI et D did 286 INS Trumen t DELEG sana SEENEN EAR SNE SOR re EEN 287 ls trop ino SM 9 castes x cece sda 287 IS ROESER deene o a ERE Pre ete yaad eege 288 INS True SEE eec pee ire ne be iod ex qe e RE Rae REPRE 288 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAI command after ABOR and before the next command For details see chapter 12 1 4 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution on page 232 To abort an entire group of measurements use the INITiate BLOCk ABORt com mand To abort the entire sequence of measurements use the INITiate SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control pro
206. Managing Settings and Results C R_S Instr user MMEM CDIR C R_S INST USER Results Changes the current directory MMEM CAT C R_S INST USER Results xml or MMEM CAT xml Returns a list of all xml files in the directory C R_S INST USER Results MMEM CAT LONG xml Returns additional information about the xml files in the directory C R_S INST USER Resul Storing Software Settings In this example we will store the software settings for the IQ Analyzer channel INST SEL IQ Analyzer Selects measurement channel IQ Analyzer MEMM STOR TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR STAT 1 C R_S Instr user IQAnalyzer Stores the channel settings from the IQ Analyzer channel to the file IQAnalyzer dfl Loading Software Settings In this example we will load the software settings from the configuration file IQAnalyzer dfltoa new IQ Analyzer 2 channel MEMM LOAD TYPE NEW Specifies that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing IQ Analyzer channel MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user IQAnalyzer Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user IQAnalyzer dfl to a new channel The new channel is named IQ Analyzer 2 to avoid a naming conflict y g with the existing IQ Analyzer channel INST REN IQ Analyzer 2 IQ Analyzer 3 Renames the loaded channel to IQ Analyzer 3 Printing to
207. Manual operation See Range on page 140 CALCulate lt n gt IQ STATistics SCALe X RLEVel OFFSet Level This command defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the x axis is changed accordingly Parameters Level The unit is variable Example CALC IQ STAT SCAL X RLEV OFFS 10dBm Manual operation See Offset on page 140 CALCulate lt n gt IQ STATistics SCALe X RVALue lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference level for statistical measurements The effects are identical to DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel Note that in case of statistical measurements the reference level applies to the x axis Parameters lt RefLevel gt The unit is variable If a reference level offset is included the range is adjusted by that offset Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 0 dBm 13 6 1 4 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example CALC IQ STAT SCAL X RVAL 60dBm Manual operation See X Axis Reference Value on page 140 CALCulate n IQ STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC 1Q STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Y Max Y Min on page 141 CALCulate n
208. Measurement Points 117 e Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth 118 BASICS OD ll EE 118 e Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 124 10 2 1 How Much Data is Measured Capture Count and Measurement Points The number of measurements to be performed in single measurement mode is defined by the Capture Count Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one measurement is performed The capture count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the Capture Count also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures see Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 164 The number of points configured in the capture settings is not actually the number of points to be captured that is defined as the Record Length but rather the number of points to be evaluated in each trace also referred to as measurement points Thus the number of measurement points is window specific However all time based dis plays except for UO Vector use the same number of measurement points For Q Vector displays the number of measurement points is always coupled to the Record Length which has a maximum of 524288 points For Spectrum displays and all time based displays except for the UO Vector the number of measurement points can either be defined manually or autom
209. Mit 7 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL LIMit 1 FAIL STAT QUES LMARgin lt n gt STAT QUES LIMit n 15 not used INPut overload IF OVerload UNDerload 9 8 T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OVERIoad STAT QUES POWer 9 8 7 6 5 L FREQuency 4 3 2 2 0 EXTended Power On User Request Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error Query Error not used Sweep time too low STAT QUES TIME not used INFO e v V S Operation Complete Buffer ES Fig 12 1 Graphical overview of the R amp S VSE status registers hierarchy STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRI 5 4 3 2 1 0 not used FATal ERRor WARNing INFO MESSage QUERN E form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB pro vides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers ESR SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers The Event Status Register 1 Event Status Enable The STATus OPERation and STATus QUI ES E ESR with the associated mask register standard EStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument EECH User Manual 1176 8839 02
210. N OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE Mode This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker for all delta markers m is irrelevant Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 351 Parameters Mode ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF Reference This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 Parameters Reference 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Remote Commands for the I Q
211. N IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name Also see INSTrument CREate NEW on page 286 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 287 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel Example INST IQ Activates a measurement channel for the UO Analyzer applica tion INST MyIQSpectrum Selects the measurement channel named MylQSpectrum for example before executing further commands for that channel Usage SCPI confirmed Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Manual operation See Q Analyzer on page 32 See Analog Demodulation on page 32 See Vector Signal Analysis VSA on page 32 See Pulse Measurements on page 32 See 3G FDD on page 33 See GSM on page 33 See WLAN on page 33 See LTE on page 33 See channel New Channel on page 72 See Select Channel on page 74 13 4 5 Controlling Measurement Groups The following commands are required to control measurement sequences in a remote environment The functions for manual operation are described in chapter 7 3 1 Sequence Functions on page 67 and chapter 7 3 2
212. N ETT 261 CAL Calibration query Common Commands Initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the calibration status Responses gt 0 indicate errors Note If you start a self alignment remotely then select the Local softkey while the alignment is still running the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the alignment is completed Usage Query only CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 Event status read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero Return values Contents Range 0 to 255 Usage Query only IDN Identification Returns the instrument identification Usage Query only IST Individual status query Common Commands Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Return values lt ISTflag gt 0 1 Usage Query onl
213. NDwidth BWIDth MODE on page 328 SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 329 Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Shows or hides the Advanced Fourier Transformation parameters in the Data Acqui sition dialog box These parameters are required for Spectrum results and are thus only available if a Spectrum window is active Note that if the advanced FFT mode is used the RBW settings are not available For more information see chapter 10 2 3 2 FFT Calculation Methods on page 120 Configuration Transformation Algorithm Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the FFT calculation method Single One FFT is calculated for the entire record length if the FFT Length is larger than the record length zeros are appended to the captured data Averaging Several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are combined to determine the final FFT result for the record The number of FFTs to be averaged is determined by the Window Over lap and the Window Length Remote command SENSe IQ FFT ALGorithm on page 329 FFT Length Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes For Spectrum displays the number of measurement points is set to the FFT length automatically Note If you use the arrow
214. Nnel SETTings RECord on page 285 Remote commands exclusive to exporting recorded data dor 396 EXPO IO FORMI E 397 EXPO ISMETA DADA mm 397 EXPO TER RN EE 398 EXPO IQ ERR NET 398 MMEMory LOAD IQ STAT 6 c fc cceceecapceencetnsteenasateaeeeccdessyevesdbisgdecacetngteeeeatenstenesbbingeeeces 399 MMEMon STORS msIO COMMBL catenae reet rr a d ade a 399 MMEM ory STORA JQ STA KEE 400 TEEN STORES E 400 MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram stessa 400 Lee Rei OR EI TI EE 400 Le Keel oe 401 REC rd MAXIm m3RLIEN EES EAR EEN Ee AEN 401 RECO SETTING TIME Pede tnter t tg ve ttl gx ee cd ette 401 EXPort IQ FILE lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The file type is defined using ExPort 10 FORMat on page 397 Managing Settings and Results Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example EXP 1Q FORM IQTAR EXP IQ FILE C R_S Instr user data iq tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See Save on page 90 EXPort IQ FORMat lt FileType gt Defines the file type used to store the I Q data For details on file formats see chapter A 5 Reference Supported File Formats on page 453 Parameters lt FileType gt IQTAR Compressed file format for an individual measurement channel CSV Comma separated ASCII file format IQW Binary file format contains only UO data from a si
215. Ntnuous nnne 340 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe eese nennen nnne 340 SENSeTAVERagesne T d EE 340 ISENGe JiuiNDow nz JDETechorzGfFUNGCHon enne 341 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO essere 341 TRACES 50 Jm 342 BENSE Reeder rei Praet Panel nen exi dna 342 KS e RE ee ET 342 SENSe AVERagexsn STATest iciiee ceinture nhe nin annuens kn Rak Rhe kan enu ERE chen NR qna 342 TRACe IQ AVERage STATe ENNEN 342 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to sin
216. ONDiti EStionable LIMit lt n gt EStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt on Or STATus QUI Table 12 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 4 is violated 4 LIMit 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 5 is violated 5 LIMit 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 6 is violated Remote Control Basics Bit No Meaning 6 LIMit 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 7 is violated 7 LIMit 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 8 is violated 8to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register This register contains information about the observance of limit margins A separate LMARgin register exists for each active channel and for each window It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable LMARgin CONDition and STATus QUEStionable LMARgin EVENt Table 12 8 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LMARgin register Bit No Meaning 0 LMARgin 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 1 is violated 1 LMARgin 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 2 is violated 2 LMARgin 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 3 i
217. PCrw Gig D4 1 4 91 dB 735 766 us M1 1 42 59 dBm 4 336 ms CF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD WIND Il RICH MACH see ow on page 302 Results on page 378 Spectrum Displays the frequency spectrum of the captured UO samples IQ Analyzer 3 Spectrum e 1AP Crw UE Analysis Bandwidth 524288 pts 3 2 MHz Span 32 0 MHz User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 112 R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements Tip You can analyze the levels per frequency over time using a Spectrogram see Working with Spectrograms on page 167 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH FREQ see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 378 I Q Vector Displays the captured samples in an l Q plot The samples are connected by a line IQ Analyzer 4 IQ Vector 1AP Crw Gig Ymax 10 00 mV Note For the UO vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length is automatically set to the number of measurement points The number of measurement points cannot be changed for this result display Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH VECT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 378 Real Imag UO Displays the and Q values in separate diagrams User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 113 R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements posu pe UAE E IQ Analyze
218. PETI oscura epica eee tu rea eoe egy an on odere Ee SK Hex eo EE CEN EH SE MOVE LEE 345 GALGulate sn SPECtrogramiSlZE ett rere e pen Gn de e p e ce e PE Rp 345 CALCulatexn gt SPEC trogram e EE 346 Te EE ee TEE H KE 346 GALGulate n THReshold 1 rt ttr he rennen rer eren Ere re erre d ege viia EX tina 365 GALGulate n THReshold S TATe iier orte rre rr eth rh tarii ro end e PER RR Eco ng 365 e Eel M m 311 DEVICE CREAUG T M 262 pijj ABzb m es 262 DEV ice DE Wetec 263 DEVice EXTRef FRE QUENCY irte ete Cep en dee t d a Dp xc vd et sleet 268 DEVICS a Een EE DEVICE eh LEE RI e EE DEVICE EXTREROSYING EE DEVice EXTRef SOURCe DEVic ENEE EE DEVice GENeraEDISPlay acest to de rrr ro rr tnc rrr EE re er ER ER Fn d FER RYE E REIR Kd 267 DEVice GENS ak EOZ M w 267 DEVICE INFOHWI N or O 265 pauses pitee d 266 BEV ICG INGO OPT X e 266 DIAGnostic SERVICS SINEO9 corte trt itat tp t rtt PO eve ERR ce WU XH e Urea 410 DIAGnostic er e VE 411 IB ES E SAN N o LATO C BAR BREED RO QE 412 DISPlayANNotation Te E 412 DISPlay CMAPsitem DEF Ault Colors es xri coena et ex erba eek Y roc rey PEE eeg
219. POLar Phase vs time RIMAG Real Imag UO STATistic Statistics diagram VECT UO Vector Configuring the Result Display LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt To query the name and index of all windows in all measurement channels use the LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result AC 2 31 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query To query the index of a window in a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow command Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of
220. R acl STU METUS New Group Channel Go Replace Channel 8g Group 1 E IQ Analyzer gt i de x Instrument File File c temp IqRecording_1233 iq tar Le IQ Analyzer ad IQ Analyzer 2 gt Ilo x Instrument e Fsw 26 S Input Source RF E nstrument e9rsw2e Y nput Source Fig 5 2 Example for a measurement group Active vs inactive channels As mentioned above only measurements on different instruments or on files can be performed in parallel If the same instrument is assigned to multiple measurement channels of the same group those channels cannot be processed simultaneously Measurement Concept Thus the channel to which the instrument was assigned previously is deactivated Only active measurements are included in a group measurement Active channels are indicated by a checkmark in front of the channel in the Measure ment Group Setup tool window Instruments Dt CO cel seria New Group Channel ag Replace Channel 5 Group 1 E IQ Analyzer gt il e xJ Instrument S Input Source Instrument Input Source Measurement groups and sequences For multiple measurements on the same instrument without switching between mea surement channels manually the R amp S VSE provides measurement sequences A sin gle instrument can perform only one measurement at a time however a sequence of measurements can be
221. R amp SSVSE Vector Signal Explorer Base Software User Manual TEE I LT 1176 8839 02 02 rement Test amp Measu ROHDE amp SCHWARZ This manual applies to the R amp S9VSE base software 1320 7500 02 version 1 10 and higher This software makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledge ment on the software CD ROM Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S Vector Signal Explorer is abbreviated as R amp S VSE 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 1 7 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 5 1 5 2 5 3 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 Contents roro 9 About this Manual 9 Typographical Conventions eee eene eene enne nennen nennen nn 10 Welcome to the R amp S VSE ccccceeeee
222. RACe IQ DATA This command queries the captured data from measurements with the UO Analyzer To get the results the command also initiates a measurement with the current settings of the R amp S VSE Note Using the command with the RST values for the TRACe 10 SET command the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended ASCII format 10 kBytes binary format 2 kBytes Return values Results Measured voltage for and Q component for each sample that has been captured during the measurement The number of samples depends on TRACe 10 SET In ASCII format the number of results is 2 the number of samples The data format depends on TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 375 Default unit V Example TRAC IQ STAT ON Enables acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 32MHz EXT POS 0 4096 Measurement configuration Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 0 Number of Samples 4096 FORMat REAL 32 Selects format of response data TRAC IQ DATA Starts measurement and reads results Usage Query only TRACe IQ DATA FORMat Format This command selects the order of the UO data Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer For details see chapter A A Reference Format Description for I Q Data Files on page 451 Parameters Format COMPatible IQBLock IQPair COMPatible and Q values are separated and collected in blocks A block
223. SOURCe rrr erre herr reir rr ne e E X e re NE daa TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINT tval crier ee eh eei rn rere a na x rre er e IO creen e UR ero 325 Index Symbols 3G FDD ADDpIICatOI ice cro et ecd ero ee E HER DER 33 75 0 channel ba EE 39 A AG Channel ba iiid er etat nct ceat 39 ACIDG CoUpling EE 128 Adding INSTRUMOENIS PC 56 Windows Address Format instrument connection ssssse 60 INSTUMOENE 4 os creer enne ce nineteen te ates 58 Alias GOmMECHON MEL T 59 AI FUnctions Off eoe cue onere ceret denen 205 Amplitude el ue LTE 135 Scaling SCUINGS in c used oi Det mec ER aed 132 135 Analog Demodulation ADpliCatlOn EE 32 Analysis Bandwidth vo Bandwidth definition 118 Bandwidth loading UO data sssuesssss 93 l Q data remote x anre iie caverta 338 Iul 162 Annotations LHliditig restorina 2 vue ic etn 102 Applications SG EDD P 33 Analog Demodulatlon 2 2 ng 32 PCIe e CP 32 GSM RE 33 ef EE 32 IN c E 33 PUISE rinso M 32 E WEE sd Vector Signal Analysis VSA cccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 32 WEAN EEN 33 Att hardware settilig 3 errore ente 42 Attenuation sud JU Electronic Impact Manual Option Auto adjustment Triggered measurement 5 nre 338 PUTO 1 so
224. Se ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes e Center frequency Reference level Example ADJ ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 160 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S VSE performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 161 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S VSE performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S VSE determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S VSE determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S VSE uses the
225. Sei 57 E teuer Mot lg DE 57 Advanced Seting in cdi m Ure ctr e Fr bri rede ay re ERE EE eee 58 Calibration State Self Alignment sse eene 58 Connector LN 58 njezf Te T ee 58 Connect DISCOMMECE rn iieri rre ERAN de Vae bea eva va a e E v EET PUEDE 58 New Instrument Displays the configuration dialog for a new instrument You can also configure instru ments that are not connected to the PC running the R amp S VSE software Configuring Instruments To configure a new instrument quickly while the Instruments tool window is closed select the File gt Instruments gt New window menu item The Instruments tool win dow is displayed with an entry for a new instrument Remote command DEVice CREate On page 262 Search Starts a search for all instruments connected to the same network as the PC running the R amp S VSE software See chapter 7 2 4 Searching for Connected Instruments Automatically on page 61 Close Instrument You can delete a instrument that is no longer available or required by the R amp S VSE software Select the X Close icon next to the instrument name in the Instruments tool window Remote command DEVice DELete on page 262 Interface Type Specifies the interface protocol used to connect the instrument to the network For details on interfaces see chapter 7 2 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 53 VXI 11 Standard TCP IP ba
226. Selects drive C as the default storage device MMEM NETW USED Returns a list of all drives in use in the network MMEM NETW UNUS Returns a list of free drive names in the network MMEM NETW MAP T Server ACLRTest Maps drive T to the directory Server ACLRTest emm Saving data from the software MMEM MDIR C R_S INST USER ACLRTest Creates a directory called ACLRTest on drive C MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER Test001 txt Creates a file called Test001 txt MMEM COMM ACLR test results Creates a comment for the file MMEM DATA TestOOl txt 4212FileContents Writes 12 characters to the file Test001 txt messem Copying the data to another location MMEM COPY C R_S INST USER Results Test001 txt T Copies the specified file to network drive T MMEM DEL C R_S INST USER Results Test001 txt Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk or MMEM MOVE C R_S INST USER Results Test001 xml D TestResults txt Moves the file Test001 txt to drive T renames it to Testresults txt and removes it from the instrument hard disk MMEM RDIR C R_S INST USER Results Deletes the directory called Results from drive C unless it still contains any content sasea Disconnecting the network drive MMEM NETW DISC T Disconnect drive T 13 7 7 2 Loading Data MMEM CDIR Returns the path of the current directory e g 13 7 7 3 13 7 7 4 13 7 7 5
227. Tar xml file in web browser xsltisinthe same directory the web browser displays the xml file in a readable format Ole C temp max xml Pra e max xml max xml of iq tar file Saved by VSE 1 10 Date amp Time 2014 11 24 14 34 06 Sample rate 32 MHz Number of samples 3200300 Duration of signal 100 009 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename File complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1V Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 10 ms div Spectrum y axis 10 dB div x axis 5 MHz div A 5 2 A 5 2 1 Reference Supported File Formats lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation http www rohde schwarz com file RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance Name VSE 1 10a 29 Beta lt Name gt Comment Comment lt DateTime gt 2015 02 19T15 24 58 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 1301 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 32000000 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt lt DataFilename gt File complex 1ich float32 lt DataFilename gt lt UserData
228. The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Character strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Remote Control Basics Example HCOP ITEM LABel Testl OrHCOP ITEM LABel Testl1 Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure Example FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted
229. The value range is 0 to 1 for all parameters HCOP CMAP2 HSL 0 3 0 8 1 0 Changes the grid color See Defining User specific Colors on page 105 HCOPy CMAP lt item gt PDEFined Color This command selects a predefined color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix item Parameters Color Example Manual operation Managing Settings and Results Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 415 BLACk BLUE BROWn GREen CYAN RED MAGenta YELLow WHITe DGRAy LGRAy LBLUe LGREen LCYan LRED LMAGenta HCOP CMAP2 PDEF GRE See Predefined Colors on page 105 HCOPy DESTination device Destination This command selects the destination of a print job Suffix device Parameters Destination Usage 1 2 Printing device MMEM Sends the hardcopy to a file You can select the file name with MMEMory NAME You can select the file format with HCOPy DEVice LANGuage lt device gt SYST COMM PRIN Sends the hardcopy to a printer You can select the printer withsySTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect device SYST COMM CLIP Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard The format should be WEMF RST SYST COMM CLIP SCPI confirmed HCOPy DEVice COLor State This command turns color printing on and off Para
230. This command returns a list of all network drives in use Parameters State You do not have to use the parameter If you do not include the parameter the command returns a list of all drives in use This is the same behavior as if you were using the parameter OFF ON Returns a list of all drives in use including the folder information OFF Returns al list of all drives in use Usage Query only MMEMory RD IRectory Directory This command deletes the indicated directory Parameters Directory String containing the path of the directory to delete Note that the directory you want to remove may contain no con tents Usage Event Selecting the Items to Store The following commands select the items to be included in the configuration file Depending on the used command either the items from the entire software MMEMory SELect ITEM oronly those from the currently selected channel MMEM SELect CHANnel ITEM are stored MMEMbry SELectCHANnelBUTEMUEALL 2 reta rto hoan reote ne aa he cete 390 MMEMory SELsect TEMJALL ierit eerte bec tecti ec oci e ede ieee 390 MMEMon GE Leck CH ANnell TTEMIDE Faut nensem nennen 390 MMEMGrytSELect TEM DEF aull tinent Banken nn iadaaa iaaii hadani 390 MMEWMory SELect CHANnel I TEMJ HWSettings eee 390 TEE e ERR Ee EE 390 MMEMon SE Leck CH ANnell TTEMI LU lNes All 391 TEEN SEET DE 391 MMEM
231. Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 327 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 327 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings How data is to be acquired is configured in the Bandwidth dialog box e Data ACQUISINON E 152 e Capture Seltiligs ertet rt redox E RH SE E TUER RENE ET ANS PER BRE ARAS RRnG 157 Data Acquisition The data acquisition settings define which parts of the input signal are captured for fur ther evaluation in the applications They are configured in the Data Acquisition tab of the Bandwidth dialog box P To display this dialog box do one of the following e Inthe configuration Overview select Bandwidth e From the Meas Setup menu select Data Acquisition Configuration HO dB Freq 13 25 GHz Advanced Fourier Transformation Params Sample Rate 32 0 MHz Transformation Sin le S EE Algorithm 3 Analy
232. Type gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage Manual operation Configuring the Result Display String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Query only See Magnitude on page 111 See Spectrum on page 112 See Q Vector on page 113 See Real Imag I Q on page 113 See Statistic on page 114 See Phase vs Time on page 115 See Marker Table on page 116 Table 13 9 lt WindowType gt parameter values for IQ Analyzer application Parameter value Window type FREQ Spectrum MAGN Magnitude MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list
233. UO Analyzer The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace minimum on and off The R amp S VSE performs the peak search after each sweep Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MIN AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep Manual operation See Auto Max Min Peak Search on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt M
234. V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 149 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 149 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 149 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel MAPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event for offline input from a file Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Example TRIG LEV MAP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 149 TRIGger SEQuence LEVe
235. a files configuration and result data General Software Setup Description of general software settings and functions that are independent of the current measurement channel UO Analyzer Measurements Description of the settings and functions provided to analyze results with the I Q Analyzer and the corresponding remote control commands How to Perform Measurements Step by step description of performing basic measurements with the R amp S VSE software Network and Remote Operation Information on setting up the PC with the R amp S VSE software and the instrument in use in a network and operating them remotely Remote Commands Remote commands required to configure and perform measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Remote commands required to set up the environment and to perform common tasks in the software sorted by tasks Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes Troubleshooting Hints and tips on how to handle errors User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 9 e Reference Typographical Conventions Additional information on data formats and an overview of menu functions e List of Commands Alpahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual e Index 1 2 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of grap
236. additional license This applications pro vide test measurements for W CDMA uplink and downlink signals base station sig nals according to the test specification For details see the R amp S VSE K72 User Manual Remote command INST SEL BWCD see INSTrument SELect on page 288 GSM The GSM application requires the GSM Measurements option R amp S VSE K10 to be installed and an additional license This application provides GSM measurements For details see the R amp S VSE K10 User Manual Remote command INST SEL GSM see INSTrument SELect on page 288 WLAN The WLAN application requires one of the WLAN options R amp S VSE K91 to be instal led and an additional license This application provides measurements and evalua tions according to the WLAN IEEE 802 11 standards For details see the R amp S VSE K91 User Manual Remote command INST SEL WLAN see INSTrument SELect on page 288 LTE The LTE application requires the LTE Measurements option R amp S VSE K100x to be installed and an additional license This application provides LTE measurements For details see the R amp S VSE K10x LTE Downlink User Manual Remote command INST SEL LTE See INSTrument SELect on page 288 5 3 Starting an Application The default application in the R amp S VSE is the I Q Analyzer 1 To start a new application in the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the New Channel button Starting a
237. age 27 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences Nu uee x WELL c Instrument rsw 26 z Input Source a Activate Deactivate Channel 71 Assigning the Channel Input SOUTE E EE 71 EE EE 71 ri LUNES 72 PAIR MOE BE o PENNE PETER 72 D e M 72 EEUU New Charinel 5 eed nen e a ERR een en RR nna RR enn enems 72 L Duplicate Current e 72 Replace Curent Chanel d ccce ttt rte ttt tt E It tt La e 72 105219 0 0 gt R 73 aC cICrAGOn M 73 Measurement mode Single Continuous 1 73 licer 73 New Measurement Wimdow AE 73 ol MD 74 Select Channel TS 74 Activate Deactivate Channel If activated the measurement is included in a group measurement Note that channels are deactivated automatically if the same instrument is assigned to multiple measurement channels of the same group The channel to which the instru ment was previously assigned is deactivated the checkmark is removed Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings USE on page 291 Assigning the Channel Input Source For each measurement channel the input source must be configured The following settings are displayed when you expand the channel settings in the Measurement
238. aging remote control sssse 340 Configulatioti ertet tnter rer tr ene 172 COMMQUIING eo 180 Configuring remote control sssssss 339 Copying sed 176 185 Copying remote control ssiri iini 342 Detector a T EN 162 174 Detector remote control AA 341 ala lo cS 174 p ro rA 173 Mode remote cohetes 339 Retrieving remote AAA 375 SAVING ees aa lO iuo M 162 Settings remote control A 339 Settings predefined ree tns 175 Trigger Config tatioli EE 142 Drop out lu 150 DropsOut Time ooh erred oec beide 145 Event remote esee e ced 260 External remote 1 idee p reete 324 External Groe eei ce ree ENEE 439 Holdoff 146 150 Hysteresis 144 150 M aSULFermeris 1 eren rone ntt reden 143 Offset 144 150 El e 131 151 Neue 320 Slope 151 324 Status register esrtis ertet te renean 240 Trigger level urit ette rr re rn me 149 External trigger remote A 322 UO Power remote osiensa sinat 323 IF Power remote eee tede zt 322 RF Power remote 1 erii eee 323 Trigger source 144 148 edz nr Em 148 Free RUM uisi salt tite Het Ets delivers 148 VO c 148 IF POWT 148 Magnitude n rne eerte 149 sigue i 149 Mee 149 Troubleshooting File nam eror mee ren ceci cen eed 393 Remote control programs ce
239. ails see table 13 10 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Return values lt TraceData gt Returns the sweep point values as shown in the result display If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only To retrieve negative peak val ues define a second trace with a negative peak detector For the Magnitude and Spectrum result displays in the UO Ana lyzer application this command returns the magnitude of the and Q values I jQ for each sweep point 21001 values For the Real Imag I Q result display the command returns first the real parts for each trace point then the imaginary parts hs oot Du Don For the I Q Vector result display the and Q values for each trace point are returned 1001 pairs of and Q values Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Magnitude on page 111 See Spectrum on page 112 See Q Vector on page 113 See Real Imag I Q on page 113 Table 13 10 Return values for SPECtrogram parameter For every frame in the spectrogram the command returns the power levels that have been measured one for each sweep point The number of frames depends on the size of the history depth The power level depends on the unit you have currently set TRACe lt n gt DATA MEMory lt Trace gt lt OffsSwPoint gt lt NoOfSwPoints gt This command queries the previously captured trace data f
240. al Reset values suo 260 Resource string fou D E EE 57 58 60 Restoring freni opor eT 75 Channel configuration eren 76 Channel settings 127 Default configuration Global configuration User settings Result displays oe iex reg NETS Marker table Phase vs Time Real Imag I Q Spectrograms Spectrum EE EE Results orato n Data format remote UO Analyzer remote Retrieving remote AAA RF attenuation NOISE IOON see er tren tener tenere retain 134 RF INPUT cist ces ded ege EES 128 le ue 308 309 RF Power BI T 149 Trigger level remote sseeesse 323 RMS detector sinerent irt Tig 162 S Sample detector uertit ok en pads o ig rue re PER Rx Rug R 162 Sample rate Definition Displayed VQ data Loading NVO data uscire itas cei merece tre eed 93 MAXIMUM E 118 xem EE 334 Savesets E e E 78 Saving Channel settngs cni te ceti etie sen Data e FUMCUOMNS ergeet eessen een SE Instrument settings e EAE Scaling Belt le ele 138 WCIESNSMONS x i ege gies D Read re op Pese edo eio 98 Y axis 135 139 Y axis remote control Y axis stalistiGS EE SCPI Paratieltefs 2 reden ep at cete 226 Syntax version m SCPI confirmed commands
241. al tab select Use the following DNS server addresses and enter your own DNS addresses For more information refer to the Windows 7 operating system Help 12 3 2 How to Log on to the Network Windows 7 requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass word in a login window You can set up two types of user accounts either an adminis trator account with unrestricted access to the computer domain or a standard user account with limited access Most instrumentss provide an auto login function for the administrator account i e login with unrestricted access is carried out automatically in the background By default the user name for the administrator account is Instru ment and the user name for the standard user account is NormalUser In both cases the initial password is 894129 You can change the password in Windows 7 for any user at any time Some administrative tasks require administrator rights e g changing the computer name or the configuration of a LAN network At the same time you log on to the operating system you are automatically logged on to the network As a prerequisite the user name and the password must be identical on the instrument and on the network 12 3 2 1 12 3 3 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control How to Change the User Password After the new user has been created on the instrument the password must be adapted to the network password This is also done using the Us
242. al measurement channel The new channel is inserted in the currently selected group of the measurement sequence see INSTrument BLOCk SELect on page 293 See also INSTrument SELect on page 288 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 285 Parameters ChannelType Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 287 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 287 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional UO Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 Manual operation See cama New Channel on page 72 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 287 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channe
243. al operation See Save File on page 82 MMEMory STORe lt n gt STATe NEXT This command saves the current software configuration in a dfl file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file name depends on the one you have set with MMEMory STORe lt n gt STATe This command adds a consecutive number to the file name Example MMEM STOR STAT 1 Save aves the current software settings in the file Save df 1 MEM STOR STAT NEXT aves the current software settings in the file Save 001 df1 MEM STOR STAT NEXT Saves the current software settings in the file Save _002 dfl NEN z Usage Event Manual operation See Save File on page 82 13 7 5 Managing Settings and Results MMEMory STORe lt n gt TYPE Mode This command defines whether the data from the entire software or only from the cur rent channel is stored with the subsequent MMEM STOR command The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Mode INSTrument CHANnel INSTrument Stores data from the entire software CHANnel Stores data from an individual channel RST INST Example INST SEL SPECTRUM2 Selects measurement channel SPECTRUM2 MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN Specifies that channel specific data is to be stored Exporting Recorded UO Data The following commands are required to export UO recording files Useful commands for exporting recorded data described elsewhere INSTrument BLOCk CHA
244. all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 136 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S VSE or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 137 Configuring the Attenuation INPUCA RK TEE 312 us idis Wine TO ere Sud EES E ASSEN 313 INP BATT e 313 INPut BATTU TO cct ber ee dee Eau o ta eru atia tenent d t c C dtt T da 313 INP UE RH RN NEE 314 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO
245. almost identical input data Measurement mode For each measurement you can define whether a defined number of measurements is to be performed or a continuous measurement This is referred to as the measure ment mode The measurement mode can be defined for an individual measurement channel a measurement group or an entire measurement sequence However the measurement mode for the channels within a group is always the same as for the entire group and the mode for the groups is the same as for the sequence Thus if you change the mode for a sequence the mode for the group and the individual chan nels is automatically adapted accordingly Nevertheless you can change the mode for individual channels for manual measurement control Default measurement The default measurement in the R amp S VSE consists of a single measurement channel with the UO Analyzer application in a default group and a default measurement Available Applications sequence in continuous measurement mode The measured magnitude values are dis played 5 2 Available Applications The UO Analyzer application is included in the basic R amp S VSE software All other appli cations such as Analog Demodulation or Vector Signal Analysis VSA are optional additions and require special licenses Hefe 32 Analog DEMOdUIANOMs C 32 Vector Signal Analysis VSA E 32 Pulsa Measuremielis iino E eer EELER eege 32 cM sin 33 Cc M 33 WLAN E
246. aluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel See INSTrument SELect on page 288 To configure the layout of windows across measurement channels use the chap ter 13 5 1 Global Layout Commands on page 296 LAYOUEADDIMINDOW J 2 3 2 S 2 120 cere anaa Sege Eege 302 LAY out CATalog WINDONWI EE 304 LAvoutIDENWWINDoWI ennemis nnns erint rennen rr iaaii 304 LAYout REMoveEWINDOW arose seu ccotue adc po nea eb ea n nne bier EL E N Eria 304 LAY out Elle EE 305 LAYout WINDow xn ADD eessssseseee ener nnne n nnne renes snis e ases e rises sereni nana 305 LAY ouEWI NDOWemDYeIDENNBT cra tate et reor c ee patte eaten eo ente 306 Beer 306 Ree et E 307 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt Window
247. alue Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types of commands e The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 246 Remote Control Basics Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits the SCPI registers 16 bits The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number To make this possible each bit is assigned a weighted value The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1 RENE EN U Weight Example The decimal value 40 32 8 indicates that bits no 3 and 5 in the status register e g the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte are set Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control u
248. ameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK MAX AUTO ON Activates the automatic peak search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep Manual operation See Auto Max Min Peak Search on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 202 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Remote Commands for the
249. amps of all stored frames CALC2 SGR TST DATA ALL Select the frame that was captured 1 second after measurement start Note the negative value This frame is displayed in the Spectrum window CALC2 SGR FRAM SEL 1 Retrieve the trace data for the spectrogram For each frame the power level and frequency at each trace point are returned TRAC2 DATA SGR Retrieve the Spectrum trace data for the selected frame only TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 13 12 4 2 Programming Example Marker Search in Spectrograms This example demonstrates how to search for peak values in spectrograms in a remote environment It assumes a spectrogram is already available see chapter 13 12 4 1 Programming Example Configuring a Spectrogram on page 428 and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument assesses Ssesesee Analyzing the results using markers Set markerl on the peak power in the most recent spectrum and query its position CALC2 SPEC FRAM SEL 0 CALC2 MARK1 ON CALC2 MARK1 X CALC2 MARK1 Y Set marker2 on the peak power in frame at 324ms and query its position CALC2 MARK2 ON CALC2 MARK2 SGR FRAM 324ms CALC2 MARK2 X CALC2 MA R R R RKZ Y Set marker3 on peak power level in the entire spectrogram in memory and query its position CALC2 MARK3 ON CALC2 MARK SPEC SAR MEM CALC2 MARK3 SPEC XY MAX CALC2 MARK3 X CALC2 MARK3 Y Move marker 3 to the next lower peak level for
250. an display the spectrum dia gram of a previous frame by changing the current frame number Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors in order to visualize them The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs You can define e Which colors to use Color scheme e Which value range to apply the color scheme to e How the colors are distributed within the value range i e where the focus of the vis ualization lies shape of the color curve The individual colors are assigned to the power levels automatically by the R amp S VSE The Color Scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values Four different color ranges or schemes are available e Hot Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low levels red colors indi cate high ones Cold Analysis Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low levels blue colors indicate high ones The Cold color scheme is the inverse Hot color scheme e Radar EE 00d8m dBi Uses a color range from black over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between Dark colors indicate low levels light colors indicate high ones e Grayscale 10dBm Shows the results in shades of gray Dark gray indicates low levels light gray indi cates high ones The Value Range of t
251. and DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo on page 410 Save Device Footprint Creates an xml file with licensing information on installed software versions This data is stored to the following directory on the PC the R amp S VSE software is instal led on C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version no gt devicedata xml It is also included in the service zip file The file name consists of the unique device ID and the current date and time of the file creation e g DeviceFootprint 1310 0002K02 900014 if 2014 08 07T06 58 29 xml Result Displays for the UO Analyzer 10 UO Analyzer Measurements 10 1 Result Displays for the UO Analyzer The I Q Analyzer analyzes the I Q data that was captured by the instrument in use or imported to the R amp S VSE in various different result displays Spectrograms Spectrograms are not configured as separate result displays but as a subwindow of an existing UO Analyzer Spectrum or Magnitude window They are activated and deactiva ted in the Spectrogram tab of the Traces settings see Spectrogram Settings on page 176 MEG MIWA P 111 SPC CUMIN e eege 112 CIUS EEN 113 elen ze HUG so sents T S 113 I ciii MT eniai 114 Phase vs E 115 Oe EE 116 Magnitude Shows the level values in time domain R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude e1A
252. and Instruments Multiple measurements on different instruments or files can be performed quasi in par allel All measurements are started at the same time and provide results independ ently as they are completed in each measurement channel 1 In the Instruments tool window configure all instruments on which measurements are to be performed see also chapter 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input on page 211 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the Channel button to add a new measurement channel to the group Select the measurement mode or a copy of the currently selected measurement channel Duplicate Current Channel The channel bar and the default result displays for the new measurement channel are displayed If necessary the previously displayed windows are cumulated in tabs to create room on the display Select the input type for the new measurement channel and assign a configured instrument or import a file see chapter 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Measure ment with Instrument Input on page 211 or chapter 11 2 How to Import UO Data for Analysis on page 213 If the same instrument is assigned to multiple measurement channels of the same group the channel to which the instrument was assigned last is deactivated the checkmark for the channel in the Measurement Group Setup tool window is removed Configure further input source or measurement settings as require
253. and Power Level eis GET MHz of the Marker D2 1 22 31 dB 4 50 286 00 MHz Frame Number of the Marker In the spectrogram result display you can activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Special search functions are provided for spectrogram markers In the spectrum result display only the markers positioned on the currently selected frame are visible In Continuous Sweep mode this means that only markers posi tioned on frame 0 are visible To view markers that are positioned on a frame other than frame 0 in the spectrum result display you must stop the measurement and select the corresponding frame Marker Settings Marker settings can be configured via the MARKER menu or in the Marker dialog box To display the Marker dialog box do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Inthe Marker menu select z Marker The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Setting Up Individual Markers on page 348 ele te EIN e ET 191 QGeneral Marker Settings iis ien red rre a i esca eere dra ehe ven 195 Individual Marker Setup
254. and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 196 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the mouse wheel It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel Manual operation See Marker Stepsize on page 196 Marker Search Spectrograms The following commands automatically define the marker and delta marker position in the spectrogram Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 366 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 366 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 366
255. andard pos sibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instru ments connected to the controller Parallel Poll In a parallel poll up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical O or 1 In addition to the SRE register which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a Parallel Poll Enable register PPE which is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll using the command 1577 The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same v
256. another trace Marker Results The results can be displayed directly within the diagram area or in a separate table By default the first two active markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are activated the results are displayed in a marker table R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements Marker information in diagram area By default the results of the last two markers or delta markers that were activated are displayed in the diagram area The following information is displayed there The marker type M for normal D for delta or special function name e The marker number 1 to 16 e The assigned trace number in square brackets The marker value on the y axis or the result of the marker function The marker position on the x axis Marker information in marker table In addition to the marker information displayed within the diagram area a separate marker table may be displayed beneath the diagram This table provides the following information for all active markers Table 10 4 Contents of the marker table in the I Q Analyzer application Wnd Window within the application Type Marker type N normal D delta T temporary internal and number Ref Reference marker for delta markers Trc Trace to which the marker is assigned Frame Spectrogram frame the marker is positioned in Displayed only when the Spectro gram is displayed X value X value of the marker Y value
257. arameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off Analysis The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 340 Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several measurements A dif ferent averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected The Capture Count determines the number of averaging procedures For details see How Trace Data is Averaged the Averaging Mode on page 166 Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amper
258. are the UO channel is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN FILE C Users ImportFile iqtar 10MHZ 2 The data from the second UO channel stored in the file is used as input for the current measurement channel IO Analyzer The displayed bandwidth is restricted to 10 MHz See File on page 72 See File Name on page 88 13 4 3 Configuring Channel Input Sources 0 The following commands define which type of input is used for a measurement chan nel The commands for input from a file are described in chapter 13 4 2 Loading Input Files on page 272 INSTrument BL OCk CHAhNnelt SET Tings DEVICES eene 280 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SET Tings SOURCE nennen 281 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings SOURCE TYPE ceccccecaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeees 281 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings DEVice lt d gt lt DevName gt Assigns the specified instrument as the input source for the currently selected channel The instrument must have been configured before it can be assigned see chap ter 13 4 1 Configuring Instruments on page 261 Suffix lt d gt 1 99 Sequential number of the source 13 4 4 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument NONE No instrument or file is defined as the input source Example INST BLOCK C
259. ariables named UserDatax where X starts at 0 The variable UserData Count con tains the number of UserData variables For compatibility reasons user data needs to be saved as a 2xN char array where the first row contains the key of the user data and the sec ond row the actual value Both rows must have the same column count and are therefore right padded with white spaces Variables can be written to the mat files in arbitrary order Limitations In general the file format is limited to a maximum of 2 GB A maximum of 100000000 values can be stored in a single variable e g 50000000 complex data samples Matlab v7 3 mat A file containing UO data in Matlab file format v7 3 Limitations The Matlab v7 3 file format requires the Matlab amp Compiler Runtime MCR to be installed on the system and registered in the PATH environment variable Download an MCR version 2 7 2 from http www mathworks de products compiler mcr I tar File FORGE EE 454 CSV File Farid tede ue peccat Plast a a ut ha ke uh acute 457 IGW File ORIG ctus oce na cere eret arn ed x Frente tat erar d ve SET dedere ibd 460 Matlab v 4 7 v 7 3 File FORMAL i EE 460 A 5 1 Reference Supported File Formats IQ tar File Format UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The o
260. arker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzLOENcude essen nennen nennen sni 362 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz DENCursion esses nnns E aas ases 362 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz GEAch et ssnneteta sisse irri esses iiis 363 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XG lMitslGTaATel eene 363 CGALCulatesmnsMARKersm sXSLIMits BEF WEEN 363 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz 2 GL IMmebRIGHT seen en nenne nnns annia 364 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMits Z0OOMISTATel nnne 364 CAbGOulatecm THES EE 365 CAL Culate lt ne THRESMOIMISTA tidie bei rii er eodeni Pe deti ana 365 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LOEXclude State This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automati
261. ars Channel bars can be placed above or below the result displays at the top or bot tom edges of the R amp S VSE window but not outside of any tool windows or tool bars Result displays are surrounded by all other window types and bars They must be placed within a grid structure of columns and rows The number of result displays in each column or row is restricted only by the available display space and the min imum window size of the individual windows Table 6 5 Docking areas in the R amp S VSE window annel into area Result display area anne into area User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 44 R amp S VSE Operating Basics Docking positions Possible docking positions for the currently selected element are indicated by an empty gray space in the R amp S VSE window Window tabs As mentioned above each window type requires a minimum amount of space for dis play If not enough display space for all active windows is available windows of the same type are automatically arranged in tabs within one window To switch between displayed windows simply select the corresponding tab For example when a new channel is started or a new display is added the existing windows may be combined into one window using tabs while the new windows are displayed in maximum size In order to save space on the screen and when not all windows are relevant at the same time you can also arrange windows in tabs manua
262. arting at 1ms current display at 2 5ms from start INST BLOC CHAN SETT FILE STAR TIME 0 001 INST BLOC CHAN SETT FILE STOP TIME 0 01 INST BLOC CHAN SETT FILE CURR TIME 0 0025 Start playing the data from the current position in single measurement mode Programming Examples INIT CONT OFF INIT IMM WAI 13 12 2 Configuring Input from an Instrument This example demonstrates how to configure two different connected instruments for a measurement in a remote environment Only one instrument is used for input in this example For a more complex example see chapter 13 12 3 Performing a Sequence of Measurements on page 425 Prepare software RST Configure connection to MyFSW at 123 456 789 100 using VSI11 protocol DEV CRE MyFSW 123 456 789 100 VXI11 WAI Query the network address of MyFSW DEV TARG MyFSW Result 123 456 789 100 Query connection state to MyFSW DEV STAT MyFSW Result 1 connection established Query information on MyFSW Installed hardware DEV INFO HWIN MyFSW Instrument ID DEV INFO IDN MyFSW Installed options DEV INFO OPT MyFSW Define the use of an external reference on MyFSW DEV EXTR SOUR MyFSW EXT DEV EXTR FREQ MyFSW 13MHZ Assign MyFSW as input source for default channel 1 in VSE INST BLOC CHAN SETT SOUR DEV INST BLOC CHAN SETT DEV MyFSW Configure connection to YourFSW at 100 100 100 99 using HiSlip protocol DEV CRE YourFSW 100 10
263. associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Positive Transition Part For more information on the negative transition part see chapter 12 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 236 Retrieving Error Messages STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corre
264. ath Highpass filter state YIG preselector e Q parameters Analysis bandwidth Filter settings Trigger parameters Custom Remote command Trigger source Trigger position Trigger level Trigger slope Trigger holdoff Trigger hysteresis A user definable set of meta data subset of Full is stored EXPort IQ META DATA on page 397 EXPort IQ META DATA SET on page 398 Save Stores the captured data to the specified file Remote command EXPort IQ FILE on page 396 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 400 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation 8 3 4 Recalling Measurement Data from Files When measurement UO data is recorded to a file not only the result data is stored but also the essential instrument and measurement settings required to obtain those results Thus when you recall a measurement file the stored settings are restored in the R amp S VSE software as well This enables you to repeat the stored measurement under the same conditions assuming the file was recorded on a compatible instru ment and contains the required measurement information Recalling measurement data from a file results in a measurement channel being acti vated with the input source File You can then replay the measurement and the stored results or even just an extract of the entire measurement input for further analysis in the R amp S VSE software Therefore the input source is Switched to Fi
265. atically In Auto mode the number is coupled to the number of frequency points FFT Length on page 156 R amp S VSE I Q Analyzer Measurements s m ss e n p In Manual mode all values from 51 to 524288 can be set The default value is 1001 points For details on how the number of points and the capture count affect the trace results on the screen see Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 162 10 2 2 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth Definitions Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the device connected to the input of the instrument in use e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output e Usable UO Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S VSE e Record length Number of UO samples the instrument in use captures during the specified measurement time calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate By default the record length is set to the number of measurement points and the measurement time and sample rate are adapted accordingly The ma
266. ation String Defines the identification string for the R amp S VSE which is provided as a response to the TDN query Maximum 36 characters are allowed Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing on page 417 Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string Each R amp S VSE has a unique ID according to the following syntax Rohde amp Schwarz VSE Unique number Remote command SYSTem IDENtify FACTory on page 417 12 3 1 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Remote Display Update Defines whether the instrument display is updated or switched off when changing from manual operation to remote control Remote command SYSTem DISPlay UPDate on page 417 UO Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function All remote control commands received by the R amp S VSE are recorded in the following log file Cus ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version number NscpiloggingNScpiLog txt Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes e g in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs Remote command SYSTem CLOGging on page 416 Network Configuration Opens the standard Windows Network Configuration dialog box for further configura tion How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Remote operation of the R amp S VSE software is possible using SCPI commands see chapter 12 1 1 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments on page 221 How to Co
267. ay the Traces dialog box do one of the following e Select Analysis from the Overview then select the Traces tab e Select the Trace gt Trace menu item 1 For each trace select the Trace Mode and Trace Detector Traces with the trace mode Blank are not displayed 2 To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step press the but ton for the required function e Preset All Traces e Set Trace Mode Avg Max Min e Set Trace Mode Max ClrWrite Min For details see Trace Settings on page 172 3 For Average trace mode define the number of measurements to be averaged in the Count field 4 Iflinear scaling is used select the Average Mode Linear Analysis 5 To improve the trace stability increase the number of Measurement Points or the Measurement Time in the Capture settings All configured traces not set to Blank are displayed after the next measurement How to Copy Traces 1 Atrace copy function is provided in a separate tab of the Traces dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Select Analysis from the Overview then select the Trace Copy tab e Select the Trace gt Copy Trace menu item 2 Select the Source trace to be copied 3 Select the Copy to trace button for the trace to which the settings are to be applied The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace The newly configured trace
268. ayed the specified percentage x of the next record is displayed together with the remaining data meas time x from the previous record This leads to a smoother trace update whereas without any overlap the trace appears to jump after each record Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel Parameters lt Percentage gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 90 Example INST BLOC CHAN FILE1 OVER AVG OFF 75 For normal clear write traces after each update the display shows 25 of the previous record and 75 of the next record Manual operation See Overlap Settings on page 96 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt OVERlap AVG ON lt Percentage gt The overlap settings determine how successive records within one data file are replayed This command defines the behaviour if an averaging trace detector is used After the first record has been replayed the specified percentage x of the next record is displayed together with the remaining data meas time x from the previous record This leads to a smoother trace update whereas without any overlap the trace appears to jump after each record On the other hand if an overlap is applied the overlapping data is included in multiple averaging calculations thus distorting the overall average Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of a configured inp
269. b do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab e From the Marker menu select Search Search Limits Search Type Left Limit E 984 0 MHz Search Area Right Limit E 1 016 GHz Exclude LO Threshold E 120 0 dBm Peak Excursion 6 0 dB Auto Mar Pesk weneuss ESCH Search Limits Off auto Min Pk Specifics for 1 Spectrum ET EI NK 200 Marker Search AImea EE 201 e ER e Ee 201 Se EE 201 Auto Max Mini Se EE 201 ele UI EE 201 L Search Limits E EE 202 Bx Ee e PRONUS 202 L LEE eerie etr rte rte l Cr tete re tete tec i 202 L Deactivating All Search Litmits c s0ccsescscccsesscesecsssecsesnseeseaenencnenseees 202 Marker Search Type Defines the type of search to be performed in the spectrogram X Search Searches only within the currently selected frame Y Search Searches within all frames but only at the current frequency position Analysis XY Search Searches in all frames at all positions Remote command Defined by the search function see Marker Search Spectrograms on page 354 Marker Search Area Defines which frames the search is performed in Visible Only the visible frames are searched Memory All frames stored in the memory are searched Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea on page 355
270. back Settings The data to be replayed can be restricted to a specified capture time within the stored measurement data Use the sliders or enter time values to define e Start time the measurement time at which replay starts Current Position the time in the measurement span that is currently being dis played Printing Current Measurement Results e Stop time the measurement time at which replay stops Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STARt TIME on page 278 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STARt SAMPle on page 278 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CURRent TIME on page 274 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CURRent SAMPle on page 273 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STOP TIME on page 279 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STOP SAMPle on page 278 Overlap Settings The overlap settings determine how successive records within one data file are replayed After the first record has been replayed the specified percentage x of the next record is displayed together with the remaining data meas time x from the previous record The larger the overlap the slower the display is updated The behaviour can be defined depending on the used trace mode Note that the behaviour is applied to all windows of the same
271. bjective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data For more details see the specification available from the Rohde amp Schwarz Internet site http www rohde schwarz com en manual rohde schwarz ig tar file format specifi cation manuals gb1_78701 37313 html e Mandatory Data Elements 454 Optional Data Elements terre ER Ree n exe eta eR E ar Rede enia d 454 e eelere 455 A 5 1 1 Mandatory Data Elements Parameter Name Possible Values Name String Comment String DateTime Year Month DayTHour Min Sec Format complex DataType float32 NumberOfChannels Integer CH n ChannelName String CH n Samples Integer CH n Clock Hz double CH lt n gt _CenterFrequency Hz Double IQ Data Header Channel Name Channel Name Q IQ data value Double Double IQ data I Q pairs A 5 1 2 Optional Data Elements Parameter name Possible Values Ch n AttenuElecState Ch n AttenuElecValue dB ON OFF Integer Ch n AttenuMech dB Integer Reference Supported File Formats Parameter name Possible Values Ch n CalibrationState ON OFF Ch n DeviceHwlnfo String Ch n Deviceld String Ch n DeviceOption
272. c marker positioning on and off for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON Manual operation See Exclude LO on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion lt Excursion gt This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB Example CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 198 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command selects the trace type a marker search is performed on For all markers lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt MarkReallmag gt Example Manual operation REAL Marker search functions are performed on the real trace of the Q measurement IMAG Marker search functions are performed on the imaginary trace of the I Q measurement MAGN Marker search functions are performed on the magnitude of the and Q data RST REAL CALC4 MARK SEAR IMAG See Branch for Peak Search on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and of
273. cceeeeeaceee enna esses esent EEN 345 CAL Culate lt n gt SP ECtogram D EP tevin ieee edie eels te ctas 345 CAL e EE RE 345 GAL CGulate sns SPEGlrogramkSlZE 2 rhone bh ott reina sux bns RR EE a 345 CALOCulate n SGRam STATe sse nennen eh nn ntn e nene tenens 346 CAL Gulate ns SPECtrogram STAT 22 orae denen eot coi pua aieo cei aed eeu eee pud 22a 346 GAL Culate lt m SG Ram KE 346 CALOCulate n SPECtrogram TRACe sss nennen eren rentre rete nennt nnns 346 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer CALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate This command resets the spectrogram and clears the history buffer lt n gt is irrelevant Example CALC SGR CLE Resets the result display and clears the memory Usage Event Manual operation See Clear Spectrogram on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam CONT State CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CONT State This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC SGR CONT ON Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the results of the last measurement Manual operation See Continue Frame on page 159 CALCula
274. ce 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 173 dee opp DEEP 173 RT M 174 2o 174 Average E 175 AVGT AGS COUNT A 175 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config sss 175 CODY Ke 176 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted How to Configure a Standard Trace on page 180 Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces For details see Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 164 Analysis Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each measurement This is the default setting The Detector is automatically set to Auto Peak Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is not available for statistics measurements Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one The Detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is not available for statistics
275. ce SEENEN EEN STATus QUEStionable TEMPeratureEEVENIT 1 rrt teer eterni ns 419 STATusOUEGttonable TIME CONDitton tenente nnne etate een nnne 419 STATus QUESItionable TIME ENABIB ccr ere eu eee ee eo pae eir edet nae E XN XE PUR OVE TREND 420 S TATUs QUEStionable TIME N FREE seo cour ce cepe reae tac ecu rete eb nies lanes 420 STATus QUEStionable IME P TRAMSHION siccssccazescntccesues toutou nth aana n aE ARE ENES 421 STATus QUESItionable TIMEEEMENI x ttn to decay e Pee eve n raptae p D Eae 419 STAT s QUEStionable EVENI oe irr reor taa race o era teurer e t rere cre rrr NEESER 419 STATUS QUEUEENEXT KEE 418 SV STEM CLOGGING etr eee en tre nen EXE Regard e Pi a ria PEE EXE ge ted ATE SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT SGv Gtem COMkMunicate PhRlNter GEI ect devicez AAA SYSTEM RIETS RE Eh OLOM ERROL GLEIA BEE SYS leM ERROR EXT NdEd KEE 421 SYSTEMIERROGUIST KE 422 ib Slem ee RTE SN 423 Ch HR et 417 SS tem DENIM STRING eet eh ox emer eoa n a sacri er RERUM ER ER re METRO WEE RET TER 417 SX S Temi P RESO rro iet er epe se ssevetacsncencetasssencuvesdeonessvsarsenenvernceneete s UST de EEDVIR UNE EENES 383 SYSTem PRESeECHANnelEEXEC te eren teret ape ot Iv n n en en a dp o v NP ruo 383 TRAGSIQ AVERage GOUNL eri ricevi ree enr re TO VW AYER ER oed ver D ere ed 342 TRACGe IQ AVERage STATS
276. ce mode Average different methods are available to determine the trace average With logarithmic averaging the dB values of the display voltage are averaged or sub stracted from each other with trace mathematical functions With linear averaging the level values in dB are converted into linear voltages or pow ers prior to averaging Voltage or power values are averaged or offset against each other and reconverted into level values For stationary signals the two methods yield the same result User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 166 Analysis Logarithmic averaging is recommended if sinewave signals are to be clearly visible against noise since with this type of averaging noise suppression is improved while the sinewave signals remain unchanged For noise or pseudo noise signals the positive peak amplitudes are decreased in loga rithmic averaging due to the characteristic involved and the negative peak values are increased relative to the average value If the distorted amplitude distribution is aver aged a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value The difference is 2 5 dB This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2 5 dB factor Therefore the R amp S VSE offers the selection of linear averaging The trace data is linearized prior to averaging then averaged and logarithmized again for display on the screen The average value is always displayed correctly irrespective of the s
277. channel Averaging Applies if any trace in the channel uses average max hold or aver On age trace mode Averaging Applies if no averaging trace modes are used in the channel Off Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt OVERlap AVG ON on page 277 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt OVERlap AVG OFF on page 276 8 4 Printing Current Measurement Results In order to document the graphical results and the most important settings for the cur rently performed measurement you can create a hardcopy or screenshot of the current display The settings for printing screenshots are configured via the Print dialog which is dis played when you select File gt Print Remote commands for these settings are described in chapter 13 7 6 Storing or Print ing Screenshots on page 402 Printing Current Measurement Results iid e SD e ai 1HE Printer dg Printto mun P MUD998 sj Print Copies 1 I Select Items to Print V Print Logo 7 Print Date and Time Comment Windows 4 V IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude Options J Scaling einn aspect ratio j Windows Page a Sc Colors IS To print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately with out switching to the Print dialog use the i Print
278. command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application Al results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 142 Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 142 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chap ter 10 3 5 2 Trigger Settings on page 147 Note that the availability of trigger settings depends on the instrument in use OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditions sess 320 e Configuring the Nuel 326 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement Note that the availability of trigger sources depends on the instrument in use TRIGgerL ee AC 321 TRIGSer SEQuencelHOLDof TIME E 321 TRIGSger SEQuence IFPowerHODDof tti or Enero Dee Re ere ENNER 321 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis cessere nennen 322 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTer
279. cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included To ignore noise in a spectrogram for example exclude the lower power levels from the histogram The value range of the color map must cover at least 1096 of the value range on the horizontal axis of the diagram that means the difference between the start and stop values must be at least 1096 The value range can be set numerically or graphically To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders 1 Select and drag the bottom color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the left of the color curve pane to the lowest value you want to include in the color mapping Analysis 2 Select and drag the top color curve slider indicated by a gray box at the right of the color curve pane to the highest value you want to include in the color mapping 110dBm 80dBm 60dBm 40dBm To set the value range numerically 1 In the Start field enter the percentage from the left border of the histogram that marks the beginning of the value range 2 Inthe Stop field enter the percentage from the right border of the histogram that marks the end of the value range Example The color map starts at 100 dBm and ends at 0 dBm i e a range of 100 dB In order to suppress the noise you only want the color map to start at 90 dBm Thus you enter 1096 in the Start field The R amp S VSE shifts the start point 1096 to
280. ctions are available from the File Preset menu Settings can be restored in different levels Restoring All Default Settings Preset All eese 75 Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Configurations Preset All amp Delete Tstiamellls er t re ere rper RS a REM adeeb 75 Restoring Channel Settings Preset Selected Channel sessessss 76 Restoring User Specific Settings Reset VSE Layout eese 76 Restoring All Default Settings Preset All Restores the initial software state that is all measurement sequences groups and channels are stopped and all windows are closed the default group and UO Analyzer measurement channel are restored Settings concerning the layout of the R amp S VSE window for example the display and position of toolbars and special tool windows remain unchanged Note The initial software state is also restored if you delete the shutdown file see Deleting the Shutdown File on page 101 Remote command RST on page 260 or SYSTem PRESet on page 383 Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Configurations Preset All amp Delete Instruments Restores the initial software state that is all measurement sequences groups and channels are stopped and all windows are closed the default group and UO Analyzer measurement channel are restored In addition all instrument configurations are
281. ctivate the SCPI error log function in the Network Remote dialog box in the GPIB tab select l O Logging All remote control commands received by the R amp S VSE are recorded in the following log file 14 2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode C R_S instr ScpiLogging ScpiLog txt Logging the commands may be extremely useful for debug purposes e g in order to find misspelled keywords in control programs However remember to turn off the log ging function after debugging to avoid unnecessary access to the hard drive and use of storage space Error Messages in Remote Control Mode In remote control mode error messages are entered in the error event queue of the sta tus reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem ERRor The answer format of R amp S VSE to the command is as follows lt error code gt lt error text with queue query gt lt remote control command concerned gt The indication of the remote control command with prefixed semicolon is optional Example The command TEST COMMAND generates the following answer to the query SYSTem ERRor 113 Undefined header TEST COMMAND There are two types of error messages e Error messages defined by SCPI are marked by negative error codes These mes sages are defined and described in the SCPI standard and not listed here e Device specific error messages use positive error codes These messages are described below Tabl
282. d commands sent before WAI have been exe whose processing should be terminated cuted before other commands are executed Command synchronization using WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped com mand is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 Remote Control Basics 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Sendthe overlapped command with OPC 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Send the overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command ha
283. d for the individ ual channels see the applications user manual for details Repeat these steps to add further measurement channels to the group Select the Capture mode icon C9 for the group to toggle between single and continuous measurements For single capture mode each measurement channel is processed a single time whereas in continuous capture mode the mea surements are performed continuously until the group measurement is stopped manually Note that the capture mode of the group automatically defines the capture mode of the individual channels as the same mode Select the Capture icon for the group to start all active measurement channels One or more measurements are performed on the input data for each active mea surement channel at the same time and the results are displayed in the channels result displays when available Note You can perform a measurement for a single channel by selecting the gt Capture icon for that measurement channel However only one channel can be User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 214 How to Perform a Sequence of Measurements on a Single File or Instrument started manually at a time Before you can start another channel you must stop the previous measurement by selecting the Pause icon for that channel first Analyze the captured data as described in chapter 11 8 How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer on page 219 11 4 How to Perform a Sequence of Measurements on a S
284. d or not if installed Parameters State ON OFF ON If enabled bandwidth extension options installed on the instru ment in use can be used OFF No bandwidth extension options installed on the instrument in use are used The maximum analysis bandwidth is restricted depending on the used instrument RST ON Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 154 13 6 1 7 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH Limit Defines the maximum analysis bandwidth Any value can be specified the next higher fixed bandwidth is used The available fixed values depend on the instrument in use and the installed bandwidth extenstion options Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 154 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here SENSE ADJUST AU iare lt eire ttr ene da aste re etur ii a ete d ER EE 336 SENSe ADJ usEGONFiqgureDURGllOR 512 rrt eL AER etia Faroe naaa 336 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE essere nennen 337 SENSeADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWE eene 337 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPE niiina iinn 337 E Ee ere Te ne 338 SENSe ABJust iF REQWBRCY hiasan e rre tnt pant ee bbtn ene baa aal aka an EEN 338 SE elle LE Vel ii tieetett tret entre Prnt er nt deett e che te E nn iol d ties 338 SEN
285. d out measurement results and to select a display section quickly R amp S VSE provides 16 markers per display window e The easiest way to work with markers is using a mouse Simply drag the marker and drop it at the required position When you select the marker label in the dis play a vertical line is displayed which indicates the marker s current x value 1Q Analyzer 1 Magnitude e You can also set an active marker to a new position by defining its x position numerically When you select a marker from the list in the Marker toolbar or from the Marker menu an edit dialog box is displayed To select or set individual markers very quickly use the functions in the Marker menu or in the Marker toolbar ees User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 186 Analysis e To set up several markers at once use the Marker dialog box select lt or Marker gt Marker e To determine more sophisticated marker results use the special functions in the Marker Function dialog box select Marker gt Marker Function E ENEE 187 e Activating Markel enne me ennt nn nnne nrenn nnns 187 e Marker LCE 187 e Searching for Signal Peaks reiecit dee c cce 188 e Measuring the Power in a Channel Gand 190 e Markers in the Gpechrogram nennen nennen 191 Marker Types All markers can be used either as normal markers or delta markers A normal marker indicates the absolute signal value at the defined position in the diagram A delta
286. dee teet a cr reed tede 196 Marker Stepsize usii heri adco E ed cad Gd i Ve esi un 196 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 353 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved using the mouse wheel Standard The marker position is moved in Span 1000 steps which corre sponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display of 1001 measurement points This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Points The marker position is moved from one measurement point to the next This setting is required for a very precise positioning if more measurement points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen It is the default mode Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe on page 354 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position s
287. deleted see Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings Settings concerning the layout of the R amp S VSE window for example the display and position of toolbars and special tool windows remain unchanged Remote command RST on page 260 or SYSTem PRESet on page 383 4 DEVice DELete ALL on page 263 Restoring Channel Settings Preset Selected Channel Resets the currently selected measurement channel only to its default settings This function has the same effect as the Preset Channel on page 127 function in the Configuration Overview Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 383 Restoring User Specific Settings Reset VSE Layout Restores user defined settings for example the display and position of toolbars and special tool windows or lists of most recently defined input values e g IP addresses of connected instruments Measurement channels remain unchanged User defined settings are stored in the file C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version number NuserWN settings pcsw user xml 8 2 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings Possibly you would like to restore or repeat a measurement you performed under spe cific conditions using the R amp S VSE In this case you can store and recall software and measurement settings and possibly other related measurement data Two different methods are available for managing measurement settings Quick Save Quick Recall a def
288. displayed 2 Select the toolbar you want to hide or display A checkmark indicates that the toolbar is currently displayed The toolbar is toggled on or off Reference of Toolbar Functions Note that some icons are only available for specific applications Those functions are described in the individual application s User Manual General toolbars The following functions are generally available for all applications Main toolbar For a description of these functions see chapter 8 Data Management on page 75 Table 1 5 Functions in the Main toolbar Icon Description TR Overview Displays the configuration overview for the current measurement channel CR P Save Saves the current software configuration to a file Recall Recalls a saved software configuration from a file Save UO recording Stores the recorded UO data to a file Recall UO recording Loads recorded UO data from a file ER ER Print immediately prints the current display screenshot as configured 61 Add Window Inserts a new result display window for the selected measurement channel Control toolbar For a description of these functions see chapter 7 Controlling Instruments and Cap turing UO Data on page 52 Table 1 6 Functions in the Control toolbar Icon Description IQ Analyzer 7 Selects the currently active channel Capture performs the selected measurement Pause tem
289. displayed as a density in dBm Hz RST POWer CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer RESult This command queries the results of the band power measurement Return values lt Power gt Signal power over the delta marker bandwidth Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the bandwidth around the delta marker position Parameters lt Span gt Frequency The maximum span depends on the marker position and R amp S VSE model RST 5 of current span Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion BPOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers for band power measurements on and off If neccessary the command also turns on a reference marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DiSblavlfWiNDow cnztLZOOMAREA nene ennt en nsns nsns erts nrt rti re rrr n nnne 372 DISPlayEWINBow sns ZOOM S DAT 22 c aiu atc aiti dev a daas cr Desa ENEE 373 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on R amp S VSE Remote Commands 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x
290. ds to be saved as a 2xN char array where the first row contains the key of the user data and the second row the actual value Both rows must have the same column count and are therefore right padded with white spaces Variables can be written to the mat files in arbitrary order The Matlab v7 3 file format requires the Matlab Compiler Runtime MCR to be installed on the system and registered in the PATH environment variable e Mandatory Data Elements gees ern cec rre D ee d toe n 461 e Optional Data Elements iie ee gate cse E Ru REP e eiu ERE eae 461 culo c ELLE 463 Reference Supported File Formats A 5 4 1 Mandatory Data Elements Variable name Class Format possible values Name char Comment char DateTime char Year Month DayTHour Min Sec Format char complex DataType char float32 NumberOfChannels Double CH n ChannelName char CH n Samples double CH n Clock Hz double CH n CFrequency Hz Double CH n Data Double Double LO UserData Count Double Number of optional user data variables A 5 4 2 Optional Data Elements Optional user data can be saved to variables named UserDatax where x starts at 0 The variable UserData_Count contains the number of UserData variables For com patibility reasons user data needs to be saved as a 2xN char array where the first row contains the key of the user data and the second row the actual value Both row
291. e Defines the part of a single FFT window that is re calculated by the next FFT calcula tion Parameters Rate double value Percentage rate Range 0 to 1 RST 0 75 Example IQ FFT WIND OVER 0 5 Half of each window overlaps the previous window in FFT calcu lation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Overlap on page 156 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE Function In the UO Analyzer you can select one of several FFT window types Parameters Function BLACkharris Blackman Harris FLATtop Flattop GAUSsian Gauss RECTangular Rectangular P5 5 Term RST FLAT Example IQ FFT WIND TYPE GAUS Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Function on page 156 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded UO pairs should be swapped I gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S VSE can do the same to compensate for it Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 154 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode
292. e 14 1 Device specific error messages Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 1052 Frontend LO is Unlocked This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails in the RF front end 1060 Trigger Block Gate Delay Error gate length Gate Delay This message is displayed when the gate signal length is not sufficient for the pull in delay with a predefined gate delay 1064 Tracking LO is Unlocked This message is displayed when the phase regulation of the local oscillator fails on the external generator module Obtaining Technical Support Error code Error text in the case of queue poll Error explanation 2028 Hardcopy not possible during measurement sequence This message is displayed when a printout is started during scan sequences that cannot be interrupted Such sequences are for example e Recording the system error correction data alignment e Instrument self test In such cases synchronization to the end of the scan sequence should be performed prior to starting the printout 2033 Printer Not Available This message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly installed 2034 CPU Temperature is too high This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 C 14 3 Obta
293. e FFT length If the window length is longer than the Record Length that is not enough samples are available a window length the size of the Record Length is used for calculation The window length and the Window Overlap determine how many FFT calculations must be performed for each record in averaging mode see Transformation Algorithm on page 156 10 2 4 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S VSE can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals 10 2 4 1 Input from Noise Sources The instrument in use may provide a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage supply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off via the software you can activate or deactive the con nected device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the instrument in use itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the instrument in use and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the instrument in use Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise
294. e IEEE Le LN 205 10 4 1 Trace Configuration A trace is a collection of measured data points The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the screen e Basics oni Setting Up TEaees ceteri tette etd ci etd d dd 162 e Trace ut Ce 172 Fow to Configire 86B8 ince here tiet tira ei tete mr eria 180 10 4 1 1 Basics on Setting up Traces Some background knowledge on traces is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings e Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector 162 e Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode ennn 164 e How Many Traces are Averaged Capture Count Measurement Mode 165 e How Trace Data is Averaged the Averaging Mode 166 Working RL EE ee TE EE 167 Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector A trace displays the values measured at the measurement points The number of sam ples taken during a measurement may be much larger than the number of measure ment points that are displayed in the measurement trace Obviously a data reduction must be performed to determine which of the samples are displayed for each measurement point This is the trace detector s task The trace detector can analyze the measured data using various methods The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace information by an abbreviation Table 10 2
295. e cx 160 Auto tee E 160 Auto level IHysteresis oic cn meme mnnera creen Reference level Auto Peak delector cuins reden Eo ra secet Auto settings Meastime mode 2 n creer 161 Average COUN suec icri ed e Eo erede cre EE ecu 158 175 Average delector nnne reinen 162 Average mode WWACCS c 175 Averaging Capture COUN air racine ntn eres 165 Continuous MeasureMeNt eee eee rete eee 165 Single meas rement rrt ess 165 Traces Traces algorithm eer Seven ir centes 165 Traces remote cohtrol 5 meet 340 B Band power M rke ere 190 Band power measurement Activating Deactivating eee 204 Deactivatihg cm 205 Power mode E 205 E TE ATE Een 205 Band power measurement remote control 370 Bandwidth ACE 153 Maximum usable seseeseeeeene 118 154 iuga 152 Bins Statistics UO Analyzer sssss 141 158 Board number o UMUC REI TOR 60 Boolean Parameters cocer rta cierto reels 228 Branch for peak search UO Analyzer seseris scannas sineren 199 C Calibration Ee EE 257 State instrument sssssssssssseseeenee 58 Capture Count Points Points UO Analyzer ss 157 Eun M M 157 Tite remote cete t terere irs 332 Case sensitivity SOPI aet Center Mkr Freq Ce
296. e ene n n 406 HOGOPy TDSTamp SlATesdeViGB uote irre iterare oreet o corem eh oe Eel ob SEC Pee qr SEPITE 406 HCOPy IMMediate device HCOPy IMMediate lt device gt NEXT INIT BO CAB ORE aren INITiate BEOGKCONMSGAS e transected ta cte rtr neon ation ae hansen c rd eade INITiate BEOGCK GONTIRUOUS iiiter rtt terrenae e to rrr edant erae e PER RE RYE DR EC e ENRETE lila Te aei INITiate SEQuericer ABORA de Rua INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate lum Rsimeleuds5ce INITiatesn CONMSEAS rrr rtr entre ene ne enero e EF EE ER e ER e der EXT e n de RE sso eel gEnUTC P M ll RE BITTEN E exit WES TOIT ilo o MI INPut AT Tenuation AUTO nion th rief p err rrr tb o Rt reor rh rire E c eec ri E dera ee eve o Ren INPut COUPling INPO EA dees M IST ERR poe HN Tet l Sa een ee pee ere eee er errr ee ere ee INPubFIETerHPASS STATS ttr eir n e re et Decr ge cnt trt Ee INPutFIETer de EH KEE IER INPuEGAIN VALUe i ctt eatem eh epe aret t rc n e p EEN diss rorio leide Be irre INSTrument BLOCK CHANNGI IMOV ceterae ve cet pnt cp c ne v ce d re eh INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SET Tings DEVice lt d gt INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTi
297. e lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to
298. e maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the instrument in use which may lead to image frequency display Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available Q Analyzer e GSM e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 309 UO File Input Alternatively to live data input from a connected instrument measurement data to be analyzed by the R amp S VSE software can also be provided offline by a stored data file This allows you to perform a measurement on any instrument store the results to a file and analyze the stored data partially or as a whole at any time using the R amp S VSE software Configuration The Input Source settings defined in the Input dialog box are identical to those con figured for a specific channel in the Measurement Group Setup window See Assigning the Channel Input Source on page 7 1 c temp IqRecording 1481 iq tar L Select File j Saved by VSE_0 80a 51 Beta Comment Date amp time 2014 11 12711 19 35 Sample rate 32 MHz Number of samples 1301 Duration of signal 40 6562 us Number of channels 1 ena 130 lorc E stances 130 UO File State Activates input from the selected UO data file Remote command INPut SELect on page 309 Input File Specifies the UO data file to be used for input Select Select File to open the Load
299. e measurement time available on the instrument in use Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 332 Record Length Defines the number of UO samples to record By default the number of measurement points is used The record length is calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate If you change the record length the Meas Time is automatically changed as well Note For the UO vector result display the number of UO samples to record Record Length must be identical to the number of trace points to be displayed Measure ment Points Thus the measurement points are not editable for this result display If the Record Length is edited the measurement points are adapted automatically For record lengths outside the valid range of measurement points see Points on page 157 the diagram does not show valid results Remote command TRACe IQ RLENgth on page 333 TRACe IQ SET on page 333 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S VSE can do the same to compensate for it Configuration On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 331 RBW Defines the resolution bandwidth for Spectrum results The available RBW values depend on the sample rate and reco
300. e same diagram Q Zoom off displays the diagram in its original size 1 Table 1 9 Functions in the Marker toolbar Icon Description e Place new marker Select marker MI e Marker type normal v Marker type delta A v Global peak N IXI Absolute peak N Currently only for GSM application Y Next peak to the left XN Reference of Toolbar Functions Description Next peak to the right Next peak up for spectrograms only search in more recent frames Next peak down for spectrograms only search in previous frames K Global minimum Next minimum left Next minimum right Next min up for spectrograms only search in more recent frames Next min down for spectrograms only search in previous frames Set marker value to center frequency Set reference level to marker value All markers off Marker search configuration Marker configuration Table 1 10 Functions in the AutoSet toolbar Icon Description AUTO LEVEL Auto level AUTO FREQ Auto frequency Auto trigger R amp S VSE GSM application only Auto frame R amp S VSE GSM application only Auto search R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD application only Auto scale R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Pulse applications only Auto scale all R amp S VSE 3GPP FDD Pulse applications only AUTO ALL Auto all Con
301. e the e in the parameter is required Example TRAC COPY TRACE1 TRACE2 Copies the data from trace 2 to trace 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Copy Trace on page 176 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt TRACe IQ AVERage COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command defines the number of UO data sets that the averaging is based on Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ AVER ON Enables averaging of the UO measurement data TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Selects averaging over 10 data sets TRAC TO DATA Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data Manual operation See Average Count on page 175 SENSe AVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State TRACe IQ AVERage STATe State This command turns averaging of the UO data on and off If averaging is on the maximum amount of UO data that can be recorded is 512kS 524288 samples Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 13 6 2 2 d Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example TRAC IQ ON Switches on acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ AVER ON Enables averaging of the UO measurement data TRAC IQ AVER COUN 10 Selects averaging over 10 data sets TRAC IQ DATA Starts the measurement and reads out the averaged data Configuring Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time spectrum traces the R amp
302. earches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Most marker positioning functions and the search settings are available in the MKR gt menu Analysis Search settings are also available via the MARKER key or in the vertical Marker Con fig tab of the Analysis dialog box horizontal Search Settings tab In UO Analyzer mode the search settings for Real Imag UO evaluation include an additional parameter see Branch for Peak Search on page 199 e Marker Search Gettngs AAA 197 e Marker Search Settings for Gpechogorams 200 POSMOMMG FUNCIONE utet rnt dee eta eo nde etie na e es ted dea ea 202 Marker Search Settings Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results These settings are are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu or in the Search Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search Settings tab e Select the Marker gt Search menu item Markers Marker Settings Search Limits c c a Left Limit 7 13 234 GHz Peak Search Right Limit E 13 266 GHz Threshold 7 130 0 dBm Use Zoom Limits On Search Limits Off Search Mode for Next Peak 197 ee a C
303. easurement channels that are to be started at the same time must be configured within a group Multiple groups of measurement channels can be configured for example to group measurements for a specific test scenario For details see Measurement groups on page 28 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences Instruments SAWEE EE a o New Group Channel Replace Channel a Group 1 1Q Analyzer gt il gt e x instrument To File cvtemp IqRecording_1233 iq tar e JQ Analyzer a o E IQ Analyzer 2 gt Il oe e x Instrument rsw 26 z Input Source nstrument Fsw 26 Y Activate DeactiVate Ee DEE 69 Ee DE 69 ec 70 PASC GOD M 70 Measurement mode Single Continuous sese 70 RECO M 70 ee 70 Activate Deactivate Group If activated the group is included in a measurement sequence Remote command INSTrument BLOCk USE on page 293 New Group Inserts a new group in the Measurement Group Setup tool window Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CREate NEW on page 292 gt 7 3 3 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences Capture Starts a new measurement and restarts averaging for all active measurement chan nels in the group Only chann
304. easurement from the Input Source selection list How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input 3 Configure further input source settings as required for the selected signal source see chapter 11 7 How to Capture Baseband I Q Data in the I Q Analyzer on page 218 4 Select the Capture mode icon for the IQ Analyzer measurement channel to tog gle between single and continuous CO measurements For single capture mode a fixed number of measurements is performed defined by the measurement set tings whereas in continuous capture mode measurements are performed contin uously until they are stopped manually 9 Select the Capture icon for the IQ Analyzer measurement channel One or more measurements are performed on the input data from the connected instrument and the results are displayed in the IQ Analyzer Magnitude result dis play Analyze the captured data as described in chapter 11 8 How to Analyze Data in the I Q Analyzer on page 219 or add further measurement channels to analyze the input data in other applications as described in chapter 11 3 How to Perform Measurements on Multiple Files and Instruments on page 214 To add further measurement channels 1 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the Channel button to add a new measurement channel to the group 2 Select the measurement mode or a copy of the currently selected measurement channel Duplicate Current Cha
305. ec trum window 2 Possible new positions for the Statistics window 3 are indica ted by an empty gray space in the R amp S VSE window IQ Analyzer 3 Statistic k 1AP Clrw 2AP Cirw SR ge IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum Fig 4 1 Moving the Statistic window over the Spectrum window As soon as the Statistics window 3 is placed over the Spectrum window 2 both windows are shown as tabs When you drop the window the moved window is added as a tab OPUF TORERE IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum V 1AP Clrw 2APClrw ig Fig 4 2 Tabbed windows To switch between the two windows simply select the corresponding tab User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 21 R amp S VSE Trying Out the R amp S VSE EH 4 1 5 Undocking and Resizing the Help Window Displaying the help window is often useful when you need to know which values to enter in a dialog for example However if many result displays are required the R amp S VSE window might get rather crowded Thus we will undock the help window and move it outside the actual R amp S VSE window 1 Select the Help icon in the window title bar to display the Help window 2 Select the RS Dock amp Undock icon in the Help window title bar The window is detached and can be moved and resized independantly of the R amp S VSE window File Input amp Output MeasSetup Trace Marker Limits Window Help ma i EI d Noe 7 A Row Analyzer ru oe EB E ES E k 2 ado Gi d B
306. eca Da aet eaa dv ca ue abe dace ava deua 410 DIAGHOSIIC SERV le RE 411 DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo lt FileName gt This command creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con tains the system configuration information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available Configuring the Software This data is stored to the following directory on the PC the R amp S VSE software is instal led on C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version no gt user As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Return values lt FileName gt Example Usage Manual operation C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version_no gt user lt R amp S Device ID gt _ lt CurrentDate gt _ lt CurrentTime gt String containing the drive path and file name of the created support file where the file name consists of the following ele ments lt R amp S Device ID The unique R amp S device ID indicated in the Versions Options information See chapter 9 4 1 Licensing Versions and Options on page 107 CurrentDate The date on which the file is created lt YYYYMMDD gt CurrentTime The time at which the file is created lt HHMMSS gt
307. ect the channel whose settings are to be saved INST SEL IQ Analyzer Specify that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN Store the channel settings from the IQ Analyzer channel to the file MyFSW IQanalyzer dfl MMEM STOR STAT 1 C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 10a_62 user MyFSW_IQanalyzer dfl L Load the channel settings x L Specify that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing IQ Analyzer channel MMEM LOAD TYPE NEW Select all settings and results to be loaded MMEM SEL CHAN ALL Load the channel specific settings from the file MyFSW IQanalyzer dfl to a new channel The new channel is named IQ Analyzer 2 by default MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 10a_62 user MyFSW_IQanalyzer dfl Rename the loaded channel to MyFSW IQanalyzer FromFile INST REN IQ Analyzer 2 MyFSW IQanalyzer FromFile Troubleshooting Remote Operation 14 Troubleshooting 14 1 If the results do not meet your expectations or problems occur the following informa tion may help you solve your problem e Troubleshooting Remote Operation eiecti ceci eat ria 439 e Error Messages i Remote Control Meder eebe SEENEN 440 e Obtaining Technical SHppOrt iiuuu eere rette tarn n n mee gne ra NEEN 441 Troubleshooting Remote Operation If problems arise during measurement in remote operation try the following methods to sol
308. ed Small values result in a high precision as the distance between two distinguishable frequencies is small Higher values decrease the precision but increase measurement speed The RBW is determined by the following equation Sample Rate Window Length Definition of RBW 10 1 RBW Normalized Bandwidth a Note The normalized bandwidth is a fixed value that takes the noise bandwidth of the window function into consideration The maximum RBW is restricted by the Analysis Bandwidth or by the following equa tion whichever is higher _ Normalized Bandwidth Sample Rate RBW max 3 If a higher spectral resolution is required the number of samples must be increased by using a higher sample rate or longer record length The minimum achievable RBW depends on the sample rate and record length accord ing to the following equation pp NormalizedBandwidth Sample Rate n 524288 RBW and FFT mode Depending on the selected RBW mode the resolution bandwidth is either determined automatically or can be defined manually Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Auto mode This is the default mode in the UO Analyzer The RBW is determined automatically depending on the Sample Rate and the Record Length A single window is used thus the Window Length corresponds to the Record Length A Flatop window function is used Note if you enter an RBW value in Auto mode the mode is automatically switched to Manual
309. edes 79 e Storage Location and File Name uice ote rer nre ttt e es tuo 79 e Save and Recall Dialog BOX6S rice aidan 80 e Slanup Recall Sgltlhgs reote et n roe ete ea ee 82 8 2 2 1 Stored Data Types The following types of data can be stored to and loaded from files via the Save dialog box on the R amp S VSE Table 8 1 Items that can be stored to files Item Description Current Settings Current software and measurement settings All Traces All active traces All Limit Lines All limit lines Note information on which limit lines are active is stored with the Current Settings Not available for UO Analyzer Spectrogram Spectrogram display Only available for UO Analyzer and Analog Demod applications 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name The storage location and file name are selected in a file selection dialog box which is displayed when you perform a storage function By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score and three numbers e g limit lines 005 In the example the base name is limit lines The base name can contain characters numbers and underscores The file extension df 1 is added automatically The default folder for settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE version user Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings Hidden folder o Note that the ProgramData folder is not visible in the Windows Explorer in
310. ee EXPort 1Q META DATA on page 397 Managing Settings and Results Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of the source Parameters lt Datatype gt AttenuElecState AttenuElecValue dB AttenuMech dB CalibrationState DeviceHwlnfo Deviceld DeviceOptions FilterSettings HighPassFilterState Impedance Ohm InputCoupling InputPath MeasBandwith Hz NumberOfPreSamples NumberOfPostSamples PreampGain dB PreampState RefLevel dBm RefLevelOffset dB RefOscillatorlnput RefOscillatorFreq Hz TrgDropOut s TrgHoldoff s TrgHysteresis dB TrgLevel dBm TrgOffset s TrgSlope TrgSource YigPreSelectorState String containing the individual meta data type Return values Result Value of the specified datatype Example EXPOrt IQ META DATA VALue AttenuElecState Result OFF Usage Query only MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe n IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix n is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the comment Managing S
311. ee INSTrument SEQuencer LIST on page 295 lt Predecessor gt String containing the name of an existing channel in the speci fied group after which the specified channel will be inserted Use an empty string to move the channel to the first position in the group lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel to be moved Example INST BLOC CHAN MOVE Group 1 IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer2 Moves the measurement channel named IQ Analyzer2 to the group 1 after the IQ Analyzer measurement channel Usage Setting only INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings USE State ChannelName If activated the specified measurement channel is included in the currently selected group measurement Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Parameters State 110 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel Example INST BLOC CHAN USE 1 IQAnalyzer Manual operation See Activate Deactivate Channel on page 71 INSTrument BLOCk CREate NEW lt GroupName gt lt Predecessor gt This command inserts a new group in the measurement sequence The new group is automatically selected for further group operations Tip To insert a measurement channel in the group see INSTrument CREate NEW on page 286 Parameters lt Predecessor gt String containing the name of an existing group after which the new group will be inserted Use an empty string to create the new group at the first posit
312. ee nien 229 Instrument Control 2 oec de etie rotes 222 Overlapping e 231 Question mark 229 Quotation mark SCPI confirmed Sequential 291 Syntax elemehls 2 erret teen rk nain 229 TEACKIDIg 1 tre trt rer eit metere teens 250 White Space tret mrt eres 229 Comments Exportlirig BET Recording Screenshots Common commands EH C M 223 Concept Measuremehis nete era nr terree nns 27 CONDition Configuring Data acquisition remote sss 328 UO Analyzer remote esee 308 Markers remote Eed be rea 348 Connection state fe TV 58 Connections Checking Jn rere tr rite ois eee 61 Configuring manually essen 56 Configuring with software support sue 99 FRESIOMING einer tns 101 DESI CHING e 61 Connectors REF OUTPUT inerte Araneae 65 Conventions SCOPI commands terere eerte 256 Copying Measurement channel remote 285 He Le E 176 185 Coupling Input remote udo ret b acd 308 csv File format cine doi CSV Exainple file tre eene nere E r iier cene reram tuts Mandatory data elements Optional data elements rennes D Data acquisition Configuring remote ssssssssseeeee 328 ef 116 Ip coc tices 152 Data format Date and Time lu e EE 9
313. eeecsseeeeeeeessceeeeesesseeeeeeeseeneees 453 IQ tar File Format aiai a tnnt en nnn nnne nnns 454 CSV File gencium 457 IOW ee 460 Matlab v 4 v 7 3 File Fomat nennen 460 List of remote commands basic software 464 Mte ee 474 R amp S VSE Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This User Manual describes general software functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes in the R amp S VSE Furthermore it provides all the information specific to I Q measurements in the I Q Analyzer application All other applications are described in the specific application manuals The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the R amp S VSE Introduction to and getting familiar with the software Software Installation and General Configuration Installation and initial configuration of the software Measurements and Results Descriptions of the measurement types available in the R amp S VSE software Operating Basics General operating methods and concepts in the R amp S VSE software Controlling Instruments and Capturing I Q Data Methods of data acquisition and description of basic instrument control functions Data Management Description of general functions to handle dat
314. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 11 Software TE TE niece ti ete Ea ex pee eaten nian uiE ieu Ein i deEuiad us 12 Installing Required Components Lesseeeseseseseessseeeeeeeeee nennen ennt nnne 12 Installing and Starting the R amp S VSE Software esee 12 Using the Smart Card Reader seeeeeeeeee nnne nnne nnns 13 Deinstalling R amp S VSE ecrire nnne et enne tierna eise e nescio cana nsn Pica NEES PP RR uaa 15 Trying OUt i CH 16 Capturing and Analyzing Data from a Connected Instrument 16 Contiguring an Instrument itus e eene eec Fere anre rene Es ne er E nag user S EX Poe Eee 16 Assigning the Instrument to a Channel 18 Adding Additional Result Displays senem 19 Rearranging B AUI EE 21 Undocking and Resizing the Help Wumdow m 22 Adding Further Measurement Channel 22 Recording Measurement Data 24 Analyzing Stored Data from a File eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeenennen nennen 25 How to Import UO Data for Analyse 25 Setting and Moving a Marker ocio tera EEH Re MEE ee RAE EE Pe Ru FE X erg Up 25 Measurements and Results ccce 27 Measurement Concept rere nean napa oH PE ak na ainan E ESO ERR uriia 27 Available Applications rerit nire ren n aane terra tna draaide atki Adnana a ERR Ee 32 Starting an Application
315. eeeeeeseneeeees 356 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz GGhamv MANimum NENT 357 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK essent 357 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum ABOWe sss nennen nennen 357 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlNimum BELOW sess 357 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK sees 358 CALGulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAME neret nnren neret rennen 355 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea essent eren eee trennen 355 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK eese 356 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe sese CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXiIMUM NEXT essen CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimumr PEAK esee CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWe essent CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum BELOw essen 357 CAlCulate cnzMAbRker mz GbECirooramv MiNmum NENT 357 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK eese 358 CAL Culatesrn MARKer m TRAGO ci ries boe Reeser ege eo EE Ue aee e
316. eerteeeeeenneeeeeeineeeeeeeiaeeeeeee 152 Adjusting Settings Automatically emn 159 EIN E 162 Trace COMM GUNAUOM icc m EE 162 Marker Usagi ies OD alae REM exe fai dese ui ER a eR Enea E ep EE 185 R amp S VSE Contents 10 4 3 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 1 3 12 1 4 12 1 5 12 1 6 12 2 12 3 12 3 1 12 3 2 12 3 3 12 3 4 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 4 1 13 4 2 13 4 3 ZOOMEM e Del VC 205 How To Perform Measurements with the R amp S VSE 211 How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input 211 How to Import UO Data for Analysis eeeeeeeeeeeeenenen nennen ern nn 213 How to Perform Measurements on Multiple Files and Instruments 214 How to Perform a Sequence of Measurements on a Single File or Instrument 215 How to Save and Load Measurement Settings eee 216 How to Export l Q D amp ta rore rere irte tuer eee did erro ket reet ua 217 How to Capture Baseband I Q Data in the UO Analyzer 218 How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer eeeeeeeeeeennneneneneennn 219 Network and Remote Operation seeeeeeeeee 221 Remote Control Basics eee urere nasa ennn rasan nonne hann nnne ERa 221 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instru
317. ees incedo riy testor medo 81 File types CSV OSV dE di eEH Exporting IQ tar iq tar IO ae IQW mata Matlab SUPPONE EE 453 Files FORMAL ee 53 ion cR 53 Input SOUFOO EEN 72 95 Filters Bandwidth UO data High pass remote High pass RF input ve lastr ment search ecrire pea De Reegel YIG EMOTE J tet niente o pem Dedi tet Format rim Data remote et EE Frame count DONKEY MN 159 Frames Spectrogram mar Ker 2 geed eicit over eoe sr eno 194 Free Run eet GE 148 Frequency E elt le ele E 141 Configuration remote sssssene 318 External reference A 65 Suc 142 Frequency reference see Reference frequency tee iens 64 Frontend Temperature status bit 244 G Gating ilo em peseide 148 GPIB Remote control interface AA 53 GPIB bus control REMOTE tee leeeede cee ss sateen cee tat een 259 Graphical user interface El ments ee meti di dtp 35 ipu S 35 GIOUDS epe rrr mer 28 Activating Deactivating iisisti 69 Adding Closing 2 0 Continuing sel O FUNCIONS eoo eode eod chee Etre CUL la 68 MGASUEMENE i erri etn tte rtr rather rae rhe ipt 69 Measurement mode T PPAUSIAG WEE 70 Selen nro eI 70 GSM ADpliCatiOri i eere tette deett tts 33 H Hardware settings Displaye E 42 Bil Lisc
318. efault emission detection Gauss Alpha Good Good Good Weak signals and short duration 0 4 Flattop Worst Best Good Accurate single tone measurements 5 Term Good Good Best Measurements with very high dynamic range User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 121 R amp S9VSE UO Analyzer Measurements s s s R mquime Overlapping The averaging transformation algorithm in advanced FFT mode calculates multiple FFTs per measurement by dividing one captured record into several windows Consec utive windows may overlap Overlapping reuses samples that were already used to calculate the preceding FFT result Record length Overlap area In advanced FFT mode with averaging the overlapping factor can be set freely The higher the overlap factor the more windows are used This leads to more individual results and improves detection of transient signal effects However it also extends the duration of the calculation The size of the window can be defined manually according to the record length the overlap factor and and the FFT length With an overlap of the FFTs of 67 for example the second data block the R amp S VSE performs the FFT on covers the last 67 of the data of the first FFT with only 33 new data The third data block still covers 3396 of the first data block and 6796 of the second data block and so on Fig 10 3 Overlapping FFTs Co
319. el in the Measurement Group Setup tool window The temporary file is used as input for the IQ Analyzer channel and the first recorded record is displayed immediately in the channel s result displays Instruments SAWEE EE Tu New Group Channel 4 Replace Channel Instrument EE Fle c temp IqRecording_8014 iq tar IQ Analyzer ea 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 Analyzing Stored Data from a File From the File menu select Save IQ Recording to store the file permanently Select the storage location and file name for the stored data Select the File Type iq tar o o N 9o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file You can now continue with the second part of the Trying Out chapter analyzing stored data from a file Analyzing Stored Data from a File If no instrument is availabe in the network to provide input to the R amp S VSE you can also try out the software using an input file Several input files are provided with the software for demonstration purposes Check the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version number NuserN predefined directory for an appropriate file Note that this directory is not displayed in the Load UO File dialog box you must enter the path and file name directly in the File Name field Tip copy the path and file name from the Windows Explorer window How to Import UO Data for Analysis 1 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the
320. elected type for the speci fied measurement channel Each message is separated by a comma and inserted in parentheses If no messages are availa ble empty parentheses are returned Example SYST ERR EXT ALL Returns all messages for the currently active application e g Message 1 Message 2 Example SYST ERR EXT FAT Spectrum2 Queries fatal errors in the Spectrum2 application If none have occurred the result is Usage Query only SYSTem ERRor LIST lt MessType gt This command queries the error messages that occur during R amp S VSE operation Query parameters lt MessType gt SMSG default Queries the system messages which occurred during manual operation REMote Queries the error messages that occurred during remote opera tion Note The remote error list is automatically cleared when the R amp S VSE is shut down Return values lt SystemMessages gt String containing all messages in the System Messages table lt RemoteErrors gt lt Error_no gt lt Description gt lt Command gt lt Date gt lt Time gt Commac separated list of errors from the Remote Errors table where Error no device specific error code Description brief description of the error Command remote command causing the error Date Time date and time the error occurred Example SYST ERR LIST Usage Query only Programming Examples
321. elements include comments title time and date Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Print on page 98 HCOPy ITEM WINDow TEXT Comment This command defines a comment to be added to the printout Parameters Comment String containing the comment Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Comment on page 98 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation device Orientation The command selects the format of the print job The command is only available if the output device is a printer Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait RST PORTrait Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Orientation on page 98 This command includes or excludes the time and date in the printout Suffix lt device gt 1 2 Printing device Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Print Date and Time on page 98 Managing Settings and Results SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt This command queries the name of the first available printer To query the name of other installed printers use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT Return values lt PrinterName gt String containing the name of the first printer as defined in Win dows If the command cannot find a printer it returns an empty string he Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate PR
322. els with distinct input types can be active at the same time The results for each channel are displayed whenever the measurement is com pleted independently of the other channels Remote command INITiate BLOCk IMMediate on page 291 Pause Cont Pause stops a running measurement on the group Cont continues a measurement group including any averaging procedures that was temporarily interrupted To restart averaging with the next measurement use the Capture function after stopping the last channel Remote command INITiate BLOCk ABORt on page 289 INITiate BLOCk CONMeas on page 289 Measurement mode Single Continuous Defines the measurement mode for the group itself and all measurement channels it contains For details see Measurement mode on page 31 Single All measurement channels in the group are started simultaneously and performed once Continuous All measurement channels in the group are started simultaneously After all measurements are completed the group restarts all mea surements again Remote command INITiate BLOCk CONTinuous on page 290 Record Currently not available Close Removes the group and closes all measurement channels and windows it included Remote command INSTrument BLOCk DELete on page 292 Channel Functions A measurement channel determines the measurement settings for a specific applica tion For details see Measurement channels on p
323. ement channel while a measure ment sequence is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 the mode is only considered the next time the group containing the measurement channel is started Tip To change the measurement mode for an entire group use the INITiate BLOCk CONTinuous command Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Measurement mode Single Continuous on page 73 See Measurement mode Single Continuous on page 95 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement With measurement count or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the correspond ing number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data For details on synchronization see chapter 12 1 4 Command Sequence and Synchro nization on page 231 Suffix n irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Sets the measurement counter t
324. ement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 284 The unit depends on the application of the command Table 13 11 Base unit Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit DBM DBPW DBUV DBMV DBUA dB lin log WATT VOLT AMPere dB lin 96 log statistics function APD or CCDF on dimensionless output Return values Position Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 284 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position The unit is variable and depends on the one you have currently set In the Real Imag I Q result display of the UO Analyzer the command returns the real part first then the imaginary part
325. emote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer on page 347 DISPlay WINDowcn SPECtrogram COLor UPPer on page 347 Sha Se the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display 1 to lt 0 More colors are distributed among the lower values o Colors are distributed linearly among the values gt 0 to 1 More colors are distributed among the higher values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe on page 347 10 4 1 3 Analysis Hot Cold Radar Grayscale Sets the color scheme for the spectrogram Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe on page 348 Auto Defines the color range automatically according to the existing measured values for optimized display Set to Default Sets the color mapping to the default settings Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault on page 347 How to Configure Traces The following step by step procedures describe the following tasks Howto Configure a Standard Trata etr et rre E exo tres 180 e How to Display and Configure a Gpechogram 181 e How TO Copy Ne cei weed deeds Doer to D e ten e d RO e 185 How to Configure a Standard Trace Step by step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Trace Settings on page 172 Trace settings are configured in the Traces dialog box To displ
326. ence Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level The instrument in use automatically determines the optimal reference level for the cur rent input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized This function is not available on all supported instruments You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 161 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 312 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S VSE Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an
327. ency Marker Freouency nennen 203 Reference Level Marker Level 203 Peak Search AN Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 366 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on page 369 Analysis Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Y AA For spectrogram displays define which frame the next peak is to be searched in For the Next Peak Up Down functions the search is automatically performed in all frames above or below the currently selected frame respectively Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 366 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 368 Search Minimum NY Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the minimum is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 367 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 369 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is
328. ene 413 DISPlay CMAP lt item gt HSL DISPlay CMAP lt item gt PDEFined BIS Play O GO m DISPlay MTABI M TRUE SE TER KEE BTE Rn 8 RE e RE 414 DISPlay THEME SEL E DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect DISPlay WINDowsri SGRam COLor DEFaLll aen orones reae tnr AEAN ETE EEE heo nans DISPlayEWINDowsri7 SGRam CObLor LOWSBr rere t tr tp nnt nr ner ens DlSblavf WiNDow nzJGCGbam CO orzHAbe enne nre AEA N DEE aS DISPlay WINDows lt n SGRam COLOMRUPRP GM secco teen eroe pete tne nubere rh rn eene DISPlay WINDowsri SGRam COLor ST YLe currere tret trn trenes DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault eese nennen DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe esee ener neret DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer essent eene neret nnne DISPlayi WiINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STY Le nenne DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE derine rn penne enit corr nre eere DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous esent DISPlay WINDowsn TRACES Y SPAGCITg ecco tr rper eae ir er treno bene Ep Ee EPRE RUE VER Ou BE E d Re DEE DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE sessi rennen rennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE
329. ensity dBm Hz value and are indicated in the marker table for each band power marker Band power markers are only available for result displays in the frequency domain The entire band must lie within the display If it is moved out of the display the result cannot be calculated indicated by as the Function Result However the width of the band is maintained so that the band power can be calculated again when it returns to the display 1AP Clrw All markers can be defined as band power markers each with a different span When a band power marker is activated if no marker is active yet marker 1 is activated Other wise the currently active marker is used as a band power marker all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated If the detector mode for the marker trace is set to Auto the RMS detector is used User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 190 10 4 2 2 Analysis Markers in the Spectrogram Markers and delta markers are shaped like diamonds in the spectrogram They are only displayed in the spectrogram if the marker position is inside the visible area of the spectrogram If more than two markers are active the marker values are displayed in a separate marker table In the spectrum result display the markers and their frequency and level values 1 are displayed as usual Additionally the frame number is displayed to indicate the position of the marker in time 2 M1 1 24 01 dBm Frequency
330. er Ch lt n gt _AttenuMech dB Integer Ch lt n gt _CalibrationState ON OFF Ch lt n gt _DeviceHwInfo String Ch lt n gt _Deviceld String Ch lt n gt _DeviceOptions String Ch lt n gt _DeviceVersions String Ch lt n gt _FilterSettings FLAT GAUSS OFF Ch lt n gt _HighPassFilterState ON OFF Ch n Impedance Ohm 50 75 Ch n InputCoupling AC DC Ch lt n gt _InputPath RF Ch lt n gt _MeasBandwidth Hz double Ch lt n gt _NumberOfPostSamples Integer Ch lt n gt _NumberOfPreSamples Integer Ch lt n gt _PreampGain dB Integer Ch lt n gt _PreampState ON OFF A 5 2 3 Reference Supported File Formats Parameter name Possible Values Ch lt n gt _RefLevelOffset dB Double Ch lt n gt _RefLevel dBm Double Ch n RefOscillatorlnput OFF ON Ch n RefOscillatorFreq Hz Double Ch n TrgSource Extern 1 4 gt I Q Power IF Power RF Power Power Sensor Time Ch n TrgLevel dB Double Ch n TrgHysteresis dB Double Ch n TrgTpis s Double Ch n TrgOffset s Double Ch n TrgSlope Rising Falling Rising Falling Ch n TrgHoldoff s Double Ch n TrgDropOut s Double Ch n YigPreSelectorState ON OFF Example DatalmportExport MandatoryData Name ExampleFile Comment Example Comment DateTime 2015 02 19T15 26 33 Format complex DataType float32 NumberOfChannels 1 Chl ChannelName Example Channel Chl Samples 10 Chl Clock Hz 3 2000000E 007 Chl
331. er SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough over view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CONDi tion part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated The SRE can be set using the command SRE and read using the command SRE Table 12 2 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 0 1 Not used 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error mes sage This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control 3 QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUES
332. er Accounts dialog box 1 oa FY N Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system Press CTRL ALT DELETE then select Change a password Enter the user account name Enter the old password Enter the new password in the upper text line and repeat it in the following line Press ENTER The new password is now active How to Start a Remote Control Session from a PC To start remote control 1 Send an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The instrument is switched to remote control remote state Operation via the front panel is disabled Only the Local softkey is displayed to return to manual operation The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instrument or via remote control interfaces Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the other instrument set tings EN DISP UPD ON command to acti Neral DISPlay on page 267 Q During program execution send the DEV vate the display of results see DEVice G Lj The changes in the device settings and the recorded measurement values are dis played on the instrument screen To obtain optimum performance during remote control send the DEV GEN DISPlay UPDate OFF command to hide the display of results and dia grams again default setting in remote control To prevent unintentio
333. er cae He bae te ica decret ee E reb cre a erbe ree boue 419 STATusOUEG onableL Mit znzN Ransttton eene eee enin Dir aN senten 420 STATus QUEStionable LIMit n P TRarnsillOri 2o ccrtc tta epe tet prete eo reae gd 421 STATus QUEStionable LIMit n EVENIt eeeesesseesees En E AES nne nnne treten nnne 419 STATus QUEStionable _LMARgin lt n gt CONDition STATus QUEStionable L MARgiri n ENABle 2 oett rhe ter enin cr rhet iae ripe does STATus QUEStionable MAboin nzNThRansiton ensornir EEan EEEk STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt PTRAnSition sanserne n a STATus QUEStionable E MARgiri n EVENI roten rt hri tnt ENE tiene 419 STATus QUEStionable NTISSISIUOR score eterne rre retu CECR ceases EURO Reo COR CIT nba 420 STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDIIOT contr tn trt nh rere rn n en ka 418 STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENI J tinere tenerent that on rrt i cerei 419 STATus QUEStonable P ett ccce o oan ema tare roue canens qure tres bn or eee AEE SERRET ANES 421 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDILIOTI 2 iare rtp recen rere A 419 STATus QUEStionable LEMPerature ENABIG 2 1 eere rnit eerie rere erra e xe eta i Ec recu STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition ae STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansitlon ce
334. er sensors alise Preamplifier ipo M 138 Presetting happert Sege 76 EE TEE 127 Configuration Global User settings usd iiiter RE 150 Printing COlOIS ct tod OI Sb e ERU 102 104 106 Colors remote nee tete re t deett 412 Configuration 96 Results as 96 Screenshots 98 ProgramData folder terreri 80 Programming examples elle orent eret tte rnit e EE Instrument connection Marker search spectrograms sssse 430 Recording I Q dat i eec 431 Neie rz EE 428 Protocol boe PTRansition Pulse ADDIICation EE 32 Q Quantize bins Statistics UO Analyzer ssssss 141 158 jeu m 222 230 icu S 246 Question Mark icio cea dr tei e Ru p 229 230 Quick Config ele 175 Quick recall Le T 77 Quick save SENDIS E Quotation mark R RS SUPPOM EE 109 R amp S VSE controlled instruments sssssss 52 t p 139 RBW hardware setting sse 42 Ready for trigger St tus register eren ener 240 Real Imag 1 Q Evaluation method 22 nice eite wheels 113 IQ EE 113 Rec Length hardware setting ssssssss 42 Recalling Channel Settings sisisi nisi 82 COMECON S ito c n e bes etd 101 faxo 84 See also Loading sis cence t
335. ersion of the R amp S VSE software select Help gt About Item Option Version License R amp S Device ID 1310 0002K02 900014 if Pegasus 0 60b 33 Beta Time Control Management active Pulse Measurements K6 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 Analog Modulation Analysis K 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 GSM EDGE EDGE Evo VAMOS Measurements Lid 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 Vector Signal Analysis K70 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 3GPP FDD WCDMA Measurements K2 0 60 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 802 11a b g Measurements LH 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 802 11ac Measurements K91 11AC 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 802 11n Measurements K91N 1 80 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 EUTRA LTE FDD Measurement K100 0 60 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 EUTRA LTE MIMO Measurements K102 0 60 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 EUTRA LTE TDD Measurements K104 0 60 permanent maintenance until 2018 09 30 Software Maintenance Expires on 2018 09 30 Install Option j Install Option by XML Expired option licenses If an option is about to expire a message box is displayed to inform you You can then use the Install Option function to enter a new license key If an option has already expired a message box appears for you to confirm In this case all software functions are unavailable including remote control until t
336. es cor rectly Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 340 Average Count Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set In continuous measurement mode if capture count 0 default averaging is per formed over 10 measurements For capture count 71 no averaging maxhold or min hold operations are performed This value is identical to the Capture Count setting in the Capture settings Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 342 TRACe IQ AVERage COUNt on page 342 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Auto Detector Auto Peak Traces 2 6 Blank Auto Detector Analysis Function Trace Settings Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Auto Detector Positive Peak Trace 2 Average Auto Detector Sample Trace 3 Min Hold Auto Detector Negative Peak Traces 4 6 Blank Auto Detector Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max ClrWrite Min Auto Detector Positive Peak Trace 2 Clear Write Auto Detector Auto Peak Trace 3 Min Hold Auto Detector Negative Peak Traces 4 6 Blank Auto Detector Copy Trace Opens the Copy Trace tab of the Trace Config
337. es nennt n nnne nnns 352 Lei e Be E de e E CALGulatesn gt MARKersm gt MAXIMUM AUT sde itor eae ce pact esti Cube e e eee D ka a ee EC Hb cepe EATE CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz MAximum LEET CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NENX T eEkEdENNEENEOEEENEEEEN eoe eerte EEN Een GALCulate sn MARKer m MAXimum RIGEIL cotra oret eerte eee ra aeo icai AAN AD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CAL Culate n MARKer m MINimU tmizAU TO inrer eee rtp cre erectae p cran eerie CALCulatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMILEF T Reegel cea teer terea ee CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MiNimumNENT ener en nrene nn nenr nennen iin rnnr nennt nne n erts n nn CALCulate n MARKer m MINimumt RIGEH assinei erue repa rare creta pecca i a CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK cessent iE CALCulate n2 MARKer m PEXOCursion esses eene enne nnne nennt SPE SENEE entree nnn CALGCulatesn MARKersm SEARGIL cot rore ertet tpe eene Bre eid pee tc rud edd gx ecc eade CALCulatesn MARKer m SGRam FRAMS rie aiaa e v SEENEN iba E E Ae CALCulatecnz MAbkermz GGbam GAbesa A CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimumy PEAK essent 356 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK 356 CAlCulate cnzMAbkercmz GCGham vMAximum AbBOVe nennen nennen 356 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELOW cceecceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeeeee
338. esult Display Global Layout Commands The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the Screen layout across measurement channels as you do in manual operation For compatibility with other Rohde amp Schwarz Signal and Spectrum Analyzers the lay out commands described in chapter 13 5 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 302 are also supported Note however that the commands described there only allow you to configure the layout within the active measurement channel BN deel Ree ee KE 296 LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDoOw eise nnne enhn nn nnne nnns 300 LAY out OEOBAEIDENUSEWINDOW 2 tiae voe tt ttt t etae a teens 301 LAYout GLOBalREMove WINDOW 22 cocer nett eoo oua coda rici eed ooa oue 301 LAY out GEOBAlSEPLEaeSE WINDOW crt oot ettet e ERR e Rok rea eR RE soe tr inches 301 LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow lt ExChanName gt lt ExWinName gt lt Direction gt lt NewChanName gt lt NewWinT ype gt This command adds a window to the display next to an existing window The new win dow may belong to a different channel than the existing window To replace an existing window use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Parameters lt ExChanName gt string Name of an existing channel lt ExWinName gt string Name of the existing window within the lt ExChanName gt chan nel the new window is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the
339. eters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file to delete The string may or may not contain the file s extension Example MMEM CLE STAT 1 TEST Usage Event Managing Settings and Results MMEMory LOAD AUTO 1 Factory lt FileName gt This command restores an software configuration and defines that configuration as the default state The default state is restored after a preset RST or after you turn on the R amp S VSE Parameters 1 Factory Factory lt FileName gt Restores the factory settings as the default state file name String containing the path and name of the configuration file Note that only All channels settings files can be selected for the startup recall function single channel settings files cause an error Example MMEM LOAD AUTO 1 C R_S Instr user TEST Usage Event Manual operation See Startup Recall on page 83 MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores and activates the software configuration stored in a dfl file Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made either in the Save Recall dialogs manual operation or through the MMEMory SELect ITEM commands remote operation the settings are identical in both cases By default the selection is limited to the user settings User Settings selection in the
340. ettiligs neret e Rire tee Overlapping commands A PIEVENUING osisssa tsenaid irai Overview GOMIQUIATION ET 126 P Pa channel bar iiit tose act arene acai 39 Parallel poll register enable REMOTE LO ee cde m CU e eee 259 Parameters BOCK Cate eee ed dcr 229 Boolean 228 Input signal 124 Output we 124 SGPI cnet dete 226 Special numeric values ener 227 ll Text vi el Passwords Changing eR 254 Peak excursion 2 Peak sealed eit d cedes 188 Area Spectrograms enero tns 201 Automatic 198 201 Deactivating limits 199 202 EXCUPSION Js Hort ner eer ae e e EE 189 Limits 189 199 202 Mode ED 197 Mode spectrograms ien 200 Retrieving results remote sssssssss 380 Threshold 2 2 et 199 202 Type spectrograms sssssssseen 200 Zool rel LEE 199 202 Peaks Marker positioning eorr 202 NOXEl toute A eet Eeer 203 Performance FET paramielters x ned eter 119 Persistence spectrum Spectrogra In esise taeran oiiaii a 171 Phase vs Time Evaluation meltliod 2 12 2 neas 115 Player Current TEE 95 VQ data 93 Playback settings 2595 Start time 25 95 Stop time 2 495 Positive Peak detector nter 162 Power mode Band power measurement isisisi iieis 205 Pow
341. ettings and Results Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Comment on page 88 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured I Q data to the specified file Manual operation See Save on page 90 MMEMory STORe lt n gt SGRam lt FileName gt MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram lt FileName gt This command exports spectrogram data to an ASCII file The file contains the data for every frame in the history buffer The data corresponding to a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded Note that depending on the size of the history buffer the process of exporting the data can take a while Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SGR Spectrogram Copies the spectrogram data to a file RECord COMMent DEFault Comment Defines a de
342. f for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation See Search Limits Left Right on page 199 See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 199 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT SearchLimit This command defines the left limit of the marker search range for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or measure ment time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range for a markers in all windows lt m gt lt n gt are irrelevant If you perform a measurement in the time domain this c
343. fault The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows for IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 338 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 160 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq esses 160 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 160 Tue Ee ue Te BEE 161 L Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value 161 L Upper Level hcc 161 L tower Level Hysteresis niet hr eege 161 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto AII Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Frequency e Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 137 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 336 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq The instrument in use adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S N ratio in the fre quency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended
344. fault text for the comment to the stored data file This default comment is displayed in the Save I Q Recording dialog box see Comment Parameters Comment string Manual operation See Default Comment on page 86 Managing Settings and Results RECord COUNt lt NoRecords gt Defines the number of records to be stored One record contains the data captured during the defined measurement time for a single channel If more measurements are available than the specified number x of records only the most recent x measure ment results are stored As a rule the recording is limited by the maximum record length provided by the instru ment This setting is ignored for RECord MAXimum RLEN ON Parameters lt NoRecords gt numeric value RST 1 Manual operation See Number of Records on page 86 RECord MAXimum RLEN lt State gt Defines how many records are stored Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 All available records for the channel are stored The RECord COUNt command is ignored OFF 0 Only the most recent records defined by RECord COUNt are stored RST ON Manual operation See Always Maximum Record Length on page 86 RECord SETTling TIME State If enabled additional samples in addition to the specified capture time are stored for the channel to compensate for settling effects This setting is required for instrument in uses that do not support the standard band width
345. ferent analysis tasks and different types of signals The I Q Analyzer application is included in the basic R amp S VSE soft ware All other applications such as Analog Demodulation or Vector Signal Analysis VSA are optional additions and require special licenses See also chapter 5 2 Avail able Applications on page 32 e Measurement Concept 27 E Eeer e EEN 32 e Starting am Applicaton isi ioco rit rcr d vere i el ne revo acne ates Eres P ER rena eed n 33 Measurement Concept As a rule each instrument can only perform a single measurement at any time How ever the R amp S VSE allows you to perform multiple measurements on the same instru ment sequentially or to perform multiple measurements on different instruments in par allel Thus comprehensive data analysis with a single tool becomes quick and simple Basic measurement process In a basic UO measurement data is imported from a file or captured from an instru ment and the measured results are displayed Multiple applications can be used at the same time in the R amp S VSE However data acquisition on the same instrument is restricted to a single application at a time Measurement channels When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application Whenever you
346. figure auto settings Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format A 3 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA Or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible for mats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured val ues in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n With 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data AA Reference Format Description for UO Data Files This section describes how UO data is transferred to the memory during remote control see TRACe 10 DATA FORMat on page 375 command For details on the format of the individual values see chapter A 3 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 451 For
347. file Example MMEM NAME C R_S instr user PRINT1 BMP Selects the file name Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory NETWork DISConnect lt Drive gt This command disconnects a network drive Parameters lt Drive gt String containing the drive name Usage Event MMEMory NETWork MAP Drive lt HostName gt lt UserName gt lt Password gt lt Reconnect gt This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first Parameters lt Drive gt String containing the drive name or path of the directory you want to map lt HostName gt String containing the host name of the computer or the IP address and the share name of the drive lt host name or IP address share name gt lt UserName gt String containing a user name in the network The user name is optional lt Password gt String containing the password corresponding to the lt User Name gt The password is optional lt Reconnect gt ON OFF ON Reconnects at logon with the same user name OFF Does not reconnect at logon Usage Event MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives This command returns a list of unused network drives 13 7 3 Managing Settings and Results Return values lt DriveName gt List of network drives in alphabetically descending order e g W V U Usage Query only MMEMory NETWork USEDdrives State
348. file must use the same suffix Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of the source Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file name of the file to be loaded Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data lt ABW gt The analysis bandwidth to be used by the measurement The bandwidth must be smaller than or equal to the bandwidth of the data that was stored in the file Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the ABW is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 lt SampleRate gt The sample rate used to obtain the stored data Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the sam ple rate is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 lt Format gt The format in which the UO data is provided IIQQ IQBLock First all l values are listed then the Q values LLL ELI Q Q Q Q Q Q IQIQ IQPair One pair of UO values after the other is listed 1 Q 1 Q 1 Q RST IQPair lt IQChannel gt ID of the UO channel in the stored file which is to be restored to the selected measurement channel If this parameter is omitted the first channel found is restored Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the I Q channel is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 Example INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN FILE IQW C Users
349. format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example TRAC IQ STAT ON Enables acquisition of UO data TRAC IQ SET NORM 10MHz 32MHz EXT POS 100 4096 Measurement configuration Sample Rate 32 MHz Trigger Source External Trigger Slope Positive Pretrigger Samples 100 Number of Samples 4096 INIT WAI Starts measurement and wait for sync FORMat REAL 32 Determines output format To read the results TRAC 1Q DATA MEM Reads all 4096 UO data TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Reads 2048 UO data starting at the beginning of data acquisition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 2048 1024 Reads 1024 UO data from half of the recorded data TRAC IQ DATA MEM 100 512 Reads 512 UO data starting at the trigger point Pretrigger Samples was 100 Usage Query only 13 6 3 2 Retrieving UO Trace Data In addition to the raw captured UO data the results from UO analysis as shown in the result displays can also be retrieved EE E 377 elle NIR TEE 378 TED e NIAI s idcm des poet rides a LA be a tal bcd thm tcs 378 TRAGeGSmnSEDATADMENMOLEV T cent irent i a eoo rx aree Exe FRE e kh E Mna Xo Eee Exe So ie ada 379 TRACES E 380 FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S VSE to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S VSE The R amp S VSE automatica
350. frame 2 seconds ago Manual operation See um Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 See Frame Spectrogram only on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 201 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency
351. frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta m
352. g Falling Rising Falling Ch n TrgHoldoff s Double Ch n TrgDropOut s Double Ch n YigPreSelectorState ON OFF Reference Supported File Formats A 5 4 3 Example T fu pi e a Hb stock Gen LD Select data to plot Name Value Chl CFrequency Hz 4 0000e 09 1d 4 0000 4 0000 double 0 Chi ChannelName IQ Analyzer idi char Chi Clock Hz 32000000 1d 32000 32000 double 0 Chi Data 1301x2 double 13052 2128 2 6082 double 4 7364e 04 H Chi Samples 1301 id 1301 1301 double 0 Comment 10 char a c DataType float32 ld char be DateTime 2015 02 19T15 25 58 1x9 char Format complex 17 char Name VSE_1 10a 29 Beta 147 char NumberOfChannels 1 id 1 1 double 0 UserData0 2x19 char 2x19 char UserDatal 2323 char 2x23 char UserDatal0 2x17 char 2x17 char aoc UserDatall 2x13 char 2x13 char be UserDatal2 lt 2x20 char 2x20 char UserDatal3 2323 char 2x23 char UserDatal4 2322 char 2x22 char UserDatal5 2x18 char 2x18 char UserDatal6 2x15 char 2x15 char UserDatal7 2322 char 2x22 char UserDatal8 2x17 char 2x17 char UserDatal9 2x22 char 2x22 char UserData2 2x18 char 2x18 char UserData20 2x13 char 2x13 char UserData21 2323 char 2x23 char UserData3 2320 char 2x20 char UserData4 2x744 char 2x744 char UserData5 lt 2x44 char gt 2x44 char UserData6 2x192 char 2x192 char UserData7 2x18 char 2x18 char ec Use
353. g in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Scaling on page 139 Configuring the Axes for Statistical Displays For statistical displays the scaling can be configured for both the x axis and the y axis CALCulate lt n gt lQ STATistics SCALE X QUANIZE cccecccceecccecececeseseeseeceeeeaeeseaeseesaneeees 317 CALCulate nz JOSTATstice GCAlexbAhNGe vecinski adii 317 CAL Culate nzJOSTATistice GCAlexbEvelOttzet esent 317 CAL Culate nzJOSTATistice GCALexbvVAlue eene en nnns sa sss nhan is 317 CALCulate lt n gt lQ STATistics SCALE Y LOWED nene nn nennen nns nene 318 CAL Culatesn 1Q S TATisties SCALE Y DPPOGE iion rez eoru Razones ee 318 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt IQ STATistics SCALe X QUANtize lt StatNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution Setting parameters lt StatNofColumns gt numeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Example CALC IQ STAT SCAL X QUAN 10 Manual operation See Quantize Bins on page 141 CALCulate n IQ STATistics SCALe X RANGe Range This command defines the display range of the x axis for statistical measurements The effects are identical to DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Parameters Range Range 1dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Example CALC IQ STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB
354. g the Connection Information Manual 56 Determining the Address with Software Support ssssssssesrrnrrsnssnssrtrerrrnrrnnsnsesrrnennn 58 Searching for Connected Instruments Automatcalhy 61 Deleting all Instrument Configurations seen 62 Initializing a Self Alignment on the instrument in use 63 Configuring the Behavior During Remote Control 63 Configuring a Frequency Reference for the Connected Instrument 64 Obtaining Information on Versions and Options on the instrument in use 66 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences 67 Sequence fF Urictioris aues eiie entrer enge easet agen tappe oa sae a ocv n Ege daa 67 Group alpes 68 Channel au eio m 70 Data Nett 75 Restoring the Default Software Configuration Preset 75 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings eese 76 Quick Save Quick Recall 77 Configurable Storage and Recall 79 8 3 8 3 1 8 32 8 3 3 8 3 4 8 4 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 10 10 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation 84 Recording Measurement Data i cesice e niae eine aa 85 General Rec
355. ge 67 and chapter 7 3 2 Group Functions on page 68 Nipate SEQUENCE ABORI 2 2 rrt In eti e a tn cx ert Re nd ten etd eed dee 294 INITiate GEOuencer IMMediate seen nnn nnns sa sns ne iis r nnns rss a4n 294 Niate SEQuence r MODE E 294 INST mentSEQuencer UST 9 an artic eta eo SSES 295 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements You can start a new sequence any time using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 Tip To stop the currently active group only and continue the measurement sequence with that group later use the INITiate BLOCk ABORt and INITiate BLOCk CONMeas commands Usage Event Manual operation See Stop on page 68 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new measurement sequence according to the capture mode specified using INITiate SEQuencer MODE on page 294 Usage Event Manual operation See Play on page 67 INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode Defines the capture mode for the entire measurement sequence and all measurement groups and channels it contains For details see Measurement mode on page 31 Note In order to synchronize to the end of a measurement sequence using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode Configuring the Result Display Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition All measurement channels in a group are
356. ge from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm is covered by blue and a few shades of green only The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm is covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Fig 10 15 Spectrogram with default color curve The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 105 5 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow which occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand is dominated by various shades of red only Fig 10 16 Non linear color curve shape 0 5 Fig 10 17 Spectrogram with shifted color curve Trace Configuration Trace configuration includes the following settings and functions ES do E 172 e SECHER enana ceci bend de venas vi eed aguda bad d Vosa c d G 176 Trace Settings You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces rrr User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 172 Analysis The trace settings are configured in the Traces dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis then switch to the vertical Traces tab e Select the Trace gt Trace menu item For UO Vector evaluation mode only 1 trace is available and the detector is not edita ble Trace Math Spectrogram Quick Config Preset All Traces Specifics for 1 Magnitude 7 Trace 1 Tra
357. ge is calculated according to the fol lowing formula Trace MeasValue 2 Trace The averaged trace is then stored in the trace memory capture count 1 The currently measured trace is displayed and stored in the trace memory No averaging is performed capture count gt 1 For both Single measurement mode and Continuous measurement mode averaging takes place over the selected number of measurements In this case the displayed trace is determined during averaging according to the following formula 1 n l Trace b T Meas Value n i l Fig 10 12 Equation 2 where n is the number of the current measurement n 2 Capture Count No averaging is carried out for the first measurement but the measured value is stored in the trace memory With increasing n the displayed trace is increasingly smoothed since there are more individual measurements for averaging After the selected number of measurements the average trace is saved in the trace memory Until this number of measurements is reached a preliminary average is displayed When the averaging length defined by the Capture Count is attained averaging is continued in continuous measurement mode or for Continue Single Measurement according to the following formula N 1 Trace Meas Value N Trace where N is the capture count How Trace Data is Averaged the Averaging Mode When the trace is averaged over several sweeps Tra
358. ger occurs See Trigger Offset on page 150 Trigger Hysteresis Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise for example The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal must fall below on a rising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger event occurs Configuration Example In the following example the second possible trigger event is ignored as the signal does not exceed the hysteresis threshold before it reaches the trigger level again on the rising edge On the falling edge however two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time Trigger level Fig 10 5 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 150 Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occassional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out time Defining a dropout time helps you stabilize triggering when the analyzer is triggering on undesired events PEN a L T Drop Out Fig 10 6 Effect of the trigger drop out time See Drop Out Time on page 150 Configuration If a trigger is set to a falling edge Slope Falling see Slope on page 151 the measurement is to start when the power level falls below a
359. gher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 203 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 202 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Usage Event CALCulat
360. gle sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 173 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Parameters State ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Manual operation See Hold on page 174 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE Mode This command selects the trace averaging mode Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters Mode viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt pri
361. grams If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the instrument in use is blocked for further commands In this case you must interrupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measure ment To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the instru ment in use on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Pause Cont on page 73 See Pause Cont on page 95 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or
362. gt lt RohdeSchwarz gt lt DataImportExport MandatoryData gt lt ChannelNames gt lt ChannelName gt IQ Analyzer lt ChannelName gt lt ChannelNames gt lt CenterFrequency unit Hz gt 0 lt CenterFrequency gt DataImportExport MandatoryData gt lt DataImportExport OptionalData gt Key name Chl NumberOfPostSamples gt 150 lt Key gt Key name Chl_NumberOfPreSamples gt 150 lt Key gt DataImportExport OptionalData RohdeSchwarz UserData RS IQ TAR FileFormat CSV File Format CSV files contain UO data as comma separated values Additional metadata can be saved e Mandatory Data Elements eere tee td Ld ER ka dS 457 e Optional Data Elements Eed 458 NEE 459 Mandatory Data Elements Parameter Name Possible Values Name String Comment String Reference Supported File Formats Parameter Name Possible Values DateTime Year Month DayTHour Min Sec Format complex DataType float32 NumberOfChannels Integer CH n ChannelName String CH n Samples Integer CH n Clock Hz double CH lt n gt _CenterFrequency Hz Double IQ Data Header Channel Name Channel Name gt _Q IQ data value Double Double IQ data UO pairs A 5 2 2 Optional Data Elements Parameter name Possible Values Ch lt n gt _AttenuElecState ON OFF Ch lt n gt _AttenuElecValue dB Integ
363. guring Instruments 7 1 2 File Input Alternatively to live data input from a connected instrument measurement data to be analyzed by the R amp S VSE software can also be provided offline by a stored data file This allows you to perform a measurement on any instrument store the results to a file and analyze the stored data partially or as a whole at any time using the R amp S VSE software Currently the following file formats are supported by the R amp S VSE software to provide signal input e ig tar compressed data format e csv files e mat matlab files e iqw For more information see also chapter 8 3 4 Recalling Measurement Data from Files on page 91 7 2 Configuring Instruments The R amp S VSE can capture and analyze data from various instruments These instru ments must be configured before measurements can be performed on them via the R amp S VSE Instruments are configured in the R amp S VSE s Instruments tool window Window gt Instruments e Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols sse 53 e Defining the Connection Information Manually sees 56 e Determining the Address with Software Support 58 e Searching for Connected Instruments Automatically sssss 61 e Deleting all Instrument Confiourations cece eeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeseencaeeeeeeeaas 62 e Initializing a Self Alignment on the instrument in use 63 e Configuring the Behavior During Remote Control 63 e Configu
364. he IQ Analyzer Magnitude result display R amp S VSE Trying Out the R amp S VSE Ref Level 0 00 dBm Meas Time 1 ms SRate 6 25 MHz 10 dB Freq 10GHz Rec Length 6250 1001 pts 100 0 us 4 1 3 Adding Additional Result Displays For the UO Analyzer up to 6 windows can be displayed for a single channel We will add Spectrum and Statistics result displays 1 Select the 6 Add Window icon from the toolbar 2 Select the Spectrum result display A new window 2 for the Spectrum result display is opened User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 19 R amp S VSE Trying Out the R amp S VSE Ref Level 0 00 d8m Meas Time 9 5 a Att 10dB Freq 10 tec Length 120 RBW 400 kHz IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude e1aP Cw St ff 1001 pts Span 12519561815 MHz 3 Select hee Add Window icon again and select the Statistics result display A new window 3 for the Statistics result display is opened Ref Level 0 00 d m Meas Time gt Att 10dB Freq Rec Length RBW 400 kHz IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum e 1AP Cirw f 10 Analyzer 3 Statistic 1AP Cirw 2AP Crw GR User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 20 R amp S VSE Trying Out the R amp S VSE 4 1 4 Rearranging Windows The R amp S VSE window has now become rather crowded Let us move the Statistics window 3 behind the Spectrum window 2 so both become tabs in the same area gt Select the window title bar of the Statistics window 3 and drag it over the Sp
365. he R amp S VSE is rebooted You must then use the Install Option function to enter the new license key Remote commands DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo on page 411 lcs e MM 108 Iristall Opto By XVII eco cometen do mee ee Eugen eee mater cxx ramen eaput exo bebes xx ERE xeu ety 109 Install Option Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options 9 4 2 Software Information and Support Install Option by XML Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R amp S VSE using an XML file Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option key and press Select Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options R amp S Support Information In case of errors you can store useful information for troubleshooting and send it to your Rohde amp Schwarz support center Support functions are available from the Help Support menu in the R amp S Support tab Create R amp S Support Information Location G ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 05_05 user In case of problems please write an email with the error description attach the Support Information file and send the email to the Rohde amp Schwarz Support Center Save Device Footprint Location C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 05_05 devicedata XML
366. he Color Map If the measured values only cover a small area in the spectrogram you can optimize the displayed value range so it becomes easier to distinguish between values that are close together and only parts of interest are displayed at all The Shape and Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever if a certain area of the value range is to be visualized in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By default the color curve is linear If you shift the curve to the left or right the distribution becomes non linear The slope of the color curve increases or decreases One end of the color palette then covers a large amount of results while the other end distributes several colors over a relatively small result range You can use this feature to put the focus on a particular region in the diagram and to be able to detect small variations of the signal R amp S9VSE UO Analyzer Measurements 10 4 1 2 Example Fig 10 14 Linear color curve shape 0 colors are distributed evenly over the complete result range In the color map based on the linear color curve the ran
367. he Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level The scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S VSE so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S VSE must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset For details see Reference level offset on page 133 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 312 Unit Reference Level The instrument in use measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 129 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible e dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Configuration e Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 309 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 311 Setting the Refer
368. he measurement channel is closed The R amp S VSE software is closed The data acquisition settings are changed In this case the stored data no longer matches the current settings and the data becomes invalid It can no longer be exported Note that if a recording is aborted before it has completed the temporary file is deleted and the captured data is not available for evaluation or display To start recording measurement data for a channel gt To record measurement results select the Record function for the channel in the Measurement Group Setup tool window see also Record on page 73 Alternatively select the Record icon in the toolbar to record the results for the currently active measurement channel The captured UO data is recorded until the defined number of records have been captured or recording is stopped manually The first recorded record is displayed immediately in the channel s result displays After recording has finished the I Q data can be exported to a file permanently see chapter 8 3 3 Exporting Recorded UO Data on page 87 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation To stop data recording gt To stop recording measurement results select the fi Pause function for the chan nel in the Measurement Group Setup tool window Note that if a recording is aborted before it has completed the temporary file is deleted and the captured data is not available for evaluation or displa
369. he options is activated the reference signal is output to the corresponding connector For more information see the instrument s User Manual Remote command DEVice EXTRef 0100 on page 269 DEVice EXTRef 0640 on page 270 DEVice EXTRef OSYNc on page 270 Resetting the Default Values The values for the Tuning Range Frequency and Loop Bandwidth are stored for each source of Reference Frequency Input Thus when you switch the input source the previously defined settings are restored You can restore the default values for all input sources using the Preset Channel function Configuring Instruments 7 2 9 Obtaining Information on Versions and Options on the instrument in use Information on the firmware version and options installed on the instrument in use is provided via the Instruments tool window Window gt Instruments In the configura tion area for the instrument select Infos amp Settings then select the Info tab Into sewing wet MEINEN X General Reference Device Options Identification String Rohde amp Schwarz FSW 8 1312 8000K08 101366 2 10 Option Name B3 AM FM Audio Demodulator B8 Resolution Bandwidth 10 MHz B13 Highpass Filter for Harmonic Measurements B24 RF Preamplifier B25 Electronic Attenuator B28 28 MHz Analysis Bandwidth R4n 40 MH7 Analvsis Randwidth Identification Gring 66 ein M PUE EE 66 Identifica
370. hical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands program code File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks 2 Welcome to the R amp S VSE The R amp S VSE is a new high performance Rohde amp Schwarz analysis software for vari ous analysis tasks and input from various instruments The R amp S VSE features analysis of e the same data in various applications simultaneously e Q data files e multiple inputs from a single instrument e a combination of input from different instruments including R amp S FSW R amp S FPS R amp S9FSV R amp S FSQ R amp S FSL This user manual contains a description of the basic functionality that the software pro vides including remote control operation The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product VSE html 3 3 1 3 2 Installing Required Components Software Installation Installing Required Components The following software components must be installed t
371. i cto cancer rechten Deco Meter tende dee ki enu ia a da dese ARAE 49 Search for topic 50 USING etes Hidden foldet Samica mere senem eant AR 80 Hiding restoring Display ems tte eterne ox meet ee toes 101 High pass filter co vende RF input PAIS p M Error ecu 55 Resource le e m 54 History SpeCIIOgralis ceste retis Deere Ek DE DH Eege 178 History Depth ile eU 178 Hold ele e TE 174 Host name te Tu 60 Hysteresis Lower Auto level sirrettiin 161 Trigger i Upper Auto level 2 retirees 161 VOLOJN BE 250 UO Analyzer leie ee einen MET Data acquisition ids Displayed information sse Inm UO Vector evaluation m Magnitude evaluation maasian Programming example coercere Real Imag UO evaluation ei Results meme 2251141 Spectrum evaluation UO data jer Essential information 22 eerte iret ttis Exportinig WEE Exporting Importing File format description File name Importing Loading ene Maximum bandwidth rre 118 Measurement mode nete eret ente 95 Overlap settings e 96 Pause 2 95 Playback settings 95 Player isccasceeetitecces 2293 Playing 94 RRECAMINGi EE 84 Recalling see also Loading sse 91 Recording Sample rate ii eerte tre hien 11
372. ifies the configuration of fire walls e Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking mechanisms Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks Configuring Instruments d Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the fire and forget method with immediate return as opposed to VXI 11 where each operation is blocked until a VXI 11 device handshake returns Thus a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command but is delivered to the TCP IP buffers For more information see also the application note at http www rohde schwarz com appnote 1MA208 Defining the Connection Information Manually If you already know the network connection information of the instrument to be control led by the R amp S VSE software you can enter it directly in the Instruments tool window File gt Instruments gt Setup ees Measurement Group Setup 9 New Instrument j 9 Search FSW 26 x Interface Wpe Vxi 11 Si IP Address NN Resource String TPIP 10 ERR INSTR Advanced Calibration State calibrated Self Alignment j Connection State connected Infos amp Settings L Disconnect New Jee cce tetro extet e caede a cyan Seduta xe EAR 56 SOS EE 57 Tel E lo E sennen crei hte Ero en reet y cred er eie e ago a ea en er ee 57 Ite ace TV ct M MS 57
373. ignal characteristic Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time traces the UO Analyzer also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A special fea ture of the R amp S VSE software is that it provides spectrograms for applications based on UO data such as the UO Analyzer and the Analog Demodulation application A spectrogram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis shows the time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies R amp S VSE I Q Analyzer Measurements BEE Example IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum CF 64 0 MHz 129 pts 250 0 kHz Span 2 5 MHz Spectrogram 1Pk Clrw c N CF 64 0 MHZ 129 pts Frame 0 In this example you see the spectrogram for the calibration signal of an R amp S FSW compared to the standard spectrum display Since the signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent Spectrogram based on specific trace D The R amp S VSE software allows you to define which trace of a particular result display the Spectrogram is calculated from if multiple traces are available For example if a Spectrum is displayed with a Ma
374. ime domain measurements pre trigger offset For complex tasks advanced trigger settings are available e Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise e Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a jittering sig nal Tigger SOURCES iii 144 e Rue te EN 144 Tr gerbvegetreeg Cm 144 e Tigger Diop Out TITIO EE 145 Nuet le E 146 Configuration Trigger Source The trigger source defines which source must fulfill the condition that triggers the mea surement Basically this can be e Time the measurement is repeated in a regular interval Power an input signal is checked for a defined power level The trigger signal can be any of the following The input signal at one of various stages in the signal analysis process before or after the input mixer after the video filter etc A signal from an external device via one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instrument A signal from one of the input channels from a connected oscilloscope For details on the available trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 148 Trigger Offset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset Pre trigger offsets are possible because the R amp S VSE captures data continuously in the time domain even before the trig
375. in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR INIT OPC Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep INIT OPC CLS However since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes CLS forc ing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS oPC is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another OPC command Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 12 1 Synchronization using OPC OPC and WAI Com Action Programming the controller mand OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR e Setting bit 0 in the ESE after all previous commands have been exe Setting bit 5 in the SRE cuted e Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is Sending OPC directly after the command returned This is only the case after the Oper whose processing should be terminated ation Complete bit has been set in the ESR before other commands can be executed This bit indicates that the previous setting has been completed WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the comman
376. indow for example by clicking the mouse in it any window specific operations you perform subsequently are applied to that window For example you can set a marker or zoom in into the display of the window Furthermore when you select a window you also select the channel the selected window belongs to The channel bar see chapter 6 1 4 1 Channel bar on page 38 for the selected channel is activated and any channel specific operations are applied to the selected channel Closing vs deactivating windows If a large number of channels or result displays are active the display may become very crowded and confusing Thus if you do not require the online visualization of the results you can temporarily deactivate windows in the display Deactivating a window simply hides the display without losing its settings or contents A deactivated window can easily be restored to the display without having to reconfigure it Closing a window permanently deletes the result display and its contents A new win dow with the same evaluation method and default settings can be added again but the previous settings and contents are lost 6 3 2 Displaying New Windows For the UO Analyzer up to 6 windows can be displayed for a single channel To add a new window 1 Select the global information window or any other measurement window of the measurement channel you want to add a window for 2 5 Select the Add Window icon or From the Window menu
377. inear distribution e A positive value 70 to 1 focusses the higher values How to Copy Traces You can copy the trace settings from one trace to another in the Copy Trace tab of the Traces dialog box P Select the Source trace and then the button for the Copy to trace Remote command TRACe n COPY on page 342 Marker Usage The following marker settings and functions are available in the UO Analyzer applica tion Marker settings are window specific R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements o For UO Vector displays markers are not available In the UO Analyzer application the resolution with which the frequency can be mea sured with a marker depends on the filter bandwidth which is derived from the defined sample rate as well as the number of measurement points and the used detector see chapter 10 2 3 1 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 119 e Basics on Markers and Marker Functions eese enne 186 e Marker Settings edet eiit Vaid c c c d aa d aa 191 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning Funchons cc cceceeeeeteeeeeeeetteeeeeteee 196 e Band Power Marke 204 e Deactivating All Marker FUnGtlOfe i iiio na ccr vide 205 10 4 2 1 Basics on Markers and Marker Functions Some background knowledge on marker settings and functions is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Markers are used to mark points on traces to rea
378. ined set of measurement or channel settings are stored or recalled quickly in just one step e Configurable Save Recall a user defined set of measurement or channel settings are stored to a definable storage location Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings 8 2 1 8 2 1 1 Restrictions when recalling measurement settings When recalling a saved configuration file the following restrictions apply The frequency range defined in the configuration file must be supported by the instrument in use for the channel to which the file is to be recalled Configuration files created using an instrument with certain options in use will not work using an instrument without these options Files created with newer software versions may not work with a previous version e Depending on the general software setting instrument configurations are restored but the connections may have to be established manually see Reconnect saved connections after recall on page 101 e Quick Save Quick Recall tette thee dade EE ak xe Ea ca 77 e Configurable Storage and Recall 79 Quick Save Quick Recall The Quick Save and Quick Recall functions allow you to store channel settings very easily and quickly in one step Up to 10 different sets of settings can be stored to or recalled from save sets Each save set is identified by its storage date and contents all channels or specific channel in the display The save sets are stored in the C Prog
379. ingle File or Instrument A single instrument can perform only one measurement at a time however a sequence of measurements can be performed in just one step 1 In the Instruments tool window configure the instrument on which the measure ments are to be performed see also chapter 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Mea surement with Instrument Input on page 211 2 In the Measurement Group Setup tool window select the New Group button to add a measurement group that is a measurement channel for the same instru ment or file 3 Select the input type for the new measurement channel and assign the same con figured instrument or import the same file as for the other groups see chap ter 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input on page 211 or chapter 11 2 How to Import UO Data for Analysis on page 213 4 Optionally you can add further measurement channels on different instruments files to a group see chapter 11 3 How to Perform Measurements on Multiple Files and Instruments on page 214 5 Repeat these steps to add further groups 6 Toggle the CONT l SGL button at the bottom of the Measurement Group Setup tool window to toggle between single and continuous measurements for the entire measurement sequence For single capture mode each group is processed a single time in the defined sequence whereas in continuous capture mode the groups are performed in the defined sequence conti
380. ining Technical Support If problems occur the software generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy Error messages are described in chapter 14 Troubleshooting on page 439 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R amp S VSE We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below Error Log The log file C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version_number gt log RSError log contains a chronological record of errors Support file a zip file with important support information can be created auto matically The zip file contains the system configuration information the current software data and a screenshot of the screen display See also chapter 9 4 2 R amp S Support Information on page 109 To collect the support information gt Select Help gt Support and then Create R amp S Support Information This data is stored to the following directory on the PC the R amp S VSE software is installed on C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version no gt user Attach the files to an e mail in which you describe the problem and send it to the cus tomer support address for your region as listed in the Internet http www rohde schwarz com en service support customer_support_107711 html Menu Refere
381. ion Setting parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group you want to create Example INST BLOC CRE AdemodGroup Group 1 Adds an additional group named AdemodGroup2 after the existing group named Group 1 Usage Setting only Manual operation See New Group on page 69 INSTrument BLOCk DELete lt GroupName gt This command deletes a measurement group At least one group with one measure ment channel must remain in the sequence Tip To delete an individual measurement channel use 1NSTrument DELete on page 287 To remove a group from the measurement sequence without deleting it permanently deactivate it using INSTrument BLOCk USE on page 293 Parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group you want to delete The last existing group in a sequence cannot be deleted Example INST BLOC DEL Group 1 Usage Event Manual operation See Close on page 70 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data INSTrument BLOCk LIST This command queries all active measurement channels in the currently selected group This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement chan nels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels For a list of available channel types and names see INSTrument LIST on page 287 Return values lt ChannelName gt Comma separated list of strings containing the name of an active channel in the group
382. ion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 362 Auto Max Min Peak Search If activated a maximum or minimum peak search is performed automatically for marker 1 after each measurement Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO on page 366 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum AUTO on page 367 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Analysis Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 363 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 363 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 364 Search Threshold Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt THReshold on page 365 Using Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom
383. ion Files Size E Sample Rate 320 MHz E Program Files E Program Files x86 Acquisition Bandwidth 25 6 MHz amp Rs RamonData VQ Channel IQ Analyzer E temp 3 TSME VQ Format Complex d E Users VSE Meta Information C3 windows Saved by VSE_ D File csv 18 Comment O iqw datafile iqw 26 kB R Date and Time Mon Apr 20 12 20 08 2015 File Name MyFSW IQRecording ia tar E EDU T Duration of Signal 31 281 us Scaling Factor 10V EE Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Eiles sess 92 Me MM 92 Essential Iota Ol tere ree reed rt Pete trei EE E ecd atte 93 LSe RIE A a leie 93 L Acquisition Bandwidlhi scenari tne rota ta rapta nik eb 93 Ei c3 EE 93 Meter ege EE 93 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the I Q data file on the PC or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 384 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page
384. ion Usually you will configure most of these settings initially when you set up the software according to your personal preferences or requirements and then only adapt individual settings to special circumstances when necessary Some special functions are provided for service and basic system configuration Recording Network and Remote Settings Recording settings are described in chapter 8 Data Management on page 75 Settings for network and remote operation are described in chapter 12 2 Network and Remote Control Settings on page 249 e General Software Bebavior A 100 LES UCET IUDOMP Em 101 e How to Configure the Colors for Display and Primtimg 106 e Software Information and Gupport net 107 General Software Behavior You can determine the behavior of the software when it is being shut down and restar ted These settings are availabe via the File Preferences General menu item EEN Q Displayed Items Theme Color Network Remote Recording General Settings Create Shutdown File The shutdown file is located at C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 05_18 results Reconnect saved connections after recall Greate Shutdown FilB x m einen reti bn ter hd ERR een pasa Yee Ex Y E e ed ERAT RUE 100 Reconnect saved connections after recall 101 Deleting thie Shutdowt ME 101 Defining a Startup Settings File 2 Ii eie 101 Create Shutdown File If activated a shutdown file is created when
385. ir function and syntax are precisely defined in stand ard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if implemen ted They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee These commands are marked as SCPI confirmed in the command reference chapters Commands without this SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules as per mitted by the standard Instrument responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 222 Remote Control Basics 12 1 3 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more param eters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics keywords Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax
386. is command defines or queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends on the sample rate Parameters Bandwidth For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 10 2 2 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth on page 118 Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 153 TRACe IQ RLENgth lt NoOfSamples gt This command sets the record length for the acquired UO data Increasing the record length also increases the measurement time Note Alternatively you can define the measurement time using the SENS SWE TIME command Parameters lt NoOfSamples gt Number of samples to record See chapter 10 2 2 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth on page 118 RST 1001 Example TRAC IQ RLEN 256 Manual operation See Record Length on page 154 TRACe IQ SET NORM 0 lt SampleRate gt lt TriggerMode gt lt TriggerSlope gt lt PretriggerSamp gt lt NumberSamples gt This command sets up the R amp S VSE for I Q measurements If you do not use this command to set up UO measurements the R amp S VSE will use its current settings for UO measurements If the I Q Analyzer has not been turned on previously the command also switches to the UO Analyzer Note If you use the default settings with TRACe 10 DATA the following minimum buffer sizes for the response data are recommended
387. is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 137 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S VSE determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 137 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 313 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 137 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If
388. ister The STATus QUEStionable register contains information on instrument states that do not meet the specifications QD The STAT QUES SYNC register is used by the applications and is thus described in the individual applications User Manuals You can read out the register with STAT QUES COND or STAT QUES EVEN The STATus QUESt ionable register sums up the information from all subregisters e g bit 2 sums up the information for all STATus QUEStionable TIMe registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register The STATus QUEStionable EXTended register contains further status information not covered by the other status registers of the instrument in use A separate EXTended register exists for each active channel Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition or STATus QUEStionable EXTended EVENt Table 12 4 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable EXTended register
389. its default settings However if you enter the path with the file name you can access the files stored there Alternatively enable the Files and Folders Hidden files and folders Show hidden files folders and drives option in the Windows Explorer Press the ALT key to display the menu bar Select Tools Folder Options View tab For more information refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation 8 2 2 3 Save and Recall Dialog Boxes The following dialog boxes are available via the File Save or File Open menu items or via the E Save or amp Open icons in the toolbar after switching to the Save tab Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related pe ACA RV YM AY Range P ide e mea pm SH Quick Save Drive amp wos Path user C programdata Rohde Schwarz VSE 0 80a_69 user uU Files Size el C3 gen predefined Waveforms File Name MySettings Comment File Type Items V Current Settings All Channels D Air Traces Current Channel IQ Analyzer Save Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Eiles sss 80 Fila EI EE 81 CO RR TET T LP 81 SIE P 81 Tt AERE EDO DES 81 e redirect iE a ove e eee verto cubes ev aee de ede et Pee e a EE E Pere n 82 Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel 82 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Selec
390. keys or the mouse wheel to change the FFT length the value is incremented or decremented by powers of 2 If you enter the value manually any integer value from 3 to 524288 is available Remote command SENSe IQ FFT LENGCth on page 330 Window Function Advanced FFT mode Basic settings In the UO analyzer you can select one of several FFT window types The following window types are available e Blackman Harris Flattop Gauss Rectangular 5 Term Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow TYPE on page 331 Window Overlap Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the part of a single FFT window that is re calculated by the next FFT calcula tion when using multiple FFT windows Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVER1ap on page 330 Window Length Advanced FFT mode Basic settings Defines the number of samples to be included in a single FFT window in averaging mode In single mode the window length corresponds to the Record Length on page 154 In manual or advanced FFT mode values from 3 to 524288 are available In Auto mode averaging is not used Configuration However the window length may not be longer than the FFT Length Remote command SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth on page 330 10 3 6 2 Capture Settings The capture and spectrogram settings are configured in the Capture tab of the Band width dialog box Spectrogram settings are only available if a spectrogram is
391. l see INSTrument LIST on page 287 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only Manual operation See Replace Current Channel on page 72 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel The last measurement channel cannot be deleted at least one channel must always be defined Tip To remove a measurement channel without deleting it permanently deactivate it using INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings USE on page 291 Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ
392. l RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 149 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event for offline input from a file Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR MAGN Sets an offline magnitude trigger source TRIG MAP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for the offline magnitude trigger source used for input from a file Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR MAP Sets the offline magnitude trigger source TRIG MAP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type Parameters Type POSitive NEGative
393. lar display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAY out WINDow lt n gt REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix lt n gt from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command To remove a window in a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be
394. lates the linear average of all samples contained in a measurement point To this effect R amp S VSE uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of samples linear average value For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the average value For linear display the average value is dis played Each measurement point thus corresponds to the average of the mea sured values summed up in the measurement point The average detector supplies the average value of the signal irrespective of the waveform CW carrier modulated carrier white noise or impulsive signal Sample Sa Selects the last measured value of the levels measured at the individual fre quencies which are displayed in one sample point all other measured values for the frequency range are ignored The result obtained from the selected detector for a measurement point is displayed as the value at this frequency point in the trace Video Signal Measurement point n Meas point n 1 AVG 7 RMS MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK The trace detector for the individual traces can be selected manually by the user or set automatically by the R amp S VSE Analysis The detectors of the R amp S VSE are implemented as pure digital devices All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is inde pendent of the detector
395. le rather than Instrument However the instrument settings are main tained so that you can switch back to the instrument as an input source quickly D When measurement results are recorded the recorded data is immediately used as In order to recall measurement results the UO data file and essential measurement information must first be selected Then the results of the entire measurement or only a specific extract of it can be restored e Loading the I Q Data File and Essential Measurement Information 91 e Restoring the Measurement Results R amp S VSE Plover 93 8 3 4 1 Loading the I Q Data File and Essential Measurement Information UO files are recalled using the Load UO File dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Select the if Recall UO Recording icon from the main toolbar e Select the File gt Recall IQ Recording menu item e Select the Input amp Output gt Input Source menu item and switch to the I Q File tab Select the Select file button e Select the Input source File for a measurement channel then select the button to select the I Q data file to be loaded e Inthe R amp S VSE Player Window gt Player select the button to select the UO data file to be loaded Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation Drive amp C OS gt Path amp C C Essential Informat
396. le Zem ee tiit pit cioe dei ceci rende 207 Restore Original Display trt err Ron en eth eo RP rn xx Ronan Rx agar na 207 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 207 Single Zoom ES A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 373 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 372 Multiple Zoom In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 374 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 373 Restore Original Display Q 1 1 Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 373 single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 374 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode R amp S9VSE UO Analyzer Measurements peau p
397. le comprises many of the tasks described above to provide a com plete measurement example in one script For this measurement two instruments R amp S FSW are configured for input The mea surement consists of four measurement channels 1 1Q Analyzer UO Analyzer for instrument input from MyFSW 2 AnalogDemodF SW AnalogDemod for instrument input from MyFSW 3 Your IQ Analyzer UO Analyzer for instrument input from YourFSW 4 AnalogDemodFile AnalogDemod for file input The individual measurements are configured then performed and the captured data is recorded Finally the recorded data and the measurement results are stored to a file S EEE K K k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k KRRKKKKKKK Prepare software KKEKKKKKKKK J BRR RK KKK RR KK KK A k k KKK KK Ka ELE RST S EEE K K k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k k k k k k kk k k k k k Configure instrument connections t Programming Examples Configure connection to MyFSW at 123 456 789 100 using VSI11 protocol DEV CRE MyFSW 123 456 789 100 VXI11 Query the network address of MyFSW DEV TARG MyFSW Result 123 456 789 100 Query connection state to MyFSW DEV STAT MyFSW Result 1 connection established Query information on MyFSW Installed hardware DEV INFO HWIN MyFSW Instrument ID DEV INFO IDN MyFSW Installed options
398. lities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used Example DefinitionSENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value The two following commands with identical meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value numeric value The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ 10 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 30 40 12 1 3 3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank
399. ll Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 393 8 2 2 4 Startup Recall Settings By default the settings from the shutdown file see Create Shutdown File on page 100 or the default settings are restored when the R amp S VSE software is star ted However you can select a different settings file to be restored The file is selected in the Startup Recall tab of the Recall dialog box Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings fsenp T e Recall q y e geen EE wis CENE Lu m oom mm mm wo 5 Quick Recall Recall sanp nean on Select File Drive amp C OS 7 Path QuickSave C programdata Rohde Schwarz VSE 0 90a 32 user QuickSave Si Files Size File Name QuickSavel dfl Comment QuickSave All Channels Select File Startup Recall ep ES 83 Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Eiles nnne 83 iic ees 84 COMMEN 84 Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function If activated the settings stored in the selected file are loaded each time the software is started or preset If deactivated the default settings are loaded Note that only A Channels settings files can be selected for the startup recall function not single channel settings files Remote command MMEMory LOAD AUTO on page 393 Selecting the Storage Location D
400. ll running the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed In this case the self test cannot be aborted Usage Query only WAI Wait to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also command synchronization and OPC Usage Event 13 4 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data e Configuring e GETT rettet o eode d e iin 261 e Loading Input Elles ttti ne e edv eee uz 272 e Configuring Channel Input Sources 280 e Configuring Measurement Channel 281 e Controlling Measurement GEOUDS coe et e ee enter tarn 289 e Controlling Measurement SEQUENCES sse 294 13 4 1 Configuring Instruments The R amp S VSE can capture and analyze data from various instruments These instru ments must be configured before measurements can be performed on them via the R amp S VSE How to configure instruments in manual mode is described in chapter 7 2 Configuring Instruments on page 53 13 4 1 1 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data e Configuring the Basic Connection Data 262 e Obtaining Information on Connected Insiruments 265 e General Instrument Geiup entente nennt nnns 267 e Configuring an External Reference on the Instrument 268 Configuring the Basic Connection Data DEVGE CREE Nm 262 DEVICA EE 262 DEVic DELete M a a AA a E EE ERAR AEA 263 DEVICE Ee 263 DEVICES TAT CS
401. lly Tabs are created when you dock a window on top of an existing window of the same type The docking posi tion is indicated by showing the existing window with a tab instead of providing an empty gray space for a new window Table 6 6 Docking windows as tabs IQ Analyzer 4 K Vector IQ Anasyro 1 Magnitude Analyzer Possible docking position tab in existing window Result new tab in existing window IESSE User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 45 R amp S VSE Operating Basics Window size Each window type requires a minimum amount of display space The maximum size is restricted only by the available display space within the R amp S VSE window for docked windows or on the entire screen for undocked windows Note that since result displays are placed within a grid structure see Docking areas for interface elements on page 44 the minimum width of a window may also be restricted by other result displays in the same column and the minimum height may be restricted by other result displays in the same row Active windows selected window When a measurement is performed in a channel results are determined for all config ured result displays Thus in order to analyze result data and possibly store it to a file you must activate windows for the corresponding result displays A list of all active win dows for all configured measurement channels is available from the Window menu As soon as you select a w
402. lly recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format For details on data formats see chapter A 3 Formats for Returned Values ASCII For mat and Binary Format on page 451 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace SPECtrogram SGRam Returns the results of the spectrogram result display For det
403. ly starting at the beginning Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 284 Pause Cont Pause stops replaying data Cont continues replaying data including any averaging procedures at the current position In Single measurement mode the next record in the I Q data file is replayed To restart averaging use the Capture function after stopping the last measure ment Remote command ABORt on page 282 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 283 Measurement mode Single Continuous Defines how data is replayed during the measurement Single A single record is replayed To replay subsequent records continue the measurement using the I Pause Continue function Continu The data from the UO file is replayed continuously until stopped ous Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 284 File Specifies the UO data file to be used for input Select a file from the list of recently loaded files or select to open the Load UO File dialog box see chapter 8 3 4 1 Loading the UO Data File and Essential Mea surement Information on page 91 Remote command INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQTar on page 279 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CSV on page 273 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt IQW on page 274 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt MAT on page 275 Play
404. lysis Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 363 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 363 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 364 Search Threshold Search Limits Defines an absolute threshold as an additional condition for the peak search Only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected Remote command CALCulate lt n gt THReshold on page 365 Using Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom see Single Zoom on page 207 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 364 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Deactivates the search range limits Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe on page 363 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe on page 365 Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value These functions are available via the Marker toolbar PEAK SEARCH 3 g ngege ar ee ped od F ge a amva vt r t dd AS 202 Search Next EEN 203 Sese NET DEE 203 Search Next Olai EE 203 Center Frequ
405. m a Connected Instrument Notice how the IQ Analyzer 2 channel is now active while the IQ Analyzer channel is deactivated This is due to the fact that both channels are based on the same instrument but each instrument can only perform one measurement at a time Thus the channel that was assigned to the instrument previously IQ Ana lyzer is deactivated when the instrument is assigned to a new channel IQ Ana lyzer 2 4 Select the Capture mode icon to toggle between single and continuous C measurements for each measurement channel 5 Select the Capture icon for a measurement channel to perform a measurement on that channel Only one channel can be started manually at a time Before you can start another channel you must stop the previous measurement by selecting the Stop icon for that channel first 4 1 7 Recording Measurement Data Now we will record the measured UO Analyzer data so that we can play it back again later We want to store all available results regardless of how many measurements we perform 1 From the File menu select Preferences gt Recording 2 Select the Always Maximum Record Length option 3 Close the Preferences dialog box 4 Select the amp Record function for the IQ Analyzer channel in the Measurement Group Setup tool window The captured UO data is recorded 5 To stop recording measurement results select the Pause function for the IQ Analyzer chann
406. mand requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the instrument in use RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 138 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlay WINDow sns ETRAGCe st Y SCALe icio iniac cioe nae entiende uaa oh 315 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACects lt SCALelAUlTOONCE 315 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese 315 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectz lt SCALelbRbOigon eee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 316 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing essere nnn 316 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPACing Parameters Range Range 1dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 139 See Y Axis Max on page 140 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces t is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay
407. maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which is indicated by the RF OVLD status display Furthermore higher input levels may damage the instrument Therefore the required RF attenuation is determined automatically according to the reference level by default High attenuation levels also avoid intermodulation On the other hand attenuation must be compensated for by re amplifying the signal levels after the mixer Thus high attenuation values cause the inherent noise i e the noise floor to rise and the sensitiv ity of the analyzer decreases o For ideal sinusoidal signals the displayed signal level is independent of the RF attenu ation Depending on the type of measurement evaluation that is required a compromise must be found between a low noise floor and high intermodulation levels and protect ing the instrument from high input levels This is best done by letting the instrument in use determine the optimum level automatically see Attenuation Mode Value on page 137 10 3 3 2 Configuration Scaling In a linear display the measurement values are distributed linearly throughout the grid That means the entire range of measured values is divided by the number of rows in the grid 10 and each row corresponds to 1 10 of the total range Linear scaling is use ful to determine precise levels for a small range of values However if large and small val
408. mbining Results Trace Detector Multiple overlapping windows are combined to create the final spectrum using the selected trace detector If necessary the trace detector is also used to reduce the number of calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length to the defined num ber of measurement points By default the Autopeak trace detector is used User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 122 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing points using a detector other than Auto Peak may lead to wrong level results if the measurement points are fewer than the number of calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length o Due to the fact that the frequency points are reduced to the number of measurement max 524288 samples record length use trace detector to combine these FFTs averaging gt freq points FFT length use trace detector to reduce to measurement points Dependencies Between FFT Parameters in Averaging Mode Advanced FFT analysis in the R amp S VSE is highly configurable Several parameters including the record length FFT length and Window length can be defined according to the user s requirements Note however that these parameters are correlated and can not be configured independently of the others Record Length Defines the number of UO samples to capture from the instrument in use By default the number of measurement points is used The record length is calculated as the measurement time
409. me of the file to delete The path may be relative or absolute Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MD IRectory Directory This command creates a new directory Parameters lt Directory gt String containing the path and new directory name The path may be relative or absolute Usage Event MMEMory MOVE lt SourceFile gt lt NewFileName gt This command moves a file to another directory The command also renames the file if you define a new name in the target directory If you do not include a path for lt NewFileName gt the command just renames the file Parameters lt SourceFile gt String containing the path and file name of the source file lt NewFileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM MOVE C TESTO1 CFG SETUP CFG Renames TEST01 CFG in SETUP CFG in directory C Usage Event SCPI confirmed MMEMory MSIS Device This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands Parameters Device ATC pz String containing the device drive name RST IC Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory NAME lt FileName gt This command creates a new and empty file It also sets the file name for screenshots taken with HCOPy IMMediate lt device gt Note that you have to route the printer output to a file Managing Settings and Results Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target
410. measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 336 RST AUTO Manual operation See Automatic Measurement Time Mode and Value on page 161 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 161 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 161 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example Parameters State ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the frequency with the highest signal level in
411. measurement on input from a connected instrument using the R amp S VSE Only the default UO Analyzer application is required Try out the following Configunng an re Din LEE 16 e Assigning the Instrument to a Channel eese 18 e Adding Additional Result Displays eti 19 le Tee e lobo EE 21 e Undocking and Resizing the Help Window eene 22 e Adding Further Measurement Channels eiie 22 e Recording Measurement Dalfa ecce eee a c 24 Configuring an Instrument In the first step we will search for instruments connected to the same network as the PC running the R amp S VSE software and attempt to connect to one of them 1 Select the Instruments tab at the upper left of the R amp S VSE window 2 Select Search to search for all instruments in the network 3 To find instruments using the VXI 11 protocol in the Device Search dialog box select the interface type LAN VXI 11 and select Search If there are very many results try filtering them by the type of instrument for exam ple enter FSW in the Filter field Capturing and Analyzing Data from a Connected Instrument Search stop Em Results Interface Type Model Name VISA Resource String LAN VXI 11 R amp S FSW Spectrum Analyzer TCPIPO 10 i sinstO 1N Filter OK Cancel 4 From the result list select the instrument from which data is to be captured then select
412. measurements Average The average is formed over several measurements The Capture Count determines the number of averaging procedures The Detector is automatically set to Sample This mode is not available for statistics measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 339 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 162 The trace detector is used to combine multiple FFT window results to create the final spectrum Note in previous versions of the R amp S VSE the I Q Analyzer always used the linear average detector If necessary the trace detector is also used to reduce the number of calculated frequency points defined by the FFT length to the defined num ber of measurement points By default the Autopeak trace detector is used Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Defines the selected detector type Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion on page 341 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 341 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific p
413. mentation Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the instrument in use No further trigger parameters are available for the connector Output The instrument in use sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port LEVel on page 326 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 326 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the instrument in use triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the instrument in use is in Ready Armed for trigger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 of the instrument in use if available For details see STATus OPERation Register on page 240 and the instrument s documentation User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 327 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 326 10 3 6 10 3 6 1 Configuration Pulse Length Output Type
414. mentse 221 MGSSAQCS ED 221 SCPI Command Structure eee enemies 223 Command Sequence and Gvnchrontzaton 231 Status Reporting Gvstem eee nennen neret 234 General Programming Recommendations sess 248 Network and Remote Control Settings eene 249 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control eeeeeeeeee esee 250 How to Configure ahetbwork eene eee 250 How to Log ontotheNetwork nennen eene 253 How to Start a Remote Control Session from ab 254 How to Return to Manual Operation on the Instrument 255 Remote meet cT 256 Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions sssss 256 erlupnElDCI eet 257 Common Commands 3 eterne deeg ege eege pee en xa n Dee AKEE KEEK E 257 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data eene 261 Configuring Instr trments 22 1 1I oerte Deren silicate Leagues be su une ERU ru drea Le ERR Rex gres 261 Loading OPA WEE 272 Configuring Channel Input Sources 280 User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 6 13 4 4 13 4 5 13 4 6 13 5 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 5 3 13 6 13 6 1 13 6 2 13 6 3 13 7 13 7 1 13 7 2 13 7 3 13 7 4 13 7 5 13 7 6 13 7 7 13 8 13 8 1 13 8 2 13 8 3 13 8 4 13 9 13 10 13 10 1 13 11 13 12 13 12 1 13 12 2 13 12 3 13 12 4 Configuring Measurement Channels sse emen 281 Controlling Measurement Groups 289 Controlling Measurement Geouences nnns 29
415. meters State Example ON Color printing OFF Black and white printing RST OFF HCOP DEV COL ON Managing Settings and Results Usage SCPI confirmed HCOPy DEVice _LANGuage lt device gt Format This command selects the file format for a print job Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Parameters Format GDI Graphics Device Interface Default format for the output to a printer configured under Win dows Must be selected for the output to the printer interface Can be used for the output to a file The printer driver configured under Windows is used in this case and a printer specific file for mat is thus generated BMP JPG PNG Data format for output to files only Usage SCPI confirmed HCOPy IMMediate device This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Print on page 98 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT This command initiates a print job If you are printing to a file the file name depends on MMEMory NAME This command adds a consecutive number to the file name Suffix device 1 2 Printing device Usage Event Manual operation See Print on page 98 Managing Settings and Results HCOPy ITEM ALL This command includes all screen elements in the printout The screen
416. mmand TRACe IQ SRATe on page 334 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the flat usable bandwidth of the final UO data This value is dependent on the defined Sample Rate and the defined signal source Configuration analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate However the analysis bandwidth used by the R amp S VSE software may be restricted by the bandwidth provided by the instrument in use Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 332 Maximum Bandwidth Depending on the instrument in use the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S VSE for I Q data acquisition can be restricted This setting is only available if a bandwidth extension option is installed on the instrument in use Otherwise the maxi mum bandwidth is determined automatically The available values depend on the instrument and the installed bandwidth extension options For details see the instrument s documentation Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 335 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH on page 336 Meas Time Defines the UO acquisition time By default the measurement time is calculated as the number of UO samples Record Length divided by the sample rate If you change the measurement time the Record Length is automatically changed as well For details on the maximum number of samples see also chapter 10 2 2 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth on page 118 Note that the measure ment time used by the R amp S VSE software may be restricted by th
417. n Query parameters lt Trace gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 How many traces are available depends on the selected result display Example CALC2 SPEC TRAC TRACE3 Configuring the Color Map DISPlay WINDows lt n SGRam COLor DEF aul sisirin iniaiaiai 347 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault essen 347 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzt GbRam CO orLOWer nnne 347 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer c KEREN senes 347 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor SHAPe sisi ee eene nsn nante nana itii inen En 347 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe sss 347 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor UPPer esses nnne nennen 347 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzt btCHooram COL or Uber 347 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer bDISPlayEWINDowesmsSGRam COLor Feta torre terni eco 348 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 348 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor DEFault DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor LOWer lt Percentage gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor LOWer lt Percentage gt This command defines the starting point of the color map Parameters lt Percentage gt Statistical frequency pe
418. n Application 2 Select the required application For more information on working with applications see chapter 7 Controlling Instru ments and Capturing I Q Data on page 52 R amp S VSE Operating Basics 6 Operating Basics This chapter provides an overview on how to work with the R amp S VSE It describes what kind of information is displayed in the diagram area how to operate the R amp S VSE via the graphical user interface and how to use the Online Help The information described here refers to the basic R amp S VSE functionality and is generally available in all supported applications For specifics on the individual applications see the corre sponding user manuals e Graphical User Interface Elements nero edem tae sauseneseennents 35 e Understanding the UO Analyzer Display Information eeeeeeesseesseeerreseesnsseenen 41 Customizing the User IRISITaeB ecrire Freenet ret en een e aue 43 Cuero TT 49 6 1 Graphical User Interface Elements All tasks necessary to operate the instrument in use can be performed using the R amp S VSE graphical user interface In addition to the measurement results the display provides status and setting informa tion allows you to switch between various measurement tasks and provides access to all measurement functions g a D D D D a D D D m 1 1w ue Fig 6 1 Graphical user interface elements User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 35
419. n nnt 407 DISPlay LOGO lt State gt Activates deactivates the printout of the Rohde amp Schwarz company logo in the upper left corner Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example DISP LOGO OFF Manual operation See Print Logo on page 98 HCOPy ABORt This command aborts a running hardcopy output Example HCOP ABOR Usage Event SCPI confirmed HCOPy CMAP lt item gt DEFault lt colors gt This command defines the color scheme for print jobs Suffix item colors Example Usage Manual operation Managing Settings and Results Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 415 1 4 1 Current colors with a white background and a black grid 2 Optimized colors 3 Customized colors 4 Current screen colors setting for hardcopies HCOP CMAP DEF2 Selects the optimized color set for the color settings of a printout or a hardcopy Event See Print colors on page 104 HCOPy CMAP lt item gt HSL Color This command selects the color for various screen elements in print jobs Suffix item Parameters Color Example Manual operation Selects the item for which the color scheme is to be defined For more information see chapter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assign ment on page 415 hue tint sat saturation lum brightness
420. n page 314 INPut EATT AUTO on page 313 INPut EATT on page 313 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 10 3 2 1 Radio Frequency Input on page 128 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed on the instrument in use a preampli fier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Depending on the connected instrument different settings are available See the instrument s documentation for details Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 314 INPut GAIN VALue on page 314 10 3 3 3 Scaling the Y Axis The individual scaling settings that affect the vertical axis are described here The y axis scaling settings are available via the Input amp Output Scale menu item The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 13 6 1 2 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 310 Configuration Range Scaling Logarithmic Range 1 0 dB Linear Percent Ref Position 100 0 Linear with Unit Ref Value 10 0 dBm Specifics for 3 Specrum 7 E T 139 Ref Level PoSIlon ciii ii ete bte cn eir eee tco et rere eii de iet ir eset db eve e 139
421. na Ree BEE 68 Eed Eeer 68 Measurement mode Single Continuous 1 68 oio D ET 68 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences gt Play Play starts a new measurement sequence according to the Measurement mode Single Continuous on page 68 Remote command INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 Stop Stops a running measurement sequence Remote command INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 294 Measurement mode Single Continuous Defines the measurement mode for the entire measurement sequence and all mea C surement groups and channels it contains For details see Measurement mode on page 31 Single Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition All measurement channels in a group are started simulta neously and performed once After all measurements are completed the next group is started After the last group the measurement sequence is finished Continuous Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition All measurement channels in a group are started simulta neously and performed once After a measurements are completed the next group is started After the last group the measurement sequence restarts with the first one and continues until it is stopped explicitely see Play on page 68 Remote command INITiate SEQuencer MODE on page 294 Record Currently not available 7 3 2 Group Functions All m
422. nable TEMPerature EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME EVENt lt ChannelName gt These commands read out the EVENt section of the status register At the same time the commands delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 13 10 1 4 Controlling the ENABle Part For more information on the enable part see chapter 12 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 236 STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 419 13 10 1 5 13 10 1 6 Working with Status Registers STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt
423. nal port cessere 322 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer TRiGgen SEQuence EE 322 TRiGoert SGEOuencell EVel jOPower 323 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel MAPower eese nennen nnn nennen rnnt e nnns 323 TRIGSer ER ER oae erede erae teen rta az tem rt n rete ee 323 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HOLDDoff cioe ier eec pectine se rccte ENEE 324 TRIGger SEQuence MAPower HYSTeresis cessisse ener nennen 324 TRiGoert SEOuenceltzt Oe 324 TRIGGSrESEQuence SOURCE E 324 TRIGger SEQuence TIMERINTSrVal prr oer eter erat E pe aeo RR ice 325 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement A negative offset is possible for time domain measurements Parameters Offset For measurements in the frequency domain the range is 0 s to 30 s For measurements in the time domain the range is the negative measurement time to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 150 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next
424. nal return to manual operation disable the keys of the instru ment using the command DEVice GENeral LLO on page 267 Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 5 To enable the keys of the instrument in use again use DEV GEN LLO OFF Or switch the instrument to local mode GTL Go to Local i e deactivate the REN line of the remote control interface 12 3 4 How to Return to Manual Operation on the Instrument Before you switch the instrument back to manual operation all remote command pro cessing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will switch back to remote con trol immediately gt On the instrument if available select the Local softkey or the PRESET key or send the LOc command to the instrument in use Conventions used in SCPI Command Descriptions 13 Remote Commands e Conventions used in SCPI Command Descrptions nnne 256 e Common Eur 257 EERSTEN 257 e Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data 261 Contiguring the Result Display rrr etes i a ru ec AN 295 e Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer eese 307 e Managing Settings and Results A 382 e Configuring He SOWAS aeree aeter ta noct e te aga eet Eten 410 e Commands for Remote Instrument Operation 416 e Working with Status Registers nees i t e He e ceteri en exse ER 417 e Relevirig Error e ce ttt need ea a v ted e vete ed I eae 421 e Programming
425. nce A Reference A 1 A 1 1 A 1 1 1 Menu Reference Most functions in the R amp S VSE are available from the menus e Common OT UE 442 Q ET 445 Common R amp S VSE Menus The following menus provide basic functions for all applications CN dc EE 442 S lee ai sil ENTER 444 LEM uuu E 445 File Menu The File menu includes all functionality directly related to any file operations printing or setting up general parameters Menu item Correspond Description ing icon in toolbar Save m Saves the current software configuration to a file See chapter 8 2 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings on page 76 Recall ad Recalls a saved software configuration from a file See chapter 8 2 Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings on page 76 Save IQ Recording Saves the recorded UO data from a measurement channel to a file See chapter 8 3 3 Exporting Recorded UO Data on page 87 Recall IQ Recording Loads the recorded UO data from a file See chapter 8 3 4 Recalling Measurement Data from Files on page 91 Measurement Group gt Configures measurement channels and groups See chapter 7 3 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences on page 67 gt New Group Inserts a new group in the measurement sequence See New Group on page 69 gt New Measurement Inserts a new channel in the selected group Channel See Channel New Channel on page 72
426. nctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request 12 2 Network and Remote Control Settings Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller pro gram as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status regis ters Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Network and Remote Control Settings The general network and remote control settings are defined in the Network Remote tab of the Preferences dialog box which is displayed when you select Pref erences gt Network Remote TS General Theme Color WIEN Displayed Items Identification String Rohde amp Schwarz VSE 1310 0002K02 2 NM 1 05 18 Reset to Factory String Remote Display Update On VO Logging On off Open Dialog Network Configuration Jet Ve sur ESTERI 249 Reset to Factory String tette ette bab eR nuu p an Eta E RR ERAN ERO TR La dee 249 Remote Display Update icc tenes wach rer cer ida eure dr to e du ac c d e 250 VO Boso M NR 250 Neie ut LEET 250 Identific
427. ndow select Search search So fuwven o Results Interface Type Model Name VISA Resource String LAN VXI 11 R amp S FSW Spectrum Analyzer TCPIPO 10 M sinstO 1N Filter FSW Connect LXI OK Cancel PIO ANC I EE 61 coo P EES 62 Mioa TY PS m asm eddies 62 PROS UTS 5 i e ere o ete E O EN PIN DER SER jadi SERM T Ure A 62 t mM PEE 62 benedi P RM 62 Search Starts a network search for connected instruments using the specified Interface Type Configuring Instruments Note that this search may take a while Results are only displayed when the search is completed Stop Stops a search for connected instruments Interface Type Specifies the interface protocol used to connect the instrument to the network For details on interfaces see chapter 7 2 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 53 VXI 11 Standard TCP IP based protocol HiSlip High performance protocol Remote command DEVice TARGet TYPE on page 265 Results For each instrument detected in the network the following information is provided e Interface Type e Instrument model name VISA Resource String The full information is displayed when you select the arrow button for a result entry Filter Applies a filter to the instrument search Only instruments whose resource string con tains the specified characters are displayed Connect LXI
428. ne 257 Step size ET 196 Markers remote control sees 353 Storage location Data files c i ete HE doeet an 79 SONGS oue eru 80 83 88 92 Storage settings PIG AY PO e 81 Storing TE de E 76 77 Subwindows Ee tee E 177 Suffixes COMMON LN 257 SUPPOM E Gd 441 ATOMA o REPE 109 Swap UO Remote zn ETE Sweep status Stat s register creer neret e 240 Syntax elements ciel 229 T Tabs Measurement channels AA 27 SWITCHING xoi rore teo rhe re his nean a Pu hei e diia 38 WIEIOWS cec epos eege Eecher ees 45 Temperature Frontend status Dit iciccccccccccccsscccseicessessesccnaccassnsiecacs 244 Status registeru i aie eer eere ter RR asino ieu sadn 244 Theme Displays ados cetestt eiit ei o eaae i On nasties Display remote Threshold LE e E Time frames CONUN WEE Navigating per sweep Selecting Spectrograms Time trigger Repetition interval tot a rn 149 Timeout CONDECION e M He 59 Toolbars AULOS CU I Closing Control Displaying Functions 36 447 Help Hiding Maii aes MEE Moving Overview iai ZOOM EE TPIS VQidatal e ES 335 Traces Awerage ue E 175 Averaging Averaging algorithm eese 165 Aver
429. nel ITEM SGRam State MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam State This command includes or excludes spectrogram data when storing or loading a con figuration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MMEM SEL SGR ON Adds the spectrogram data to the list of data subsets Managing Settings and Results MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive State This command includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF i e no traces is stored Example MMEM SEL TRAC ON Manual operation See Items on page 81 13 7 4 Storing and Loading Measurement Settings See also INSTrument SELect on page 288 to select the channel TEE Va e e E ME 392 MMEMaryiGL Ear STATO ic ecu ccce notare e tn L Ern ke Ha pREe tk ae BR er eR DR gea ea aaia a aiaa AEA 392 MMEMoBy EOADUAB TO EE 393 MMEMOory LOADS TAT EE 393 MMEMan ROAD dE 394 BEE EE tcx ees cer edere ette c eae ed heel cuta tenet cael Lea 395 MMEMory STORSsrms STAT amp INEXT 2 prater ARENS eoe NOE 2 EES 395 MMEMery STORES TYPE EE 396 MMEMory CLEar ALL This command deletes all software configuration files in the current directory You can select the directory with MMEMory CDIRectory Example MMEM CLE ALL Usage Event MMEMory CLEar STATe 1 FileName This command deletes a instrument configuration file Param
430. nfigure a Network In order to operate the R amp S Vector Signal Explorer Base Software remotely the PC running the R amp S VSE software as well as the instrument in use must be connected to a LAN network How to configure the R amp S VSE software is described here For details on configuring the instrument in use see the instrument s documentation Windows Firewall Settings A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access to it through a network Rohde amp Schwarz highly recommends the use of the firewall on your instrument R amp S instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall enabled and preconfigured in such a way that all ports and connections for remote control are enabled For more details on firewall configuration see the R amp S White Paper Malware Protection available at http www rohde schwarz com appnote 1EF73 and the Win dows 7 help system How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control 12 3 1 1 How to Assign the IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instru ment can be obtained in different ways e If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automati cally e fthe network does not support DHCP or if the instrument is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually By default most instrume
431. nformation in the I Q Analyzer application 0 Color coding for windows of same channel 1 7 Edit result display function 2 Invalid data flag 3 Channel name 4 Window number 5 Window type 6 Trace color trace number detector type trade mode 7 Dock undock window function 8 Close window function Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram displays scaling information and depends on the evaluation Magnitude and Spectrum diagrams Center frequency Number of measurement points Range per division x axis Span Spectrum R amp S9VSE Operating Basics UO Vector diagram e Maximum value on y axis 6 3 Customizing the User Interface The layout of the individual windows in the R amp S VSE software is customizable and highly flexible Apart from a few fixed interface elements menu bar status bar the windows can be positioned almost anywhere on the screen WIRKGWS CONGEDI 0s ceed 43 e Displaying New WINdOWS vccissccccdecsssceeveeesteceevecnsdiveviestestietsansheceetveretieavastennecreaseinens 46 e Igarmangig Aere EE 47 e Closing and Deactivating Windows and Bars 48 6 3 1 Windows Concept Docked and undocked windows In the default layout all windows are positioned within the main R amp S VSE window When you change the size of the R amp S VSE window or add new subwindows the sub windows are adapted or rearranged as necessary The sub
432. ng commands are required to configure data input and output 6 RF rie TE 308 e Configuring the Outputs enne enne enne nnne nnns 310 RF Input l maee m 308 INPutFIETerH PASSES TATe EE 308 INPUtFIL Ferm VIG STATE TEAM Edge 309 INPUDIMPedanees E 309 INPUNE D ERR 309 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 128 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the instrument in use in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 129 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns
433. ngle channel without any meta data MAT Matlab file format Manual operation See File Type on page 88 EXPort IQ META DATA lt Datatype gt lt State gt lt Datatype gt lt State gt Defines which meta data is included in the data file if a user defined set is specified see EXPort 1Q META DATA SET on page 398 Note that only the settings used during recording are stored subsequent changes to the settings are ignored To query the values of the stored meta data after loading the file see EXPort 10 META DATA I VALue on page 398 Parameters lt Datatype gt AttenuElecState AttenuElecValue dB AttenuMech dB CalibrationState DeviceHwinfo Deviceld DeviceOptions FilterSettings HighPassFilterState Impedance Ohm InputCoupling InputPath MeasBandwith Hz NumberOfPreSamples NumberOfPostSamples PreampGain dB PreampState RefLevel dBm RefLevelOffset dB RefOscillatorInput RefOscillatorFreq Hz TrgDropOut s TrgHoldoff s TrgHysteresis dB TrgLevel dBm TrgOffset s TrgSlope TrgSource YigPreSelectorState Individual meta data type Managing Settings and Results State ON OFF 1 0 All parameters that are ON are included in file RST OFF Example EXP IQ META DATA MIN Includes minimum set of meta data Example EXP IQ META DATA MIN EXP IQ META DATA InputPath ON EXP 1IQ META DATA AttenuMech dB ON EXP 1
434. ngs FILE lt i gt CSV INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i CURRent SAMPlIe esee INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i CURRent TIME essen INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQW essent nnns INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i MAT sess INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i OVERIap AVG OFF essen INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SET Tings FILE lt i gt OVERIlap AVG ON INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i STARtSAMPle eese INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i STARtTIME eese INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i STOP SAMPle esses INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i IQTar seen INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SET Tings FILE lt i gt STOP TIME INSTrument BLOCK GHANNel SET Tings REGOrd 2 rto rrr rrr ren nre erre INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SET Tings SOURce IN Girument BL OCkCHANnelt GE TTmgoslSGOUlbRce TE INSTr ment BEOGKk CHANnel SET Tings RE INSTr mentBLOCK CREate NEW ttr tert tn ner ep eee tpe nnn INSTrument BLOCk DELete Net EIERE UST ee eae cece 293 INSTr ment BEOGCIMQOYVE either ay tp ntc eA Y cepa eei eA ppt ut 293 INSTr ment BEOGK EE 293 INSTMUMENEBLOCK SEL 1o eM 293 INSTr ment CREate RUE E 285
435. nimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Using Delta Markers The following commands control
436. nnel The channel bar and the default result displays for the new measurement channel are displayed If necessary the previously displayed windows are cumulated in tabs to create room on the display 3 Select the input type for the new measurement channel and assign a configured instrument or import a file see chapter 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Measure ment with Instrument Input on page 211 or chapter 11 2 How to Import UO Data for Analysis on page 213 4 Configure further input source or measurement settings as required for the individ ual channels see the applications user manual for details 5 Repeat these steps to add further measurement channels to the group 6 Select the Capture mode icon to toggle between single and continuous C measurements for each measurement channel 7 Select the Capture icon for a measurement channel to perform a measurement on that channel Only one channel can be started manually at a time Before you can start another channel you must stop the previous measurement by selecting the I Stop icon for that channel first How to Import UO Data for Analysis To start multiple measurements on diffferent input types at the same time perform a measurement on the entire group see chapter 11 3 How to Perform Measurements on Multiple Files and Instruments on page 214 To perform several measurements on the same instrument sequentially configure a measurement sequence
437. nnel bar gt From the Window menu select the tool window or channel bar The window is toggled on or off To deactivate or reactivate a result display 1 From the Window menu select Active Windows Alternatively right click the window title bar of a result display that belongs to the same channel 2 Select the result display you want to deactivate or reactivate A checkmark indicates that the window is currently active The window is toggled on or off To close a result display W Select the Delete icon in the window title bar The result display is permanently removed Getting Help Remote command LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow on page 301 6 4 Getting Help If any questions or problems concerning the R amp S VSE arise an extensive online help system is provided in the software and can be consulted at any time The help system is context sensitive and provides information specifically for the current operation or setting to be performed In addition general topics provide an overview on complete tasks or function groups as well as background information 6 4 1 Calling Up Help The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the Help icons on the toolbar or by selecting the F1 key Calling context sensitive help gt To display the Help dialog box for the currently focused screen element e g a softkey or a setting in an opened dialog box select the Help icon on the toolbar
438. nnel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Restoring Channel Settings Preset Selected Channel on page 76 See Preset Channel on page 127 General Data Storage and Loading Commands See also FORMat DATA on page 377 estre e MK e KEE 384 MMEMory GATalogid ONGJ iiec cti cc eee ter e Lex da EEN NEES dee 385 MMEMON Eege Etre eere Eed EE EE 385 Managing Settings and Results MMEMORE CON BIG direi ceret re med leere tee endete oe epe Phan a Dade Deu neca 385 MMEMOV COP RM Em 386 MMEMOM DATA n aKa ai ia 386 MMEMO DELEITE ES 386 MMEMOory MBI RettOry EE 387 MMEMane MOVE EE 387 rz arl ER 387 i r zit ral e HER 387 MMEMorneNETWorteDISGOREDoL icit o ER oir une ui I ERE IRURE UR ERER 388 MMEMBISINETWAOFEMAP editeipren pie nro ride pae hn nn pio aneia REX Ca ka NEES n bn 388 MMEMory NETWork UNDSeddiiVes tei hr nett reri t eer th id teg rcd 388 MMEMory NETWork BSEDdElves iicet hmi cic ea nt eee ESO ede Estee o a ca PER 389 IS ee RDIRSEIOlC E 389 MMEMory CATalog Path This command returns the contents of a particular directory Query parameters Path String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory
439. nput SOUT UE NG NU EE 446 Meas Setup Menu Trace WSU E n Mc Hui M A 1 2 1 A 1 2 2 A 1 2 3 Menu Reference Input amp Output Menu The Input amp Output menu provides functions to configure the input source frontend parameters and output settings for the measurement This menu is application specific Table 1 1 Input menu items for the I Q Analyzer Menu item Description Amplitude chapter 10 3 3 Amplitude on page 132 Scale chapter 10 3 3 3 Scaling the Y Axis on page 138 Frequency chapter 10 3 4 Frequency Settings on page 141 Trigger chapter 10 3 5 2 Trigger Settings on page 147 Input Source chapter 10 3 2 1 Radio Frequency Input on page 128 Output chapter 10 3 2 3 Output Settings on page 130 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu provides access to most measurement specific settings as well as bandwidth sweep and auto configuration settings and the configuration Over view window This menu is application specific Table 1 2 Meas Setup menu items for the UO Analyzer Menu item Description Data acquisition chapter 10 3 6 1 Data Acquisition on page 152 Capture chapter 10 3 6 2 Capture Settings on page 157 Overview chapter 10 3 1 Configuration Overview on page 126 Trace Menu The Trace menu provides access to trace specific functions See chapter 10 4
440. ns user manuals The following common functions are available in all window title bars Table 6 3 Common functions and icons in the window title bar WV Change result type Displays a list of possible result types for the active channels to replace the current display Invalid data Indicates that invalid or inconsistent data is displayed that is the trace no longer matches the displayed measurement settings This may be the case for example when you change the measurement bandwidth but the displayed trace is still based on the old bandwidth As soon as a new mea surement is performed or the display is updated the icon disappears This icon is sometimes also referred to as a dirty flag User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 40 R amp S VSE Operating Basics O E E EEE E l Qo Dock Undock win Docks the window to the main R amp S VSE window or separates it from the dow main window See Docked and undocked windows on page 43 D Delete window Closes the selected window 6 2 Understanding the UO Analyzer Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during UO Analyzer operation All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the follow ing sections IQ An SI od Meas Time 1 2 Freq 1 amp Rec Length ER 3 1 1 Magnitude 4 2 Rast DICE e 4 33577 ms 30 34 dBm MI 1 55 77 ps
441. nstruments folo pfo SP ted Nyce ita tet adie atk 56 COMIQUIING EE 53 Deleting 57 62 Input source Searching Supported D2 Interface messages 2 nre mettere 222 Interface type left Dr VEER 57 59 62 Interfaces LAN 54 JOE e 245 Invalid data Icon 40 Se 54 Assigning DNS server 2 259 left De E oe 57 60 IQ tar Example file 455 File elt oirne uasa 1 454 Mandatory data elements 454 Optional data elements ssis 454 iq tar Fil elt E 88 453 IQBlock et ECO 451 IQPair I Q data files ente 451 iqw File format TEE 88 453 IQW Example fil amp 0 ne iien 460 File format isses 460 Mandatory data elements 460 Optional data elements 460 IS Tr elei ette tulere do etre e iei o EIN Tones 235 IST flag 239 E ue 258 Items Saving Settings K Keywords see Mnemonics 5 icc redis cocti iaia 223 L LAN Device name instrument ccccceeeseeeeeeeeesteeeeees 60 Interface VAI DrOtOCOI m S 55 LIGENSOS 0 aan EGedden 13 ren c m 107 Limit lines Band power marker euer Sue 190 OBW facets 199 202 Peak Searchi ente 199 202 SIMI 79 Linking Markers 1e nori c ENEE 194 Loading Analysis bandwidth esssseees 93 eil
442. nt Channels Groups and Sequences 67 Input Sources The input source selects the source of the data to be analyzed You can either analyze a live signal or a signal that has been recorded previously and whose characteristics have been saved to a file Connected Instrument Any instruments that are to provide signals to the R amp S VSE must be configured in the software The R amp S VSE then manages all connections to the other instruments If the instrument configured for a particular measurement channel is changed the R amp S VSE software adapts the measurement settings if necessary and possible Thus the mea surement and analysis tasks performed using the R amp S VSE software are mostly inde pendent of the underlying instrument Currently the following instruments can be connected to the R amp S VSE software to pro vide signal input R amp S FSW Signal and Spectrum Analyzers R amp S FSV Signal and Spectrum Analyzers e R amp S FPS Signal and Spectrum Analyzers R amp S FSL Signal and Spectrum Analyzers The instrument connected to and controlled by the R amp S VSE software is referred to as the instrument in use throughout this documentation Input sources Depending on the type of instrument and the connectors it provides the following source of input is supported by the R amp S VSE software e RF Captures and analyzes the data from the RF input of the spectrum analyzer in use Confi
443. nt in use are configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration restarted This address must first be determined on the PC itself Thus when using a DHCP server it is recommended that you use the permanent computer name which determines the address via the DNS server see Using a DNS server to determine the IP address on page 253 Risk of network errors o When a DHCP server is used a new IP address may be assigned each time the PC is Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address Assigning the IP address on the PC running the R amp S VSE software 1 Select File gt Preferences gt Network Remote 2 Select Open Network Configuration 3 Double click the Local Area Connection icon 4 In the Local Area Connection Status dialog box select the Properties button The items used by the LAN connection are displayed 5 Click the entry named Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 to highlight it How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Setup IQ Analvzer 2 J General Displayed items Theme
444. nter frequency Automatic configuration eseeesseesssss 160 elei EE Setting to marker E P eg Channel bar Deactivatihg c 48 UO Analyzer 41 Information 38 Reactivating 48 Channel prese c sciiicet E EAEE 76 Channels see Measurement channels sessssess 38 Checking the connection certis 61 Clear status REMOTE n e een ee er ie 258 Closing Channels remote egt 287 292 Windows remote 2s eo Pe DE nem Color curve TT 171 179 SPECHOGIAMS uoce ec tne 171 184 Color mapping Color curve Color range amp Color scheme e rene tote e tete Iob dette ilm M Spectrograms i Step by step Value range Color scheme Spectrograri ier i rere Eee ts 170 180 Colors Assigning to obJect i eere 105 Coding ae VE 39 Configuring 104 106 Display EE 102 Editing oin 102 Editing remote we 412 Predefil d etai aterert eee 105 ulna E er Re ence teeny Ere cree er went A 104 Printing n 102 Restoring 106 Screen 104 E e 99 User defined w 104 User SpecIfiC teer re terere 105 COMMA aieri ecce xe Stn te edge to Ir tbc e uude gd 229 Command sequence Recomimmendalion etr deed ged 248 Remote 261 Commands 2 222 Colon COMMA eee Command line structure Common e Double dagger 2 ane treten eei r
445. nts in a network If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource string For details on configuring the LAN connection see chapter 12 3 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 250 e VAIT POCO EE 55 e CDM zero PORTTITOR 55 VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this proto col messages cannot be lost HiSLIP Protocol The HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol is the successor protocol for VXI 11 for TCP based instruments specified by the IVI foundation The protocol uses two TCP sockets for a single connection one for fast data transfer the other for non sequential control commands e g Device Clear or SRQ HiSLIP has the following characteristics High performance as with raw socket network connections e Compatible IEEE 488 2 support for Message Exchange Protocol Device Clear Serial Poll Remote Local Trigger and Service Request e Uses a single IANA registered port 4880 which simpl
446. numeric value Index of the window Example LAY GLOB CAT Result TQ Analyzer 1 1 2 2 Analog Demod 1 1 4 4 For the UO Analyzer channel two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right For the Analog Demodulation channel two windows are dis played named 1 at the top or left and 4 at the bottom or right Usage Query only Configuring the Result Display LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow lt ChannelName gt lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the specified chan nel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Example LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow IQ 1 RIGH Spectrum FREQ Adds a new window named Spectrum with a Spectrum display to the right of window 1 Example LAYout GLOBal IDENtify IQ Analyzer Spectrum Result 2 Window index is 2 Usage Query only LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow lt ChannelName gt lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel l
447. nuously until measurement is stopped manually Note that the capture mode of the entire measurement sequence automatically defines the capture mode of the individual groups and channels as the same mode 7 Select the Capture button at the bottom of the Measurement Group Setup tool window to start the active groups in the defined order How to Save and Load Measurement Settings The measurements for a single group are performed and the results are displayed in the channels result displays When that group has completed its measurements the next group in the sequence is started Analyze the captured data as described in chapter 11 8 How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer on page 219 11 5 How to Save and Load Measurement Settings Measurement settings can be saved to a file and loaded again later so that you can repeat the measurement with the same settings To save configurable measurement settings 1 Select the EJ Save icon from the toolbar 2 In the Save dialog box switch to the Save tab 3 In the file selection dialog box select a file name and storage location for the set tings file 4 Optionally define a comment to describe the stored settings 5 Select whether the measurement settings for all channels are to be stored or only those for the current channel 6 Select the items to be saved with the settings Either the settings for the currently selected channel only or for all channels can be stored
448. o 20 measurements INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 mea surements Usage Event Manual operation See Capture on page 73 See Capture on page 94 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings RECord Starts a measurement for the currently selected channel and stores the measurement data to a temporary file You can store the file permanently using EXPort IO FILE For details see chapter 8 3 1 Recording Measurement Data on page 85 Usage Event Manual operation See Record on page 73 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command The new channel is inserted in the currently selected group of the measurement sequence see INSTrument BLOCk SELect on page 293 Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event Manual operation See Duplicate Current Channel on page 72 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an addition
449. o meas time of stored data Default unit s INST BLOC CHAN FILE START TIME 0 32s Data from the input file is replayed starting at 0 32 s of the cap tured data See Playback Settings on page 95 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STOP SAMPle Sample This command defines the sample within the input file i at which replay stops Suffix lt j gt Parameters lt Sample gt 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel numeric value Range O to record length of stored data Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Example INST BLOC CHAN FILE STAR SAMP 10 INST BLOC CHAN FILE STOP SAMP 1000 Data from the input file is replayed starting with sample number 10 and ending with sample number 1000 Manual operation See Playback Settings on page 95 INSTrument BLOCKk CHANnel SETTings FILE i STOP TIME Time This command defines the absolute time within the input file i at which replay stops Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel Parameters lt Time gt double value Absolute stop time not duration Range 0 to meas time of stored data Default unit s Example INST BLOC CHAN FILE START TIME 0 32s INST BLOC CHAN FILE STOP TIME 0 64s Data from the input file is replayed s
450. o one or two numbers are allowed in a group as an example see the pre installed address For information on how to determine the IP address see the instrument s documenta tion Remote command DEVice TARGet on page 264 DEVice TARGet on page 264 Host name Unique host computer name of the connected instrument if Address format is Host name Board Number Unique board number of the connected instrument LAN device name Defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub instrument instO VXI 11 protocol hislipO HiSLIP protocol VISA Resource String The VISA resource string determined from the defined information to be used by the R amp S VSE to identify and control the connected instrument For details see chapter 7 2 1 1 LAN Interface on page 54 7 2 4 Configuring Instruments Status Indicates the current state of the connection to the specified instrument in the network after a Check was performed Check Checks the connection state to the instrument specified by the VISA resource string The result is indicated under Status Searching for Connected Instruments Automatically Alternatively to defining the connection information manually the R amp S VSE can search for all instruments connected to the same network as the PC running the R amp S VSE software You can then select the instrument to be controlled by the R amp S VSE software from the detected instruments In the Instruments tool wi
451. o run the R amp S VSE software successfully e Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 and 4 0 both e VISA Installing the Microsoft NET Framework When you install the R amp S VSE via the provided installation file see chapter 3 2 Installing and Starting the R amp S VSE Software on page 12 the installer automati cally checks whether the required Microsoft NET Framework versions are available on the PC If not version 3 5 is installed from the R amp S VSE CD ROM and an internet connection to the Microsoft website is established to download the Framework version 4 0 due to the large file size Thus before attempting to install the R amp S VSE soft ware ensure a strong internet connection is available from the PC as downloading may take some time Alternatively download the Framework 4 0 version from the inter net manually before you start the R amp S VSE installer Installing VISA It is also necessary to install VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture to access instruments connected to the PC via IEEE or LAN bus It is recommended that you use the National Instruments VISA driver The National Instrument VISA driver CD ROM is supplied together with the R amp S VSE CD ROM You can also visit http www ni com visa to get the latest version for your operating system if you are licensed to Once the R amp S VSE software is installed a status icon in the status bar indicates whether the VISA installation is available see table 6
452. o the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They are used to communicate between the con troller and the instrument Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that have GPIB bus functionality For details see the sections for the required interface e Instrument messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces if not indica ted otherwise in the description Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described in chapter 12 1 3 SCPI Command Structure on page 223 A detailed description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter Remote Control Commands There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent Commands Instrument responses Commands Commands program messages are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The commands are subdivided according to two criteria According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instru ment or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header According to their definition in standards Common commands the
453. of the CMAP commands see chap ter 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assignment on page 415 Predefined Colors Modifying User Defined Color Assignments Displays the available colors from the predefined color set that can be used for the selected object Remote command HCOPy CMAP item PDEFined on page 403 Preview Modifying User Defined Color Assignments Indicates the currently selected color that will be used for the selected object Defining User specific Colors In addition to the colors in the predefined color set you can configure a user specific color to be used for the selected object When you select Userdefined Colors the set of predefined colors is replaced by a color palette and color configuration settings How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing Selected Object Background E Tint 50 Saturation 0 Brightness 0 ARGB ff000000 Predefined Colors OK Cancel The color palette allows you to select the color directly The color settings allow you to define values for tint saturation and brightness Remote command HCOPy CMAP item HSL on page 403 Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors In addition to the predefined color settings a user defined setting can be configured By default the same settings as defined in Default Colors 1 are used They can then be modified according to user specific requirements see Modifying User Defined Color Assignments on page 104
454. ogramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 0_11 user MyFSW IQanalyzer results iq tar Saving and Loading Measurement Settings This example demonstrates how to save and load measurement settings in a remote environment It assumes a measurement has been configured as described in chap ter 13 12 4 Basic HO Analysis on page 426 13 12 7 Programming Examples Store the channel settings Select the channel whose settings are to be saved INST SEL My IQ Analyzer Specify that channel specific data is to be stored MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN Store the channel settings from the My IQ Analyzer channel to the file MyFSW IQanalyzer dfl MMEM STOR STAT 1 C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 10a_62 user MyFSW_IQanalyzer dfl Load the channel settings Specify that settings will be loaded to a new channel besides the existing My IQ Analyzer channel MMEM LOAD TYPE NEW Select all settings and results to be loaded MMEM SEL CHAN ALL Load the channel specific settings from the file MyFSW IQanalyzer dfl to a new channel The new channel is named My IQ Analyzer 2 by default MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE 1 10a_62 user MyFSW_IQanalyzer dfl Rename the loaded channel to MyFSW IQanalyzer FromFile INST REN My IQ Analyzer 2 MyFSW IQanalyzer FromFile Programming Example Complete Sequential Measurement with Data Export The following examp
455. ommand limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or measure ment time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM STATe lt State gt This command adjusts the marker search range to the zoom area for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Using Zoom Limits on page 199 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt THReshold Level This command defines a threshold level for the marker peak search for all markers in all windows n is irrelevant Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search Threshold on page 199 CALCulate n THReshold STATe State This c
456. ommand turns a threshold for the marker peak search on and off for all markers in all windows n is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC THR STAT ON Switches on the threshold line Manual operation See Deactivating All Search Limits on page 199 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal Markers sess nennen nennen nnns 365 e Positioning HR EE 368 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUM AUTO cccceccccceeceseseseeceecececaaceeeseseecaueeeesaneeeaes 366 GALCulatesmMARKersm MAXiIm m iLbEFT ideae Ed 366 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT sense sensn aa assess sse 366 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm MANimumf PDEAK eene 366 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMAximumRlGHt enses enne sns an 366 CAL Culate nz M Abkermmz MiNimum AUTO 367 CAL Culate nz M Abkermmz MiNimum LEET 367 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz MiNimumNENT esee nennen nenas nnns 367 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cecinere neni 367 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz MiNimum RI 368 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R amp S VSE performs the peak search after each sweep Par
457. on Constellation CVCarrier Constellation vs Carrier IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n only EVCarrier EVM vs Carrier IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n only Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type EVCHip EVM vs Chip IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS only EVSYmbol EVM vs Symbol IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n only FSPectrum FFT Spectrum GDELay Group Delay IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n only PFPPdu PvT Full PPDU RSDetailed Result Summary Detailed IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n only RSGLobal Result Summary Global SFleld Signal Field IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n PLCP Header IEEE 802 11b and g DSSS SFLatness Spectrum Flatness IEEE 802 11a ac g OFDM n only LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right for each active channel The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt ChannelName_1 gt lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Win dowIndex n ChannelName m lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Win dowIndex n Return values lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex
458. onfigured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 lt Address gt string Network address of the instrument for example IP address lt Protocol gt Interface protocol used to connect the specified instrument to the network VXI11 Standard TCP IP based protocol HiSlip High performance protocol Example DEV TARG SpecAnalyzer 100 100 100 100 WXIII Usage Setting only Manual operation See IP address on page 57 DEVice TARGet lt DevName gt Queries the network address of the specified instrument Query parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Return values lt Address gt string Network address of the instrument for example IP address Example DEV TARG SpecAnalyzer 100 100 100 100 VXI11 DEV TARG SpecAnalyzer Result 100 100 100 100 Usage Query only Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Manual operation See IP address on page 57 DEVice TARGet TYPE DevName Protocol DEVice TARGet TYPE lt DevName gt Defines or queries the interface protocol used to connect the specified instrument to the network For details on interfaces see chapter 7 2 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols on page 53 Setting parameters Protocol Interface protocol used to connect the specified instrument to the network VXI11 Standard TCP IP based protocol HiSlip High performance protocol Paramete
459. or 5 To assign a user specific color to the selected object do one of the following e Select the color from the palette e Enter values for the Tint Saturation and Brightness Note In the continuous color spectrum Tint red is represented by 096 and blue by 10096 e Enter an ARGP value in hexadecimal format 6 Select the next object to which you want to assign a color from the Selected Object list and assign a color as described Repeat these steps until all objects you want to configure have been assigned a color 7 Select OK to close the dialog box and apply the colors to the assigned objects 9 4 Software Information and Support Some general software functions are available concerning optional functionality licen Ses service functions or system messages These settings are available from the Help menu e Licensing Versions and ODpLiofis anc em ra xs 107 e R amp S Support IfonTidlion ior red ed eee eb te dete eee E 109 9 4 1 Licensing Versions and Options Information on the R amp S VSE software version and additional licensed options is provi ded in the Versions Options dialog box The unique Rohde amp Schwarz device ID is Software Information and Support also indicated here as it is required for license and option administration Furhtermore you can also install new firmware options in this dialog box From the Help menu select License To simply find out the v
460. or example 255 255 255 0 The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Every block contains 3 numbers in maxi mum 10 Close the dialog box If you have entered an invalid IP address or subnet mask the message out of range is displayed in the status line If the settings are correct the configuration is saved and you are prompted to restart the PC 11 Confirm the displayed message Yes button to restart the PC How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the PC running the R amp S VSE software the server can determine the current IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name 1 Forthe instrument in use a Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network b Press the SETUP key and then the Network Remote softkey c In the Network tab select the Open Dialog Network Connections button 2 Forthe PC running the R amp S VSE software a Select File gt Preferences gt Network Remote b Select Open Network Configuration 3 click the Local Area Network icon 4 n the Local Area Connection Status dialog box select the Properties button The items used by the LAN connection are displayed 5 Click the entry named Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 to highlight it 6 Select the Properties button 7 Onthe Gener
461. or the specified trace from the memory As an offset and number of sweep points to be retrieved can be specified the trace data can be retrieved in smaller portions making the command faster than the TRAC DATA command This is useful if only specific parts of the trace data are of interest If no parameters are specified with the command the entire trace data is retrieved in this case the command is identical to TRAC DATA TRACE1 For details on the returned values see the TRAC DATA lt TRACE gt command Query parameters Trace TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 lt OffsSwPoint gt The offset in sweep points related to the start of the measure ment at which data retrieval is to start lt NoOfSwPoints gt Number of sweep points to be retrieved from the trace Example TRAC DATA MEM TRACE1 25 100 Retrieves 100 sweep points from trace 1 starting at sweep point 25 Usage Query only Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE1 TRACEG Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 13 6 3 3 Re
462. or to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 175 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 162 Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point RST APEak UO Analyzer RMS Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See Detector on page 174 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 174 TRACe lt n gt COPY lt TraceNumber gt lt TraceNumber gt This command copies data from one trace to another Parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 lt TraceNumber gt The first parameter is the destination trace the second parame ter is the source Not
463. ord UO data gt Configure the measurement as required see also chapter 11 7 How to Capture Baseband UO Data in the UO Analyzer on page 218 but use the Record function to start the measurement instead of the k Capture function To export the UO data recording Select File gt Save I Q Recording 2 Select the storage location for the UO data file 3 Select the file type format 4 Select which set of meta data is to be stored with the UO data 5 Select Save To import the stored data file to the R amp S VSE again as input see chapter 11 2 How to Import UO Data for Analysis on page 213 Previewing the UO data from an iq tar file in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the exported UO data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser How to Capture Baseband IO Data in the I Q Analyzer 4 Drag the I Q parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser EE Dni a gt O fie 0 xzy xmi ra D xzy xml J xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xz
464. ording Settings erensia aikana OE EEEE 86 Exporting Recorded VQ Data 87 Recalling Measurement Data from Eiles eee eete eee eeentteeeeeeetneeeeeeenteeeeeeeaa 91 Printing Current Measurement Results esee nnn 96 General Software Preferences eese 100 General Software Behavior eeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene nnne nnne niens 100 Display SettingS TTT 101 Displayed Mic Rr 101 Display Theme and Colors eene 102 How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing 106 Software Information and SUPPOlt ccccceseeeeee eee ee eee ee eeeeeeaseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneanes 107 Licensing Versions and Optons eene 107 R amp S Support Information 109 UO Analyzer Measurements REENEN 111 Result Displays for the UO Analyzer essere 111 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing eene 116 How Much Data is Measured Capture Count and Measurement Points 117 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidt 118 Basics On EET ER E eene EE e rd PE ripe C aes 118 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 124 Configuration ep 125 Contiguration OWV6ervigw x acute iae n ER eaa exea cue dada tees Pn Pag ERE ER TAFE XR eu 126 Data Input and Output Gettings nennen 128 Linne It 132 Frequency ln e DE 141 Nerf 142 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Gettngs cece
465. ory SELect CHANnel I TEM NONE iiiiiieeee seen sh an en nn iD Eaa n aa ne 391 TEE e ERR er el EE 391 Managing Settings and Results MMEMory SEbectCHANnellITEMESGRB ruat arai eerta tranne Eaa iaaa 391 MMEMory SELec ITEM SGRI E 391 MMEWMory SELect CHANnel I TEM TRACe ACTive essere 392 MMEMoery SELect I TEMETRAGCe ACTIVE enie eaaa rre eani nean hau rada aa Eed 392 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL This command includes all items when storing or loading a configuration file The items are Limit lines MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL e Spectrogram data MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam Trace data MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive Example MMEM SEL ALL Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 81 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault This command selects the current settings as the only item to store to and load from a configuration file Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 81 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings State MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings State This command includes or excludes measurement hardware settings when storing or loading a configuration file Measurement settings include general channel configuration measurement hardware configuration including markers limit lines Note that a configuration may include no more than 8 limit lines This n
466. over green to light turquoise with shades of green in between GRAYscale Shows the results in shades of gray RST HOT Example DISP WIND SPEC COL GRAY Changes the color scheme of the spectrogram to black and white Manual operation See Hot Cold Radar Grayscale on page 180 Using Markers The following commands are available for marker settings and functions in the I Q Ana lyzer application For UO Vector displays markers are not available Setting Up Individual MarKele iiie cor Poterie eoa caret ate neat 348 General Marker Setlings 2 aei ea euet lato tees 353 Marker Search Spectrograms sss enne nnns 354 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search A 362 Positioning the ET 365 Band Powar VE TEE 370 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALC latesn gt DEL Tamafker Ee EE 349 CALCulate n DELTamarker mo LINK niece ie eee enanada aar ahea asa a Ea aan daa 349 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK TOMAhkercmz nennen enean 349 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarkersita MODE irisi osiada oot near reta ENEE 350 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 350 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmztSTATel nennen tnter rnnt 350 CALCulate nz DELTamarkercmz TR ACe nee ss essen esas essai sisse nsns sans 351 CAL Gulate meDELETaiiarkeremo X EE 351 CALOulate n MARKer m AOFF 2 nclisss
467. part of the status register to bere ported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Negative Transition Part For more information on the positive transition part see chapter 12 1 5 2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 236 STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the
468. pear TEE 139 le DEE 139 b cH NIRE TUTO TTL EET 140 Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 315 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in 96 where 0 96 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram For spectrograms this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by the color map In this case the value is given in where O corre sponds to the maximum right end and 100 96 to the minimum left end of the color map Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 316 Ref Value The reference level value configured in Amplitude Settings indicated for reference only Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis For more information see Scaling on page 135 Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal 10 3 3 4 Configuration Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for
469. peration is displayed in the status bar Measuring vat att Error messages If errors or irregularities are detected a keyword and an error message if available are displayed in the status bar For details see the individual applications user manual 6 1 4 Windows The R amp S VSE distinguishes between three types of windows depending on their use e Tool windows provide functionality for specific global tasks such as configuring instruments or measurement groups see chapter 7 Controlling Instruments and Capturing UO Data on page 52 e Channel bar provides information on measurement channel settings one window per active channel e Result displays provide the measurement results The layout of the individual windows is customizable and highly flexible see chap ter 6 3 Customizing the User Interface on page 43 LONE TT 38 e Result Displays Measurement WindOws esee nennen nan 39 6 1 4 1 Channel bar For each channel a separate window with measurement information is displayed When you select a result display window for a different channel the channel bar for that channel is also activated Each channel bar is provided with a colored line in the window title bar which is the same color as the corresponding channel result displays IQ Analyzer Ref Level 0 00 dBm Meas Time 31 281 us SRate 32 0 MHz Att 10dB Freq 40 GHz Rec Length 1001 Fig 6 2 Example for channel bar I Q Analyzer
470. play If the Record Length is edited the points are adapted automatically For record lengths outside the valid range of points i e fewer than 51 points or more than 524288 points the diagram does not show valid results Using fewer points than the FFT Length with a detector other than Auto Peak may lead to wrong level results For details see Combining Results Trace Detector on page 122 Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 332 Quantize Bins For Statistics displays this value defines the number of quantize bins used to create the histogram that is the number of different measurement values the statistical occurrence is determined for Remote command CALCulate n 1Q STATistics SCALe X QUANtize on page 317 Capture Count Defines the number of times data is captured in single measurement mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one measurement is per formed The capture count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous measurement mode if capture count 0 default averaging is per formed over 10 measurement For capture count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are performed For more information see chapter 10 2 1 How Much Data is Measured Capture Count and Measurement Points on page 1
471. porarily stops the current measurement Continuous toggles to continuous measurement mode for next capture Single toggles to single measurement mode for next capture Record performs the selected measurement and records the captured data and results Refresh Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data VSA application only Reference of Toolbar Functions Help toolbar For a description of these functions see chapter 6 4 Getting Help on page 49 Table 1 7 Functions in the Help toolbar Icon Description ko Help Select allows you to select an object for which context specific help is displayed not available in standard Windows dialog boxes or measurement result windows P Help displays context sensitive help topic for currently selected element Application specific toolbars The following toolbars are application specific not all functions shown here may be available in each application Zoom toolbar For a description of these functions see chapter 10 4 3 Zoomed Displays on page 205 Table 1 8 Functions in the Zoom toolbar Icon Description k Normal mouse mode the cursor can be used to select and move markers in a zoomed display AR Zoom mode displays a dotted rectangle in the diagram that can be expanded to define the zoom area Gd Multiple zoom mode multiple zoom areas can be defined for th
472. positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1 CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1 Manual operation See m Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 See Frame Spectrogram only on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt and lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt SearchArea gt viSible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible Manual operation See Marker Search Area on page 201 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n
473. pported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 322 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 323 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt on page 322 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 323 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel MAPower on page 323 Repetition Interval Defines the repetition interval for a time trigger The shortest interval is 2 ms Configuration The repetition interval should be set to the exact pulse period burst length frame length or other repetitive signal characteristic Remote command TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 325 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again For more information on the drop out time see Trigger Drop Out Time on page 145 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 321 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement For more information see Trigger Offset on page 144 offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g UO Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the measurement time pretriggermax measurement timemax Tip To determine the trigger point in the sample for External or IF Power trigger source use the TR
474. ptive comment to the data file Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation Tip if a default comment is defined in the general recording settings see Default Comment on page 86 it is provided as a default here Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 399 Meta Data Settings Defines which meta data is included in the data file Meta data is required to restore the measurement settings when the data file is recalled as input for the R amp S VSE soft ware later Note that only the settings used during recording are stored subsequent changes to the settings are ignored For iqw file format no meta data is available Min The minimum set of measurement settings required to restore the channel later are stored In particular this includes Reference level Center frequency e Input path Analysis bandwidth Max Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation All available meta data from the entire signal processing chain input path to the output is stored In particular this may include depending on the type of measure ment channel and instrument in use e Amplitude parameters Reference level Electronic attenuation Mechanical attenuation Preamplifier Input impedance Input coupling Range Frequency parameters Center frequency Input parameters Recording device instrument providing the data Calibration state External reference Input p
475. pture To display the Spectrum or Magnitude diagram for a specific time frame 1 Stop the continuous measurement or wait until the single capture is completed 2 Select the frame number in the diagram footer of the Spectrogram 3 Enter the required frame number in the edit dialog box Note that the most recent sweep is frame number 0 all previous frames have neg ative numbers To remove the spectrogram display 1 Select the result display that contains the Spectrogram subwindow 2 From the Trace menu select Spectrogram 3 Select State Off The Spectrogram subwindow is closed and the original result display is restored in full window size To set a marker in the spectrogram 1 While a spectrogram is displayed select the d Place Next Marker icon in the Marker toolbar 2 Select a Marker softkey 3 Enter the frequency or time x value of the marker or delta marker 4 Enter the frame number for which the marker is to be set for example 0 for the cur rent frame or 2 for the second to last frame Note that the frame number is always 0 or a negative value The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently selected frame In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame To configure a spectrogram 1 Configure the spectrogram frames a From the Meas Setup menu select Capture b In the Capture Count field define ho
476. r 1 Real lmag 1 Q Real 1AP Crw ig IQ Analyzer 1 Real Imag Q Imag 9 1AP Clrw Remote command LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH RIM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 378 Statistic Shows a histogram of measured UO magnitudes The number of bins used for the his togram that is the number of different measurement values the statistical occurrence is determined for can be defined IESSE User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 114 R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements 1AP Clrw 9 2AP Clrw IQ Analyzer 2 Statistic Span 100 0 dBm CF 50 0 dBm Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH STAT see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 Phase vs Time Shows the phase values in the time domain W 115 User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 R amp SSVSE UO Analyzer Measurements 10 2 IQ Analyzer 2 Phase vs Time 1APClw oi g Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH POLar see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 196 3 Marker Table X Value Y Value 0 256 WEI 415 512 1 94 dB 489 512 1 95 dB 266 512 2 00 dB Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 353 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on
477. r Distribution PFRequency Pulse Frequency PMAGnitude Pulse Magnitude PPHase Pulse Phase PPWrapped Pulse phase wrapped PRESults Pulse Results PSPectrum Parameter Spectrum PSTatistics Pulse Statistics PTRend Parameter Trend RRSPectrum Result Range Spectrum Table 13 4 lt WindowType gt parameter values for AnalogDemod application Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary Configuring the Result Display Parameter value XTIM AM Window type RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPec trum AM Spectrum XTIM FM XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Time Domain FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum Table 13 5 lt WindowType gt parameter values for GSM application Parameter value Window type CONStell Constellation ETIMe EVM vs Time MCAPture Magnitude Capture MERRor Magnitude Error vs Time MTABle Marker Table MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy MSFDomain Modulation Spectrum Graph Frequency domain MSTable Modulation Spectrum Table PERRor Phase Error vs Time PSTable Power vs Slot PTFull PvT Full Burst TGSGraph Trigger to Sync Graph TGSTable Trigger to Sync Table TSFDomain Transient Spectrum Graph
478. r the currently selected element are indicated by an empty gray space in the R amp S VSE window or by showing the underlying window with a tab When you drop the window or bar it is docked to the selected position If you drop the window on top of an existing window of the same type the moved window is added as a tab To switch between displayed windows simply select the corresponding tab Customizing the User Interface To resize a window gt To resize a window select the window frame and drag it to the required size Note the restrictions concerning the minimum window size described in Window size on page 46 To restore the default configuration for the measurement channel use the Preset gt Selected Channel function in the File menu 6 3 4 Closing and Deactivating Windows and Bars Closing a window permanently deletes the result display and its contents while deacti vating a window simply hides the display without losing its settings or contents Tool windows and channel bars can not be closed permanently For details see Closing vs deactivating windows on page 46 To hide or display a toolbar 1 Right click any toolbar or the menu bar A context menu with a list of all available toolbars is displayed 2 Select the toolbar you want to hide or display A checkmark indicates that the toolbar is currently displayed The toolbar is toggled on or off To deactivate or reactivate a tool window or cha
479. r then Etre rtt re e E rx epe athe ec gne re EE e px n 392 MMEMory COMMent MMEMGRY COP Yas m A EEEE MMEMOry DATA t ausreereseien eateeeneet tens eeniensr eaten ceier anes eta de dienaeasniradeeen EECH MMEMO ry DELCte E MMEMORy LOAD AUTO T 393 MMEMory LOADIQ le seggt tt nr a kr rtr ee Ce ee rrt orc x REED E ENT 399 MMEMoOry EOAD STALTOe it intern tree rer tirer ete enean a RE RO Rd Pe E ER KR LEER FRAN ESPERE KR EHETE ia MMEMory LOAD TYPE MMEMO ry MBIRG COI o MMEMO ry MOVE Eeer Haec a e ve car TEEN ee PUn ee Pe XL ena deer ji MMEMOIy NAME ctio Htc ie D et raa DU ve AERE Lc Pe Eve HA E LI MMEMory NETWork DISGOhnH6CL iniret irrita tnr rrt ten re nnn toca PE PRX KR ER ERR EN EATER MIVIEMORY NETWOIK MAR iessicus MMEMory NETWork UNUSeddrives MMEMory NETWork USEDUdrives nin m rece hn nra erre t cr e nena Rae rec ARENY 389 MMEMORY EAD ee e 389 MMEMory SELectCHANnel I TEM JALL totu itn rea rone tp tunt eren tee 390 MMEMeory SELect CHANnel TEM DEFault 5 12 tana tnr tt etre serate rrr tnt 390 MMEMorv GEI ect CHANnell IT EM HWGettings AAA 390 MMEMory SELectCHANnel ITEM LINes ALL eeiioeitn enr enn en
480. rData amp 2323 char 2x23 char bce UserData9 2x18 char 2x18 char UserData Count 22 1d 22 22 double 0 List of remote commands basic software SENSe WINDowsn 7 DETector t E FUNCtlon eerte tn en t tnn 341 ISENS D iNDow nz DE Techor GlFUNGC ontAUTO nennen rennen 341 SENSe ADJUSEALL EE SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURaltion kesni erei eno eee a treten Fe eR Eae got the i E eren dei SENSe JADJust CGONFIgure DURation MODE 2 is rani tu here ches teen hentai poen de E cr xe oie SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer vie SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis Hier vets certet mettent enr entr eo a ua SENSe ADJust CONFigure IRIG s c catene ci rore EEN SENSE E RETTEN SENSe IADJUSEDEWV6l itte rr a a uet etate tee e reo IE ed E p eae ett zs SENSE ADJUSt E M SENSesJAVERage lt h gt COUNt uereg pert e eben crim deca ena eu Ao CI NAE VETE EVE DEP dace vanes SENS amp e AVERagesn TYPE ecrit nre rrr erre tren ra i Peer Eve aerea Ue raadi SENSe JAVERagesnP S TATeSE DEE SENSe FREQuUuency GENTLE EE SENS FREQuency CENTE STEP initiiert ra EO e a o b Deere Red ee tees SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO SENSe FREQUSNCy OFESOL EE SENSe TIQ BANDwidth BWIDth MOBE tertiae EC ecd aati ttp DU Li aes SENS amp IQ BANDwidth BWIDth RESOluti n 5 2 31 ntt rrt poco te tok ee E RD SERA SENSe IQ EF E Tun DEE SENSE NO FFT LENG
481. rage date and time and the storage type During recall save sets of type All channels replace the measurement settings of the entire software All other save sets start a new measurement channel with the stored settings Storage Type Save only Defines which type of settings is to be stored in the save set All channels The measurement settings for all currently active channels are stored Current Chan Only the measurement settings for the currently selected measure nel ment channel are stored Recall Restores the channel settings as saved in the selected settings file If the settings file contains settings for a specific channel only a new channel with the stored settings is activated otherwise the entire measurement settings are loaded Note If a measurement channel with the same name as the channel to be restored in a new channel is already active the channel name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings IQ Analyzer ES IQ Analyzer 2 In remote commands you must append this number to the channel name as well Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 393 8 2 2 Configurable Storage and Recall The more sophisticated storage and recall functions allow you to define which settings are stored and where the settings file is stored to Any settings file can be selected for recall e Stored Data Types ee et ete E t eR E Dr dp
482. ramData Rohde Schwarz VSE version user QuickSave directory in files named QuickSavel dfltoQuickSavelO dfl The storage file names and locations cannot be changed During recall save sets of type All channels replace the settings of the entire soft ware All other save sets start a new measurement channel with the stored settings If a measurement channel with the same name as the channel to be restored is already active the channel name for the new channel is extended by a consecutive number V IQ Analyzer Quick Save Quick Recall Settings The QuickSave dialog box is displayed when you select the Save icon in the toolbar The Quick Recall dialog box is displayed when you select the amp Open icon in the toolbar or select the Quick Recall tab in the Save dialog box Both dialog boxes are very similar and closely related Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings Mo Okt 6 2014 13 47 02 QuickSave 2 QuickSave 3 QuickSave 4 QuickSave 5 All Channels QuickSave 6 QuickSave 7 QuickSave 8 QuickSave 9 QuickSave 10 Type Current Channel IQ Analyzer OQuickoave 17 5 7 QUICKSaVe TOi oet da e eor n a a 78 Storage Type Save EE 78 Recall LEM 78 QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled At the time of storage the QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the sto
483. rcentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit Example DISP WIND SGR COL LOW 10 Sets the start of the color map to 10 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 179 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor SHAPe Shape DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe Shape This command defines the shape and focus of the color curve for the spectrogram result display Parameters lt Shape gt Shape of the color curve Range 1 to 1 RST 0 Manual operation See Shape on page 179 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor UPPer Percentage DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor UPPer Percentage This command defines the end point of the color map Parameters Percentage Statistical frequency percentage Range 0 to 66 RST 0 Default unit 96 13 6 2 3 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Example DISP WIND SGR COL UPP 95 Sets the start of the color map to 9596 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 179 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SGRam COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SPECtrogram COLor STYLe lt ColorScheme gt This command selects the color scheme Parameters lt ColorScheme gt HOT Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low lev els red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low lev els blue colors indicate high ones RADar Uses a color range from black
484. rd length Depending on the selected RBW mode the value is either determined automatically or can be defined manually As soon as you enter a value in the input field the RBW mode is changed to Manual This setting is only available if a Spectrum window is active If the Advanced Fourier Transformation Params option is enabled advanced FFT mode is selected and the RBW cannot be defined directly Note that the RBW is correlated with the Sample Rate and Record Length and possi bly the Window Function and Window Length Changing any one of these parameters may cause a change to one or more of the other parameters For more information see chapter 10 2 3 1 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW on page 119 Auto mode Default The RBW is determined automatically depending on the Sample Rate and Record Length A single window function is used window length record length The number of measurement points is automatically adapted to the FFT length Manual mode The RBW can be defined by the user The user defined RBW is used and the Window Length and possibly Sample Rate are adapted accordingly A single window function is used window length record length Advanced This mode is used if the Advanced Fourier Transformation Params FFT mode option is enabled The RBW is determined by the advanced FFT parameters An averaging window function can be used window length s record length Remote command SENSe IQ BA
485. re rine nnne iiio nnne inna anna aan nenas 421 Programming Exampl es 11 ciciee eine eee nima aiiis a ssa nnno aaa a ERE Esa ka aano sanas 423 Configuring File Irt concert ceteri ce eec ate 423 Configuring Input from an Instrument 424 Performing a Sequence of Measuremente ee 425 Basie VO ANAY Sec 426 13 12 5 13 12 6 13 12 7 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 A 1 A 1 1 A 1 2 A 2 A 3 AA A 5 A 5 1 A 5 2 A 5 3 A 5 4 Recording VQ DR EE 431 Saving and Loading Measurement SettingS 0 cccccececeeeseeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeesenaeeneees 431 Programming Example Complete Sequential Measurement with Data Export 432 Dii g cjnMee E 439 Troubleshooting Remote Operation essen 439 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode eee 440 Obtaining Technical Support eeeeeseseeeeseseeeeeee eren 441 lcg vr THIS 442 Menu EE e 442 Common R amp S VSE Menus nennen enne nn nnne nnne 442 UO Analyzer Menus nennen nennen enn nent enne n nnn nnn nnns 445 Reference of Toolbar Functions eeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeenennnennnnne nennen nennen nnns 447 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 451 Reference Format Description for UO Data Files eeesseeeeesss 451 Reference Supported File Formats ccccsssscecssseee
486. reas easily at any time 1 If necessary switch off zoom mode and return to selection mode by selecting the Selection mode icon in the toolbar 2 Toresize a zoom area set the mouse pointer directly on the corresponding frame in the overview window and drag the line to change the size of the frame To move a zoom area set the mouse pointer inside the corresponding frame in the overview window and drag the frame to the new position The contents of the zoom windows are adapted accordingly 11 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input How To Perform Measurements with the R amp S VSE The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to load and store UO data and perform basic measurements with the R amp S VSE in general and how to configure data acquisition and analyze data in the UO Analyzer application How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input 211 How to Import KO Data for Analysis reo re RP rs Pa rea Ete Yt 213 How to Perform Measurements on Multiple Files and Instruments 214 How to Perform a Sequence of Measurements on a Single File or Instrument 215 How to Save and Load Measurement Gettimngs AAA 216 Howto Export VO Data etre cerae tee ete ee eR rte 217 How to Capture Baseband UO Data in the I Q Analyzer 218 How to Analyze Data in the Q Analyzer cemere naa 219 How to Pe
487. red offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal For attenuation define a positive offset so the R amp S VSE increases the displayed power values If an external gain is applied define a negative offset so the R amp S VSE decreases the displayed power values Configuration Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S VSE must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Example 1 Theinitial reference level is 2 dBm with no offset Both the displayed reference level and the internal reference level are 2 dBm 2 An offset of 3 dB is defined The displayed reference level is adjusted to 5 dBm The internal reference level remains at 2 dBm 5 dBm displayed ref level 3 dB offset 2 dBm 3 Now the user decreases the reference level to 1 dBm The displayed reference level is adjusted to 1 dBm The internal reference level is adjusted to 1 dBm displayed ref level 3 dB offset 2 dBm RF Attenuation The attenuation is meant to protect the input mixer from high RF input levels The level at the input mixer is determined by the set RF attenuation according to the formula leVEl mixer leveliy RF attenuation The
488. rentVersion policies system 4 Set the value of DisableCad to 0 Administration rights Security policies of your network environment might prevent you from editing the sys tem registry or installing drivers Contact your IT administration in that case 3 4 Deinstalling R amp S VSE You can uninstall the software itself via the uninstall tool available in the Windows Start Menu folder Start gt All Programs gt Rohde Schwarz gt VSE gt version_num ber gt Uninstall VSE or via Add or Remove Software in the Windows Control Panel Capturing and Analyzing Data from a Connected Instrument 4 Trying Out the R amp S VSE 4 1 4 1 1 This chapter introduces the most important functions and settings of the R amp S VSE step by step The complete and detailed description of the functionality can be found in the subsequent chapters Basic instrument operation is described in chapter 6 Operating Basics on page 35 Prerequisites e The software is installed and started as described in chapter 3 Software Installa tion on page 12 For these first measurements you can use either a connected instrument in the net work or an input file e Capturing and Analyzing Data from a Connected Instrument 16 e Analyzing Stored Data from a File ioter nec 25 Capturing and Analyzing Data from a Connected Instrument The following example demonstrates how to perform a very simple
489. replaces any of the remaining characters in the file name thus means all files in a directory Path names Storage locations can be specified either as absolute including the entire path or rela tive paths including only subfolders of the current folder Use the MMEM CDIR query to determine the current folder 13 7 1 13 7 2 Managing Settings and Results e Restoring the Default Configuration Preset eene 383 e General Data Storage and Loading Commande AAA 383 e Selecting the Items to Store censenda tnn kann tre ea toa Enna ita da 389 e Storing and Loading Measurement Geitnges EE 392 e Exporting Recorded Be eia oe na ce oda 396 e Stoning or Printing Screenshots coat pedo p eredi 402 e Examples Managing Data 408 Restoring the Default Configuration Preset H KR E 383 Gv Tem bt Get CHANnell EvtECutel eene nennen nennen nnns 383 SYSTem PRESet This command presets the R amp S VSE Example SYST PRES Usage Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Restoring All Default Settings Preset All on page 75 See Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Configurations Preset All amp Delete Instruments on page 75 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default software settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the cha
490. requency the marker is currently positioned at in all frames CALC2 MARK1 SGR Y MIN Set marker 2 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram CALC2 MARK2 SGR XY MAX Set the deltamarker 1 to the frame number 3 By default it is set to the peak of that frame and displays the level difference to marker 1 Note the negative value CALC2 DELT1 SGR FRAM 3 Set deltamarker 1 to the minimum level in this frame CALC2 DELT1 MIN Set deltamarker 3 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram By default its value is the difference to marker 1 We will change it to refer to marker 2 CALC2 DELT3 SGR XY MAX CALC2 DELT3 MREF 2 Deltamarker 3 now refers to marker 2 both are positioned on the maximum of the spectrogram Thus D3 0 We will move deltamarker 3 to the next peak level for the same frequency CALC2 DELT3 SGR Y MAX NEXT Query the frequency x level y and frame values of marker 1 CALC2 MARK1 X CALC2 MARK1 Y CALC2 MARK1 SGR FRAM Query the frequency x level y and frame values of marker 2 CALC2 MARK2 X CALC2 MARK2 Y CALC2 MARK2 SGR FRAM Query the frequency x level y and frame values of deltamarker 1 CALC2 DELT1 X CALC2 DELT1 Y CALC2 DELT1 SGR FRAM Query the frequency x level y and frame values of deltamarker 3 Programming Examples CALC2 DELT3 X CALC2 DELT3 Y CALC2 DELT3 SGR FRAM Query the time st
491. rform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform a very simple mea surement on input from a connected instrument using the R amp S VSE 1 Configure a instrument from which data is to be captured a In the Instruments tool window select New Instrument b Select Search to search for all instruments in the network and select the instrument from which data is to be captured Alternatively enter the connection information for the new instrument manually c Select Connect to establish a connection to the specified instrument d If necessary select Self Alignment to calibrate the instrument e Optionally select Infos amp Settings to do one of the following e Configure the use of an external reference on the instrument e Control the display of the remote controlled instrument e Obtain information on the options installed on the connected instrument Assign the configured instrument to the default measurement channel a In the Measurement Group Setup tool window for the default group 1 select the icon in front of the default measurement channel IQ Analyzer b Select Instrument as the input type C If several instruments are configured select the instrument to be used for the measurement from the Instrument selection list d If optional interfaces for data input to the instrument are available select the input source to be used for the m
492. rigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 131 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with oUT Put JTRIGgereport 0TYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 131 See Level on page 132 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S VSE has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 132 This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the o
493. ring a Frequency Reference for the Connected Instrument 64 e Obtaining Information on Versions and Options on the instrument in use 66 7 2 1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols The software supports different interfaces and protocols for remote control The follow ing table gives an overview Configuring Instruments Table 7 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols VISA address string Remarks Local Area A HiSLIP High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol IVI 6 1 The interface is based on TCP IP and Network TCPIP host address hislip0O INSTR supports various protocols LAN e VXI 11 S TCPIP host address instO INSTR For a description of the protocols refer Library VISA n VXI 11 Protocol HiSLIP Protocol VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control using the indicated interfaces See also VISA library on page 54 7 2 1 1 LAN Interface For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol They are connected using a commercial RJ45 cable shielded or unshielded twisted pair category 5 The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the instrument Soft
494. rive Path Files Select the storage location of the settings file on the software or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version gt user 8 3 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evaluation Note that the ProgramData folder is not visible in the Windows Explorer in its default settings However if you enter the path with the file name you can access the files stored there See also Hidden folder on page 80 Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 384 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 79 Comment An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed Remote command MMEMory COMMent on page 385 Recording and Recalling Captured UO Data for Evalu ation By default when data is captured during a
495. rker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 352 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 350 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 353 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 351 Analysis Frame Spectrogram only Spectrogram frame the marker is assigned to Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 355 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 359 Marker Type v a Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default
496. romper 91 Settings 76 77 80 81 82 83 Recommendations Remote control programming sssse 248 Record length een Ae EES 118 UO data Recording Recording GMAMMEIS 011i iss cineri ene eti e Comment eun et E EE 24 84 85 Measurement Groups sese 68 Nurnber of records ciento iade 86 Record length 86 Settings 86 Settling Samples cc tn treten 87 Recording UO data Programming example sees 431 Records Nurmberto record EE Ref Level hardware setting Ref Lvi MKE EV 21i eis icit tete Gee Reference frequency Configuring Defatted were errr ree eer rerr ener i Instrument ES oor e see also External reference A 64 Reference level 133 136 Auto level 137 160 9 ES 136 Position ege gie 139 Setting to marker 203 VU ril eegene 136 M alU sies inet ird aH CE ethan Hh e 136 Reference Marker 2 eei cedet ere erede one 194 Reference value X axis Registers Remote control Ee EE GOMIQUIIAG ER EOTS dee zt Ignored commands Instrument behavior Interfaces Protocols 2 5 es Sequential commands Setting UP rccte ate rri enne Settings Starting fiel M Remote display Update EN 250 Remote operation see Remote control rsp iaaa siie 221 Repetition interv
497. rs Method SINGIe One FFT is calculated for the entire record length if the FFT length is larger than the record length see SENSe IO FFT LENGth and TRACe IQ RLENgth zeros are appended to the captured data AVERage Several overlapping FFTs are calculated for each record the results are averaged to determine the final FFT result for the record The user defined window length and window overlap are used see SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth and SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVERlap RST AVER Example IQ FFT ALG SING Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Transformation Algorithm on page 156 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer SENSe IQ FFT LENGth lt NoOfBins gt Defines the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the longer the calculation takes Parameters lt NoOfBins gt integer value Range 3 to 524288 RST 4096 Example IQ FFT LENG 2048 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See FFT Length on page 156 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow LENGth lt NoOfFFT gt Defines the number of samples to be included in a single FFT window when multiple FFT windows are used Parameters lt NoOfFFT gt integer value Range 3 to 1001 RST 1001 Example IQ FFT WIND LENG 500 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Window Length on page 156 SENSe IQ FFT WINDow OVERIap Rat
498. rs for setting and query lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Example DEV TARG TYPE SpecAnalyzer VXI11 Manual operation See Interface Type on page 57 13 4 1 2 Obtaining Information on Connected Instruments The following commands are required to query information on the firmware version and options installed on the instrument in use For details on options refer to the instrument s documentation lee Ee UC TO EE 265 prse le meni m ms 266 DEVYLCEINFO OPT 266 DEVice INFO HWINfo lt DevName gt This command queries hardware information for the instrument in use Query parameters lt DevName gt string Name of a configured instrument see DEVice CREate on page 262 Return values Info Example Usage Manual operation DEVice INFO IDN lt DevName gt Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data String containing the following information for every hardware component component name of the hardware component lt serial gt serial number of the component lt order gt order number of the component model model of the component code code of the component revision revision of the component DEV INFO HWIN SpecAnalyzer Queries the hardware information for the instrument named SpecAnalyzer FRONTEND 100001 003 1300 3009 03 01 00 0
499. rument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE i MAT on page 275 channel New Channel A selection list of available applications is displayed A new channel for the selected application is created For a list of available applications see chapter 5 2 Available Applications on page 32 Remote command INSTrument CREate NEW on page 286 INSTrument SELect on page 288 Duplicate Current Channel New Channel Alternatively to selecting a new application from the selection list of available applica tions you can duplicate the currently active channel In this case a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement settings is started The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecu tive number e g Spectrum Spectrum 2 Remote command INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 285 Replace Current Channel A selection list of available applications is displayed The currently selected channel is replaced by the selected application gt e Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences For a list of available applications see chapter 5 2 Available Applications on page 32 Remote command INSTrument CREate REPLace on page 286 Capture Starts a new measurement and restarts averaging for the measurement channel Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 284 Pause Cont Pause stops
500. rved 1 Resets the status registers RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands The command is equivalent to SYSTem PRESet Usage Setting only Manual operation See Restoring All Default Settings Preset All on page 75 See Restoring All Default Settings and Deleting Instrument Configurations Preset All amp Delete Instruments on page 75 SRE Contents Service request enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command deter mines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range 0 to 255 STB 8 Status byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only TRG i Trigger Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem Usage Event TST Self test query Initiates self tests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form see Ser vice Manual supplied with the instrument 0 indicates no errors occured Note If you start a self test remotely then select the Local softkey while the test is sti
501. s byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The ENAB1e parts of the status registers can be set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and ESE The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors occur The program should react appropriately to the service request Use of the command OPC to generate an SRQ at the end of a sweep 1 CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESE 1 SetbitO in the ESE Operation Complete R amp S VSE Network and Remote Operation peme M H 2 CALL InstrWrite analyzer SRE 32 Setbit 5 in the SRE ESB 3 CALL InstrWrite analyzer INIT OPC Generate an SRQ after operation complete After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only st
502. s String Ch n DeviceVersions String Ch lt n gt _FilterSettings FLAT GAUSS OFF Ch lt n gt _HighPassFilterState ON OFF Ch lt n gt _Impedance Ohm 50 75 Ch lt n gt _InputCoupling AC DC Ch lt n gt _InputPath RF Ch lt n gt _MeasBandwidth Hz double Ch lt n gt _NumberOfPostSamples Integer Ch lt n gt _NumberOfPreSamples Integer Ch lt n gt _PreampGain dB Integer Ch lt n gt _PreampState ON OFF Ch lt n gt _RefLevelOffset dB Double Ch lt n gt _RefLevel dBm Double Ch n RefOscillatorlnput OFF ON Ch n RefOscillatorFreq Hz Double Ch n TrgSource Extern 1 4 gt I Q Power IF Power RF Power Power Sensor Time Ch n TrgLevel dB Double Ch n TrgHysteresis dB Double Ch n TrgTpis s Double Ch n TrgOffset s Double Ch n TrgSlope Rising Falling Rising Falling Ch n TrgHoldoff s Double Ch n TrgDropOut s Double Ch n YigPreSelectorState ON OFF A 5 1 3 Example The following example demonstrates the XML description inside the iq tar file Reference Supported File Formats File Edit View Actions Tools Options Help ODBOR O E Encrypt CheckOut New Open Favorites Add Extract Delete E Folders v e Ek Name Type Modified Size Ratio Packed Path D max xml g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Open the xml file in a web browser If the stylesheet open Iq
503. s finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence short timeout OPC 3 Areturn value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 4 Resettimeout to former value 5 Clear the error queue with SYStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrup ted entries Using several threads in the controller application As an alternative provided the programming environment of the controller application supports threads separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for control ling the instrument s via SCPI A thread waiting for a OPC thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other instruments Remote Control Basics 12 1 5 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands see chapter 13 10 1 Using the Status Register on page 417 e Hierarchy of Status Reglsiers nennen 234 e Siructurgof a SGPI Status Register Deni at etas eee e er ecce 236 e Contents of the Status Registers urine citi aides 237 e Application of the Status Reporting Gv
504. s must have the same column count and are therefore right padded with white spaces Variable name Class Format UserData lt n gt char Optional Data Parameter name Value Table 1 11 Optional parameter names to be defined in UserData lt n gt variables Parameter name Possible Values Ch lt n gt _AttenuElecState ON OFF Ch lt n gt _AttenuElecValue_dB Integer Ch lt n gt _AttenuMech_dB Integer Ch lt n gt _CalibrationState ON OFF Ch n DeviceHwlnfo String Ch n Deviceld String Ch n DeviceOptions String Ch n DeviceVersions String Ch lt n gt _FilterSettings FLAT GAUSS OFF Reference Supported File Formats Parameter name Possible Values Ch n HighPassFilterState ON OFF Ch n Impedance Ohm 50 75 Ch n InputCoupling AC DC Ch lt n gt _InputPath RF Ch lt n gt _MeasBandwidth_Hz double Ch lt n gt _NumberOfPostSamples Integer Ch lt n gt _NumberOfPreSamples Integer Ch lt n gt _PreampGain_dB Integer Ch lt n gt _PreampState ON OFF Ch lt n gt _RefLevelOffset_dB Double Ch lt n gt _RefLevel_dBm Double Ch n RefOscillatorlnput OFF ON Ch n RefOscillatorFreq Hz Double Ch n TrgSource Extern 1 4 gt I Q Power IF Power RF Power Power Sensor Time Ch n TrgLevel dB Double Ch n TrgHysteresis dB Double Ch n TrgTpis s Double Ch n TrgOffset s Double Ch n TrgSlope Risin
505. s violated 3 LMARgin 4 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 4 is violated 4 LMARgin 5 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 5 is violated 5 LMARgin 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated 8 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register The STATus QUEStionable POWer register contains information about possible overload situations that may occur during operation of the instrument in use A sepa rate power register exists for each active channel Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition or STATUS Table 12 9 QUEStionable POWer EVENt Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable POWer register Bit No Meaning 0 OVERIoad This bit is set if an overload occurs at the RF input causing signal distortion but not yet causing damage to the device The R amp S VSE displays the keyword RF OVLD UNDerload This bit is set if an underload occurs at the RF input The R amp S VSE displays the keyword UNLD IF OVerload This bit is set if an overload occurs in the IF path The R amp S VSE displays the keyword IF OVLD Input Overload This bit is set if the signal level at the RF input connector exceeds the ma
506. same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout GLOBal IDENtify WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow TAB Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow TAB The new window is added as a new tab in the specified existing window See also Window tabs on page 45 lt NewChanName gt string Name of the channel for which a new window is to be added lt NewWinType gt string Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values Configuring the Result Display lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by Example Usage Table 13 2 WindowType parameter values for IQ Analyzer application default the same as its number as a result LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow IQ Analyzer l RIGH IQ Analyzer2 FREQ Adds a new window named Spectrum with a Spectrum display to the right of window 1 in the channel IQ Analyzer Query only Parameter value Window type FREQ Spectrum MAGN Magnitude MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RIMAG Real Imag UO VECT UO Vector Table 13 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for Pulse application Parameter value Window type MCAPture Magnitude Capture Buffer MTABle Marker Table PDIStribution Paramete
507. seatasassnesonsaadivtantassbacnabassdsiesunsadsssdantassssncataas 105 L Predefined COMPS i cccsiscscccdssssessssssvesssecssstonsecassssevessessssovsescdstsoneecsseennivevers 105 Mab A U 105 Defining User specific CGolors A 105 Restoring the User Settings to Default Colors rannen 106 Theme The theme defines the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen objects The default theme is PCSW Remote command DISPlay THEMe SELect on page 414 Display Settings Screen colors Two different color sets are provided by the software a third user defined set can be configured The default color schemes provide optimum visibility of all screen objects when regard ing the screen from above or below Default setting is Default Colors 1 If User Defined Colors is selected a user defined color set can be defined see Defining User specific Colors on page 105 Remote command DISPlay CMAP item DEFault colors on page 413 Print colors Defines the color settings used for printout In addition to the predefined settings a user defined color set can be configured see Defining User specific Colors on page 105 If Show Print Colors on Display is activated the currently selected print colors are displayed as a preview for your selection Optimized Colors Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visi bility of the colors default setting Trace
508. sed protocol HiSlip High performance protocol Remote command DEVice TARGet TYPE on page 265 IP address Unique IP address of the connected instrument The five most recently selected IP addresses are available from the dropdown list To delete this list select File gt Preset gt Reset VSE Layout see Restoring User Specific Settings Reset VSE Layout on page 76 The IP address consists of four number groups separated by dots Each group con tains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a group as an example see the pre installed address For information on how to determine the IP address see the instrument s documenta tion Remote command DEVice TARGet on page 264 DEVice TARGet on page 264 Resource String VISA resource string used by the R amp S VSE to identify and control the connected instrument The five most recently selected resource strings are available from the dropdown list Configuring Instruments To delete this list select File gt Preset gt Reset VSE layout see Restoring User Spe cific Settings Reset VSE Layout on page 76 For details see chapter 7 2 1 1 LAN Interface on page 54 Advanced Settings Opens the VISA Resource String Builder which supports you in determining the required resource string see chapter 7 2 3 Determining the Address with Software Support on page 58 Calibration State Self Alignmen
509. selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Configuration 10 3 2 Data Input and Output Settings The R amp S VSE can control the input sources and output connectors of the connected instruments These functions are available from the Input amp Output menu e Radio Frequency Inpll 2 iind ette e e eet dd 128 WU WN sc 129 LONE rcu c 130 10 3 2 1 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the instrument in use is Radio Frequency Input Coupling VQ File Impedance 50 759 High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz On YIG Preselector On zm Radio Frequetney State EE 128 det T 128 I UI COUN DL 128 Inuyertoripcm E 129 High Pass Filter 1 9 GHZ iere eren nier ed e ri n eec eens 129 kale EE 129 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 309 Instrument Specifies a configured instrument to be used for input Input Coupling The RF input of the instrument in use can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct current DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default
510. ses only a limited number of samples to calculate an individual result This process is called windowing After sampling in the time domain each window is multiplied with a specific window function Windowing helps minimize the discontinuities at the end of the measured sig nal interval and thus reduces the effect of spectral leakage increasing the frequency resolution Various different window functions are provided in the R amp S VSE to suit different input signals Each of the window functions has specific characteristics including some advantages and some trade offs These characteristics need to be considered carefully to find the optimum solution for the measurement task e Ignoring the window function rectangular window The regtangular window function is in effect not a function at all it maintains the origi nal sampled data This may be useful to minimize the required bandwidth however be aware that if the window does not contain exactly one period of your signal heavy sidelobes may occur which do not exist in the original signal Table 10 1 Characteristics of typical FFT window functions Window type Frequency Magnitude Sidelobe sup Measurement recommendation resolution resolution pression Rectangular Best Worst Worst No function applied Separation of two tones with almost equal amplitudes and a small fre quency distance Blackman Harris Good Good Good Harmonic detection and spurious d
511. setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted 10 3 2 2 Configuration However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 308 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the instrument in use can be set to 50 Q or 75 O 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 309 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function may require an additional hardware option on the instrument in use Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 308 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the instrument in use An internal YIG preselector at the input of the instrument in use ensures that image fre quencies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use th
512. sides the entry field 3 Enter the first characters of the keyword you are interested in The entries containing these characters are displayed 5 Double click the suitable index entry The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed To search topics for a text string 1 Switch to the Search tab 2 Select the Keyboard icon besides the entry field 3 Enter the string you want to find If you enter several strings with blanks between topics containing all words are found same as AND operator For advanced search consider the following e To find a defined string of several words enclose it in quotation marks For example a search for trigger qualification finds all topics with exactly trigger qualification A search for trigger qualification finds all topics that contain the words trigger and qualification e Use Match whole word and Match case to refine the search e Use operators AND OR and NOT Getting Help To close the Help window gt Select the Close icon in the upper right corner of the help window Or Press the ESC key on the front panel i 7 1 Input Sources Controlling Instruments and Capturing UO Data A key feature of the R amp S VSE is the ability to capture data from various instruments or retrieve data from stored measurement files and to analyze this data in various appli cations e MAUR le 52 e Configuring Instruments AAA 53 e Controlling Measureme
513. sing SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem ERRor ALL Each call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Espe cially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regu larly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 12 1 5 5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except RST and SYSTem PRESet influence the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 12 12 Resetting the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL RST or STA CLS voltage SDC SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Device Tem PRE Set Clear Clear Set Selected Device Eff 0 1 ect Clear Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Remote Control Basics Event Switching on supply DCL RSTor STA CLS voltage SDC SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Device SE RE Set Clear Clear el Selected Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear PPE
514. sis Bandwidth ABW 25 6 MHz FFT Length 1024 Maximum Bandwidth STET sco mHz Window Function Flattop amplitude acg sl Meas Time 31281 us Window Overlap 075 Record Length 1001 Window Length 1001 swan 00 on EN Frequency Resolution RBW 122 5654345654346 kHz ENETEB o d Fig 10 9 Data acquisition settings with advanced FFT parameters The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chap ter 13 6 1 6 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 328 eiusd D eet gine a edi ee E vee 153 Analysis Le s oat opea oae vta pt xod ad bete pee es 153 Maximum Barngdwidih oe cedente eene ec tec re 154 Meas TIR ioter ee Ere d e n t Pe e aie een eru e 154 Record Is gs E 154 SWAP O 154 ROW M 155 Advanced FFT mode Basic eeitlngs eene 155 ie GER TEE 156 QNT MERE S UN na 156 E Window FINE cosmetic ortu ett ente ema itc iati enti 156 e EE 156 L Window Denali sepe rete sisti tes er Peri ERE PE UE CERN 156 Sample Rate Defines the UO data sample rate of the R amp S VSE This value is dependent on the defined Analysis Bandwidth and the defined signal source sample rate analysis bandwidth 0 8 For details on the dependencies see chapter 10 2 2 Sample Rate Record Length and Analysis Bandwidth on page 118 Remote co
515. sition part 3 2 1 0 gt e 15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 0 pete dete ded gt Xy oe Y y Y 15 14 13 12 EVEN part 3 2 1 0 Er all bits Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit of the STB or into the CONDition bit of a superordinate register Logical AND of EVENt and ENABle bits 12 ENABle part 3j 2 10 Fig 12 2 The status register model Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions e CONDition The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflect the current instrument status This register 12 1 5 3 Remote Control Basics part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading PTRansition NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part none 0 to 1 1 to O or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 71 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 20 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents
516. source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 131 Configuration 10 2 4 2 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the instrument in use the R amp S VSE can use a signal from an external reference as a trigger to capture data Alternatively the internal trigger signal used by the instrument in use can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to synchronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S VSE Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S VSE is provided by an external reference the refer ence signal source must be connected to the instrument in use and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S VSE Trigger output The instrument in use can provide output to another device either to pass on the inter nal trigger signal or to indicate that the instrument in use itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the instrument in use automatically or manually by the user If it is provided automatically a high signal is output when the instrument in use has triggered due to a measurement start Device Triggered or when the instru ment in use is ready to receive a trigger signal after a measurement start Trigger Armed Manual triggering
517. spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 368 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 368 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 369 CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 369 CALCulatecn CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 369 E ELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 369 pg gt CALCulate lt n gt MINimum PEAK on page 369 Tamarker lt m e CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 370 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGGbam ERAMe nennen nennen 359 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe sese 359 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SARea sse 359 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SAReoa sse 359 CAL Culate nz DEI TamarkercmzGGbam XZ MAximumt PEART 360 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK cecus 360 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzGGbam Xv MiNimumtPEAKT nen eneneeeeneeeo 360 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzGbEChrooram SZ MiNimumfPEART nen enneneenene 3
518. sponding EVENt register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 13 11 Retrieving Error Messages AH Te NB 421 SYSTem ERRoOCEXTendad E 421 SY STOM E BH ets 422 SV Slem ERT an teme EE 423 SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL This command deletes all contents of the System Messages table Example SYST ERR CLE ALL Usage Event SYSTem ERRor EXTended lt MessageType gt lt ChannelName gt This command queries all system messages or all messages of a defined type dis played in the status bar for a specific measurement channel application Note This command queries the strings displayed for manual operation For remote programs do not define processing steps depending on these results Instead query the results of the STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO status register which indicates whether messages of a certain type have occurred see STATus QUEStion able EXTended INFO Register on page 241 Retrieving Error Messages Query parameters lt MessageT ype gt ALL INFO WARNing ERRor FATal MESSage lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Return values lt Messages gt String containing all messages of the s
519. ss 312 ISENSeTADJUSEDEEVOl trier eee er ote E ET OA cedens 312 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Reference Level Marker Level on page 203 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 136 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 136 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for
520. ssss POSSIO Mr Positioning meme Positioning remote control Querying position remote i Retrieving results remote sssssssss Search remote Control assessorist Setting center frequency Setting reference level Spectrograms 2 nets a Spectrograms remote control ss State oes eee ieri Step size remote control Table nehme Table evaluation method Table remote control seessssse UE Trying out Type P TIU EET mat File format oie teh nde ead 88 matlab File forttial cits iet e tette edis 453 Matlab Example fil amp iensor eaea a 463 File format 460 Mandatory data elements 461 Optional data elements issiimti 461 MAX e H 227 Maximizing Spectrogram remote A 345 Windows remote 946 Meas Time hardware setting sss 42 Measurement ojo DEMEURE 162 Measurement channel Creating remote 286 288 291 292 293 Deleting remote AA 287 292 Duplicating remote ni ccs eee etes 285 Querying remote 287 293 295 Renaming remote eene 288 Replacing remote Selecting remote Measurement channels Activating Deactivating sisirain 71 e UNE e 29 Adding ite Basics
521. st in the toolbar or select a marker from the Marker Select Marker menu the marker is activated and an edit dialog box is displayed to enter the marker position X value If a spectrogram is active the frame number x 0 in which the marker is to be placed can also be defined To deactivate a marker select the marker name in the marker selection list in the tool bar not the arrow to display the Select Marker dialog box Change the State to Off Marker 1 is always the default reference marker for relative measurements If activa ted markers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display using the Marker Type function Several markers can be configured very easily using the Marker dialog box see chapter 10 4 2 2 Marker Settings on page 191 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 352 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 353 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 350 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 351 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 380 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 380 For spectrogram display CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 359 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe on page 355 Selected Ma
522. started simultaneously and performed once After all measure ments are completed the next group is started After the last group the measurement sequence is finished CONTinuous Each measurement group is started one after the other in the order of definition All measurement channels in a group are started simultaneously and performed once After all measure ments are completed the next group is started After the last group the measurement sequence restarts with the first one and continues until it is stopped explicitely see Play on page 68 RST CONTinuous Manual operation See Measurement mode Single Continuous on page 68 INSTrument SEQuencer LIST This command queries all active groups in a measurement sequence This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing groups which are required in order to replace or delete the groups Return values Groups Comma separated list of strings containing the name of an active group Example INST SEQ LIST Result for 2 groups Group 1 Group 2 Usage Query only 13 5 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 Operating Basics on page 35 e Global Layout Commande 296 e Working with Windows in the Display 302 e General Window Commandes sss eene nennen nnne 307 13 5 1 d Configuring the R
523. stem 245 e Reset Values of the Status Reporting Gvsiem 247 12 1 5 1 Hierarchy of Status Registers As shown in the following figure the status information is of hierarchical structure R amp S VSE amp logic AND QD logic OR one register for each channel of all bits ajojn a o o o Oo ge e v SRE o 4 D PPE e ISTflag Error Event Queue Output not used Range completed Multi Standard Capture Finish HCOPy in progress Waiting for TRIGger MEASuring SWEeping CALibrating STATus OPERation not used DIQ MARGin LIMit CALibration ZUNCAL TEMPerature POWer not used GAP ACLR FAIL CACLR FAIL ALT3 11 LOWer UPPer FAIL ALT2 LOWer FAIL ALT2 UPPer FAIL ALT1 LOWer FAIL ALT1 UPPer FAIL ADJ LOWer FAIL ADJ UPPer FAIL Network and Remote Operation pem c O ees not used LMARgin 8 FAIL LMARgin 7 FAIL LMARgin 6 FAIL LMARgin 5 FAIL LMARgin 4 FAIL LMARgin 3 FAIL LMARgin 2 FAIL LMARgin 1 FAIL 15 14 13 12 11 spefste sTe e sTe e 8 not used External REFerence LO UNLocked OVEN COLD STAT QUES FREQuency not used T 9 fe 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Frontend temp error ne TIME not used LIMit 8 FAIL LI
524. t Indicates whether the connected instrument is calibrated If necessary a self alignment can be initiated on the connected instrument see chapter 7 2 6 Initializing a Self Alignment on the instrument in use on page 63 Connection State Indicates the current state of the connection to the specified instrument in the network Remote command DEVice STATe on page 263 Infos amp Settings Displays additional information on the connected instrument if available See chap ter 7 2 9 Obtaining Information on Versions and Options on the instrument in use on page 66 Remote command DEVice INFO HWINfo on page 265 DEVice INFO OPT on page 266 DEVice INFO IDN on page 266 Connect Disconnect Establishes a connection to the specified instrument in the network or disconnects an existing connection Remote command DEVice CREate On page 262 7 2 3 Determining the Address with Software Support If you do not know the network address of the connected instrument the R amp S VSE software can help you determine the correct connection information using the VISA Resource String Builder In the Instruments tool window select Advanced Configuring Instruments Alias Timeout wa Remote Interface Assistant Interface Type Address Board Number Po LAN device name VISA Resource String Status EE MINA NT em Check glate DEE 59 Interface TV eon dente rer vue t dedica a eva du
525. t Theme This command selects the display theme Parameters Theme String containing the name of the theme RST SPL Example DISP THEM SEL OceanBlue Manual operation See Theme on page 103 Configuring the Software 13 8 4 CMAP Suffix Assignment Several commands to change the color settings of individual items of the display or printout are available Which item is to be configured is defined using a CMAP suffix The following assignment applies Suffix Description CMAP1 Background CMAP2 Grid CMAP3 Common Text CMAP4 Check Status OK CMAP5 Check Status Error CMAPS Text Special 1 CMAP7 Text Special 2 CMAP8 Trace 1 CMAP9 Trace 2 CMAP10 Trace 3 CMAP11 Marker Info Text CMAP12 Limit Lines CMAP13 Limit and Margin Check Pass CMAP14 Limit and Margin Check Fail CMAP15 Softkey Text CMAP16 Softkey Background CMAP17 Selected Field Text CMAP18 Selected Field Background CMAP19 Softkey 3D Bright Part CMAP20 Softkey 3D Dark Part CMAP21 Softkey State On CMAP22 Softkey State Dialog open CMAP23 Softkey Text Disabled CMAP24 Logo CMAP25 Trace 4 CMAP26 Grid Minorlines CMAP27 Marker CMAP28 Display Lines CMAP29 Sweepcount Text 13 9 Commands for Remote Instrument Operation Suffix Description CM
526. t 10 0 dB Input Coupling DC Unit dBm EVITE Impedance 750 Electronic Attenuation State On Value 0 0 dB RF Attenuation Mode amog Manual EE E 136 L Shifting the Display Offsel E 136 LL cn 136 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 137 Configuration PARE ANTES UOI cos eere tte retraites het e eue cse dirt tae une t RENE Maa CER RE xs 137 L Attenuation Mode Value secs siio ident cerra dani ecd 137 Using Electronic Attenuation c ccccccecctteseseceetenaesececctaessececnepeseceeteeetecdscctenecaeesteeene 137 geris S P 138 L Preamplifier sse enne 138 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the instrument in use is adapted according to this value it is rec ommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio For details see Reference Level on page 133 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 311 Shifting t
527. t DestinationFile gt String containing the path and name of the target file The path may be relative or absolute Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DATA lt FileName gt lt Block gt This command writes block data into a file The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error free data transfer When you query the contents of a file you can save them in a file on the remote con trol computer The command is useful for reading stored settings files or trace data from the software or for transferring them to the software Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file lt Block gt Data block with the following structure Hash sign lt number gt Length of the length information lt number gt Length information of the binary data number of bytes lt data gt Binary data with the indicated lt number gt of bytes Example MMEM NAME Public User Testfile txt Creates a new file called testfile txt MMEM DATA Testfile txt 220Contents of the file The parameter means 2 hash sign and length of the length information 20 bytes 2 digits 20 indicates the number of subsequent binary data bytes Contents of the file store 20 binary bytes characters to the file Usage SCPI confirmed MMEMory DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a file Managing Settings and Results Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file na
528. t WindowName gt String containing the name of the window Usage Event LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow lt ExChannelName gt lt WindowName gt lt NewChannelName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout GLOBal ADD WINDow command Parameters lt ExChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel in which a window is to be replaced The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Configuring the Result Display lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout GLOBal CATalog WINDow query lt NewChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel for which a new win dow will be created lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window Note that the window type must be valid for the specified chan nel lt NewChannelName gt See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY GLOB REPL WIND IQ Analyzer 1 AnalogDemod MTAB Replaces the UO Analyzer result display in window 1 by a marker table for the AnalogDemod channel 13 5 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the ev
529. t a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND e Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 559 Remote Control Basics e Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command The response 3 5E9 in the previous example stands for 3 5 GHz e Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 e Text character data is returned in a short form Example Setting command HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND 12 1 4 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands Asequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands e An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement resul
530. t be completed correctly FATal This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possi ble 5 to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus Remote Control Basics QUEStionable FREQuency Register The STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register contains information about the condi tion of the local oscillator and the reference frequency A separate frequency register exists for You can read out the register with STA Tus QU CONDition or STATus QUI each active channel EStionable FREQuency EStionable FREQuency EVENt Table 12 6 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register Bit No Meaning 1 LO UNLocked This bit is set if the local oscillator no longer locks LOUNL is displayed 2to7 Not used 8 EXTernalREFerence This bit is set if you have selected an external reference oscillator but did not connect a useable external reference source In that case the synthesizer can not lock The frequency in all probability is not accurate 9 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register The STATus QUEStionable LIMit register contains information about the results of a limit chec k when you are working with limit lines A separate LIMit register exists for each active channel and for each window You can read out the register with STATus OUI C
531. t is restarted from the beginning Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data As opposed to INI Tiate BLOCk IMMediate on page 291 this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to con tinue measurements using max hold or averaging functions Parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group for which the measure ment is continued If no group parameter is provided the currently selected group is continued see INSTrument BLOCk SELect on page 293 Usage Event Manual operation See Pause Cont on page 70 INITiate BLOCk CONTinuous State lt GroupName gt Defines the capture mode for the measurement group and channels it contains For details see Measurement mode on page 31 To change the capture mode for an individual channel use the INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous command Note In order to synchronize to the end of a measurement sequence using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e capture mode If the capture mode is changed for a measurement channel while a measurement sequence is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST OFF Setting parameters lt GroupName gt String containing the name of the group for which
532. t the storage location of the settings file on the software or an external drive Storing and Recalling Measurement Settings The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz VSE lt version gt user Note that the ProgramData folder is not visible in the Windows Explorer in its default settings However if you enter the path with the file name you can access the files stored there See also Hidden folder on page 80 Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 384 File Name Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 For details on the file name and location see chapter 8 2 2 2 Storage Location and File Name on page 79 Comment An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed Remote command MMEMory COMMent on page 385 File Type Determines whether the global software settings with all channels will be stored or recalled or the current channel settings only Items
533. tarting at 0 32 s and ending at 0 64 s of the captured data Manual operation See Playback Settings on page 95 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt lQTar lt FileName gt lt ABW gt lt IQChannel Assigns the specified iq tar file as the input source for the currently selected channel The file is automatically loaded to the R amp S VSE software and assigned the sequential number provided as the FILE lt i gt suffix Subsequent commands concerning file input from this file must use the same suffix To query the values of the stored meta data after loading the file see EXPort 10 META DATA lt I gt VALue on page 398 Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of the source Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and file name of the file to be loaded lt ABW gt IQChannel Example Manual operation Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data The analysis bandwidth to be used by the measurement The bandwidth must be smaller than or equal to the bandwidth of the data that was stored in the file Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the ABW is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 ID of the UO channel in the stored file which is to be restored to the selected measurement channel If this parameter is omitted the first channel found is restored Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE softw
534. te Activates and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow Split Displays the Spectrogram as a subwindow in the original result dis play Full Displays the Spectrogram in a subwindow in the full size of the origi nal result display Off Closes the Spectrogram subwindow Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram STATe on page 346 CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram SIZE on page 345 Selecting a frame to display Selects a specific frame loads the corresponding trace from the memory and displays itin the Spectrum window Note that activating a marker or changing the position of the active marker automati cally selects the frame that belongs to that marker This function is only available in single sweep mode or if the sweep is stopped and only if a spectrogram is selected The most recent frame is number 0 all previous frames have a negative number For more details see Time Frames on page 169 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect on page 345 Analysis History Depth Sets the number of frames that the R amp S VSE stores in its memory If the memory is full the R amp S VSE deletes the oldest frames stored in the memory and replaces them with the new data Remote command CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 345 Color Mapping Opens the Color Map dialog For details see Color Maps on page 170 Clear Spectrogram Resets the spectrogram result display and clears the history
535. te lt n gt SGRam FRAMe COUNt lt Frames gt CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe COUNt lt Frames gt This command defines the number of frames to be recorded in a single capture lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frames gt The maximum number of frames depends on the history depth Range 1 to history depth Increment 1 RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single capture mode CALC SGR FRAM COUN 200 Sets the number of frames to 200 Manual operation See Frame Count on page 159 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt SGRam FRAMe SELect Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram FRAMe SELect Frame Time This command selects a specific frame for further analysis lt n gt is irrelevant The command is available if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended Parameters lt Frame gt Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth lt Time gt Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example INIT CONT OFF Stop the continuous sweep CALC SGR FRAM SEL 25 Selects frame number 25 Manual operation See Selecting a frame to display on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt SGRam HDEPth History CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram HDEPth History This command defines the
536. texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values In the case of a query the numeric value is provided e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value e DEF DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command e UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN e INF NINF Remote Control Basics INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses e NAN Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as a instru ment response This value is not defined Possible causes are the division of zero by zero the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values Example Setting command SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Query SENS LIST FREQ Response 3 5E9 Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered follow ing the quotation mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states
537. the current frequency range Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 160 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S VSE or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 137 13 6 2 UO Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers etc can be configured using the following commands They are identical to the analysis functions in the Spec trum application except for the special marker functions e Comfiguting Standard We 339 Configuring KEE e EE 343 USING MET 348 e Zooming Into the Depense AANEREN Feed d des 372 13 6 2 1 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 316 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 315 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration NEGER Tee EN e le RTE 339 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectMODE HCOh
538. the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Configuring the Result Display To remove a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REMove WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 302 for a list of availa ble window types Note that the window type must be valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the L
539. the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Common Suffixes In the UO Analyzer application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Suffix Value range Description m 1 Marker 1 16 Deltamarker n 1 16 Window t 1 6 Trace Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi ces The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands uo 257 KE EE 258 NIE 258 ucl 2 V 258 ION ctore eret iere er a habe Lever eene e EP xtd vd nta eve rede pe cid ve deci ves 258 up ipe TREE TE TTD aesent 258 KO 0 T 259 uep m aah 259 POB mI mL 259 n lee EET 259 lj M RR 259 d cime eidasiegaqapiamieuentauiesneibtistequgs Gin ureiiasae mantels 260 ic lE 260 H t P 260 lice 260 ucro EUNDUM TT 261 WA
540. the results at different settings with the known characteristics of the instrument s high precision calibration signal source To start a self alignment gt In the Instruments tool window Window gt Instruments in the configuration area for the instrument select Self Alignment As a result the R amp S VSE indicates that the instrument is calibrated 7 2 7 Configuring the Behavior During Remote Control When the R amp S VSE software is used to capture and analyze input from a connected instrument the instrument is operated in remote mode Some general settings are available to define how the instrument behaves during remote control bfe amp SetngeFWa Remote Display Local Lockout Off Display Update ECH on These settings are available from the Instruments tool window Window gt Instru ments In the configuration area for the instrument select Infos amp Settings then select the General tab Bee e 64 Display WG ates E HU 64 Configuring Instruments Local Lockout If enabled the instrument is set to be controlled remotely that is by the R amp S VSE soft ware and the keys or graphical user interface are disabled Remote command DEVice GENeral LLO on page 267 Display Update Defines whether the instrument display is updated or switched off when changing from manual operation to remote control Remote command DEVice GENeral DISPlay on page 267 7 2 8 Configuring
541. the same frequency CALC2 MARK3 SPEC Y MAX NEXT CALC2 MARK3 X CALC2 MARK3 Y Set marker 4 to the highest level in the visible spectrogram 13 12 5 Programming Examples CALC2 MARK SPEC SAR VIS CALC2 MARK4 SPEC XY MAX Move marker 4 to the next higher level in the frames above its current position CALC2 MARK4 SPEC Y MAX ABOV Recording UO Data This example demonstrates how to record UO data in a remote environment It assumes a measurement has been configured as described in chapter 13 12 4 Basic UO Analysis on page 426 How to recall recorded UO data in a remote environment is described in chap ter 13 12 1 Configuring File Input on page 423 13 12 6 Configure recording eeexx x Store most recent 10 measurements 10 1000 records REC COUN 10 REC MAX RLEN OFF Configure default comment to be FSW data REC COMM FSW data Store additional samples for settling time for demonstration purposes only REC SETT TIME ON Perform the measurement xx INST SEL My IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN REC Export the recorded data Include minimum set of meta data except for input path plus preamplifier input impedance EXP IQ META DATA SET MIN EXP IQ META DATA SET CUST EXP IQ META DATA SET InputCoupling OFF EXP IQ META DATA SET PreampState ON Store the data to an iq tar file EXP IQ FORM IQTAR EXP IQ FILE C Pr
542. the span of the input signal to be cap tured for analysis or the rate at which samples are captured both values are correlated e Optionally if a bandwidth extension for 160 MHz or 320 MHz is installed on the instrument the Maximum Bandwidth depending on whether you require a larger bandwidth or not e Measurement Time how long the data is to be captured e Record Length the number of samples to be captured also defined by sam ple rate and measurement time 7 Switch to the Capture tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box and define the number of measurements to be performed Capture Count The setting Capture Count 0 is only useful for continuous capture mode 8 From the Window menu select New Window and then the result displays that are of interest to you Arrange the windows on the display to suit your preferences by moving them around or changing their size see also chapter 6 3 Customizing the User Inter face on page 43 9 Perform a measurement with the defined settings as described in chapter 11 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement with Instrument Input on page 211 11 8 How to Analyze Data in the I Q Analyzer 1 Select the I Q Analyzer measurement channel 2 Select the Meas Setup Overview menu item to display the configuration Over view How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer 3 Select the Analysis button to make use of the advanced analysis functions in the displays For
543. tion String Indicates the instrument identification for the selected instrument The syntax is Rohde amp Schwarz instrument type part number gt serial number firmware version Remote command DEVice INFO IDN on page 266 ion Sdn a list of all hardware and software options installed on the instruement For details on options refer to the instrument s documentation Remote command DEVice INFO HWINfo on page 265 DEVice INFO OPT on page 266 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences 7 3 Controlling Measurement Channels Groups and Sequences Measurement channels groups and sequences are configured and controlled in the Measurement Group Setup tool window ced scnce e E 67 e Group le ern iot tete atit ni b t cte ee edet rad 68 e Channel FUNCIONS EE 70 7 3 1 Sequence Functions Measurement sequences can perform multiple measurements on the same instrument without switching between measurement channels manually Measurement sequences consist of a number of measurement groups and each group may contain multiple channels For details see Measurement groups and sequences on page 30 Instruments BESEEHUCIHEII SCIES UELUT New Group Channel Lui Replace Channel Group 2 E IQ Analyzer 2 ku oe x 3 C Instrument ersw 2s Input Source Instrument File File C VSE wedma_1_030_GHz iq tar m IQ Analyzer J P e
544. tionable status register and the associated ENABIe bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be speci fied in greater detail by querying the STATus QUEStionable status register 4 MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller R amp S VSE Network and Remote Operation Bit No Meaning 5 ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register 6 MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE 7 STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABIe bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE As with the SRQ the IST flag combines the
545. tnies 352 CAL Culatespnz MAREKGESINIS EE 353 GALGulatesn MARKer m X SLIMits EEF T eee tr trt rn rtp n tertie tee 363 GAL Culatesn MARKerem X SLIMits RIGELG T reor copa ripa epa tao dae Ey cep eee TE S Exp E rta pen Ep ena CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM STATe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMitS STAT E isiin sninen niara anai raadas aa CALC latesn MARKE SMA E GAL Gu latesn gt MARKETA e 381 GALGulate n MARKersm STATe6 iin iiio rt treten enr rn khe ether Pa ARETES cr Er o tinae 352 GALCulate n SGRam GLEar IMMedlate E 344 GALGulatesn SGRam GONT it tau xat rh Pepe cr th tot re ep eene HAYE E RE e XXE PREX AER dena eh CALCulate lt n gt SGRam FRAMe COUNt sis GAL Culatesn SGRam F RAMe SELGCL cnet concoattnosss cancunsedconcuseaes TAN n rE Eea AATE RE LUFT XXE NY GALGulate sn SGRam HBEPHh ent etn rr eror rr ener re enn rne in e P n eee EAE CALGulatesn gt SGRam SIZE etr e ENANA EONA ATES Er ENGESET TAISE NETEN STEN SENSA e Ber rdiet uro S eraun eoa rr AT ENNE SE Nn EE SEEE EEN EOE GALGulate n SGRam STATE siseses iia t repere e Eea Na Tair aait CALGulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CL Eat MMedatel aaa Naaa 344 CALCulate lt n gt SPECtrogram CONT GALCGulate n SPECtrogram F RAMe COUNNL rire tn th tnn irea i nde Eon 344 GALGCulate n SPECtrogram F RAMG amp SEL ect i irren horrere rre treten RR SEEEN 345 GAL Culate n gt SPEC trogram HIDE
546. to sample rate ratio of 0 8 and thus require an upsampler The additional sam ples compensate for settling effects in the filters used by the upsampler Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 RST OFF Manual operation See Additional Settling Samples on page 87 Managing Settings and Results 13 7 6 Storing or Printing Screenshots Useful commands to configure screenshots described elsewhere MMEMory NAME on page 387 Remote commands exclusive to configure screenshots piis oc E 402 HCOPN ABORL 402 HCOPy GMAP item DEFault Ccolots 2 tita ece creta aereis eee i cc ndun aeos essen dues 402 HEOPY CMAP we E 403 HCOPy CMAP item PDEFihed eiriaa Lippen eae k a ee a nn a ina Eme aen ARR dan 403 ACOPYDES Ne TE EE 404 HCOPY DE Vice COLOR T 404 HOCOPy DEVice LANGuagesdevices etr enit oir I ERE RA TAA e ux ERE ERE Md inR 405 HOOPSEIMIMediatesdeviog E 405 HCOPy IMMediate device NEXT 2 2 2 2 2 c cocotte eer v tace eva ak cec NEN EREN 405 eler eeh ue EE 406 HOOPyVITENEWINDOW TEX EE 406 ele et ENEE 406 HCOPy TDSTamp STATex deVvice oot crederet eet eus eau e ua eL aa a se cw RD EEN 406 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt eeessssssssss eene 407 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT ecce 407 Gv Tem CGOMMunicate PhRiNter SEL ect devlcez erer sreretttoteterererernrnsrtn rnrn rtn n
547. trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 194 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics The unit depends on the result display Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 116 See wi Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 See Marker Position X value on page 193 General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality Remote commands exclusive to general marker functionality IL gc c 353 GALCGulatesns MARKer m sXSSIZe 2 a aa rar patito nac a ura epa cau Er aa Desa raa E aai 354 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on
548. trieving Marker and Peak Search Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results of markers and peak searches Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 351 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 353 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative esses nnn nnn 380 CAL Culatesh gt DEL Tamarkersimbse EE 380 CALC Ulster MARKO ME E 381 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Delta 1 Delta 2 Delta 16 on page 193 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measur
549. ts they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a cer tain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable The following commands always return the specified result FREQ STAR 1GHZ SPAN 100 FREQ STAR Result 1000000000 1 GHz Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI FREQ STAR 1GHz STAR SPAN 1000000 The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instru ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message termi nator is received The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received Remote Control Basics o As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages 12 1 4 1 Example Overlapping command with OPC The instrument implements INITiate IMMediate as an overlapped command Assuming that INITiate IMMediate takes longer to execute than OPC sending the following command sequence results
550. u item If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 352 Select Marker Mi sl The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly Selected State Selected State Selected State Markeri or o6 o o2 on Delta 1 or on 25 Detta13 on Detta2 or Detas on ow on BD Deltas or Detao on o5 on EH CEP NM on Delta5 on bau Deal on fag Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands All Markers Off y Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 351 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers These settings are located in the Marker Settings tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab Then select the horizontal Marker Settings tab Select the Marker Marker menu item then select the Marker Settings tab 10 4 2 3 Analysis Search Reference Fixed nn C Level 80 0 dBm Marker Stepsize Standard EE Frequency 0 0 Hz Peak Search Marker Tane DIS pia y ett i
551. ues appear in the same display it is difficult to determine individual values precisely or to distinguish values that are close together In a logarithmic display smaller values are distributed among a much larger area of the display while large values are condensed to a smaller area Now it is much easier to distinguish several lower values as they are spread over a wider area Logarithmic scaling is useful when large ranges of values must be combined in one display Loga rithmic scaling is best applied to measurement values in logarithmic units dB dBm etc In addition to linear or logarithmic scaling the vertical axis can be set to display either absolute or relative values Absolute values show the measured levels while relative values show the difference between the measured level and the defined reference level Relative values are indicated in percent for linear scaling and in dB for logarith mic scaling Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings determine how the instrument in use must process or display the expected input power levels Amplitude settings are available via the Input amp Output Amplitude menu item Note that the availability of these settings depends on the instrument in use The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Amplitude Settings on page 310 COS 7 LL Reference Level r Input Settings Value 10 0 dBm Preamplifier On Off Offse
552. umber includes active limit lines as well as inactive limit lines that were used last Therefore the combination of inactivate limit lines depends on the sequence of use with MMEMory LOAD STATe color settings Depending on the used command either the items for all channels MMEMory SELect ITEM oronly those from the currently selected channel y y MMEM SELect CHANnel ITEM are stored or loaded Managing Settings and Results Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example MMEM SEL HWS ON Manual operation See Items on page 81 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL State MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL State This command includes or excludes all limit lines active and inactive when storing or loading a configuration file Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MMEM SEL LIN ALL ON Manual operation See Items on page 81 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE MMEMory SELect I TEM NONE This command does not include any of the following items when storing or loading a configuration file e Hardware configuration MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings Limit lines MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL Spectrogram data MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam Trace data MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe ACTive Example MMEM SEL NONE Usage Event Manual operation See Items on page 81 MMEMory SELect CHAN
553. ument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 239 Remote Control Basics Bit No Meaning 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register contains information on current activities of the instrument in use It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last read out You can read out the register with STATus OPERation CONDition Or STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable Reg
554. uration dialog box The Copy Trace tab contains functionality to copy trace data to another trace The first group of buttons labelled Trace 1 to Trace 6 select the source trace The second group of buttons labelled Copy to Trace 1 to Copy to Trace 6 select the destination Remote command TRACe lt n gt COPY on page 342 Spectrogram Settings The individual settings available for spectrogram display are described here For set tings on color mapping see Color Map Settings on page 178 Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a measurement are provided as additional capture settings for spectrogram display see chapter 10 3 6 2 Capture Settings on page 157 For background information see also Working with Spectrograms on page 167 e General Spectrogram SeuInGS EE 176 Color Map Getters Ted tees 178 General Spectrogram Settings This section describes general settings for spectrogram display They are available when you press the TRACE key and then select the Spectrogram Config softkey Analysis Traces Copy Trace Trace Math Color Mapping State Split Full OH Settings Select Frame 50 History Depth 3000 Trace z Color Mapping Clear Spectrogram Specifics for 2 Spectrum 7 Slaen a N AA 177 Selecting a frame to dleplaw enne nnns 177 PIS EGY DS m 178 e lee MN 178 Clear Specttogralni E 178 Sta
555. urement point using the selected detector See Mapping Samples to measurement Points with the Trace Detector on page 162 User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 169 Analysis Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 With the next measurement the pre vious frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of cap tured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during the measurement and the measured trace data is stored Spectrogram displays are continued even after single measurements unless they are cleared manually The maximum number of frames that you can capture depends on the number of mea surement points that are analyzed during the measurement The scaling of the time axis y axis is not configurable However you can enlarge the spectrogram display to the full window size using the State Full Displaying individual frames The spectrogram diagram contains all stored frames since it was last cleared Arrows on the left and right border of the spectrogram indicate the currently selected frame The spectrum diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame The current frame number is indicated in the diagram footer The current frame dis played at the top of the diagram is frame number 0 Older frames further down in the diagram are indicated by a negative index e g 10 You c
556. uring measurement or display Some of the information displayed in the status bar can be queried from the status reg istry via remote commands see chapter 13 10 1 Using the Status Register on page 417 Remote command DISPlay SBAR STATe on page 412 Diagram Footer Annotation The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains information on the x axis of the dia gram display such as the current center frequency and span settings the displayed span per division and the number of measurement points Remote command DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency on page 412 Display Theme and Colors You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen These settings are available when you select File gt Preferences gt Theme Color For step by step instructions see chapter 9 3 How to Configure the Colors for Display and Printing on page 106 Display Settings Screen Colors Print Colors Default Colors 1 Default Colors 2 Optimized Colors User Defined Colors User Defined Colors Screen Colors Hardcopy 7 Show Print Colors on Display Modify User Defined Colors Modify User Defined Colors Set User Defined Colors To Default Set User Defined Colors To Default bat c EE 103 e piibrs c ERE 104 lo rM E 104 Showing Print Colors on ET 104 Modifying User Defined Color Aesignments sss 104 L Selecting the CO NN acsnd dsc cssr
557. usee cate k usan anana an A Ram da FRA Ra SEN 351 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz LUNKTOMAbRkercmz eene sn sre nh nsns nn stas anas 352 CAL e DE E E REN KEE 352 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz TR ACe n tsssa esse ii asse sitis sa sas sni sn s 352 GALOCulate n MARKerSImS X etae eco e tune code aaa AER ENEE EENS SEENEN AEN 353 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker m to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Tip to link any marker to a different marker than marker 1 use the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt Of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt commands Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 194 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links delta marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt delta marker lt m1 gt changes its horizontal position to the same value Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Parameters State O
558. ut Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 326 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth on page 327 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe IMMediate on page 327 Amplitude The amplitude is configured via the Input Amplitude menu item 10 3 3 1 Configuration e Importer the Vertical Axis Settings cereo rele eee 133 e SAMPINUDS E 135 LEE uet EE 138 Scaling Ee EE 140 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration CBR ele EE 133 iL UELLE 134 QE CNN as cee sie 135 Reference Level The reference le
559. ut file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel Parameters lt Percentage gt numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 0 Example INST BLOC CHAN FILE1 OVER AVG ON 99 For averaged traces after each update the display shows 1 of the previous record and 99 of the next record Thus 1 of each record is included in multiple averaging calculations Manual operation See Overlap Settings on page 96 Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STARt SAMPle Sample This command defines the sample within the input file i at which replay starts Suffix lt j gt Parameters lt Sample gt Example Manual operation 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel numeric value Range O to record length of stored data INST BLOC CHAN FILE START SAMP 10 Data from the input file is replayed starting with sample number 10 See Playback Settings on page 95 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt STARt TIME Time This command defines the start time within the input file lt i gt at which replay starts Suffix lt j gt Parameters lt Time gt Example Manual operation 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel double value Absolute start time Range 0 t
560. ut settings See chapter 10 3 2 Data Input and Output Settings on page 128 2 Amplitude settings See chapter 10 3 3 Amplitude on page 132 3 Frequency settings See chapter 10 3 4 Frequency Settings on page 141 4 Optionally Trigger Gate settings See chapter 10 3 5 Triggers on page 142 5 Bandwidth data acquisition and capture settings See chapter 10 3 6 Data Acquisition and Bandwidth Settings on page 152 6 Optionally output settings See chapter 10 3 2 Data Input and Output Settings on page 128 7 Analysis settings and functions See chapter 10 4 Analysis on page 162 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview or select a setting in the channel s global info bar to open the corresponding dialog box For step by step instructions on configuring UO Analyzer measurements see chap ter 11 How To Perform Measurements with the R amp S VSE on page 211 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values This function has the same effect as the Preset Selected Channel menu item Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 383 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the
561. utput is sent Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 132 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds 13 6 1 6 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 132 Configuring Data Acquisition The following commands are required to capture data in the UO Analyzer Remote commands exclusive to I Q data acquisition SENSe IQ BANDwidth BWIDth MODE eeeesseesseeseiei nennen nnne nnns snnt tn snnt 328 E Elle Tee Me EIERE GE EE 329 ISENS amp JIQEIEE T2AEGGOFUDERLS E 329 SENSe IQ FFT LENGtR eeeeeeeeetteet tnter ttt ttt tette teet te tents ts0a 330 EE JIQ eg RO ere LENG DEE 330 SENS amp IG FF T WINBOW OVERlap cucina cu cirea ret ei eene ie cvs repo nece 330 SENSE IO eg e eet dE 331 ll 331 SENSe SWEep COUNL rtt ttt ttn t tinet te ttn tta do Lt ta ta tad ata 331 Isis i disi dzi esdeli s 332 SENSe SWEep TIME atenta ttn ttt tette taba teta taa ta ta tata da taa aan 332 BRETT eR 332 Ee nii TH Na 333 FE Ge EE LT 333 RRE c 334 PRACE IO NEE 335 BEE ER EE 335 TRACEAG WEAN GIVIBVVI
562. valid for the active measure ment channel To create a window for a different measurement channel use the LAYout GLOBal REPLace WINDow com mand Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 13 5 3 General Window Commands The following commands are required to work with windows independently of the application Note that the suffix lt n gt always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel See INSTrument SELect on page 288 REI GE ROT EE E EE 307 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command sets the focus on the selected result display window This window is then the active window Example DISP WIND1 SEL Sets the window 1 active Usage Setting only 13 6 Remote Commands for the I Q Analyzer e Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements ene 308 tre 338 e Ronana Resulls irte eege 374 Remote Commands for the UO Analyzer 13 6 1 Configuring UO Analyzer Measurements The following commands configure the UO Analyzer measurements e Configuring the Data Input and Output 308 e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Gcalmg esee 310 e Configuring the Axes for Statistical Displavs sss 316 GE Unie EE 318 e THOOO EEN 320 Configuring Data Acquisition 2 2 2 GG n etie Eoi ieee ati 328 e Adjusting Settings Automatically esses 336 13 6 1 1 Configuring the Data Input and Output The followi
563. valuation e Recording Measurement Dalla teint Deren d ede e Te ns 85 General Recording Seltihgs e hrec ri EP E Eu 86 e Exporting Recorded UO Data 87 e Recalling Measurement Data from Files eese 91 Recording Measurement Data If the captured UO data is required for further analysis at a later time or in a different application you can record the measurement results for a specific channel In this case the resampled I Q data is stored to a temporary file on the PC running the R amp S VSE software The record length is defined as Measurement time Number of records gt Additional settling samples where Measurement time is defined in the channel capture settings and Number of records and Additional settling samples are general recording settings see chapter 8 3 2 General Recording Settings on page 86 Alternatively the measurement time can be set to the maximum provided by the instru ment in use automatically When the recording is finished the temporary file is automatically set to be the input source for the selected channel The measurement results stored in the first record are immediately displayed The temporary file can then be exported that is stored to a file permanently Recorded UO data files are available for export until one of the following actions occur e Anew measurement is performed The temporary file is overwritten with each mea surement T
564. ve them Uncompleted sequential commands blocked remote channels If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S VSE is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel in order to abort the measurement To regain control over a blocked remote channel 1 Senda Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S VSE to clear all currently active remote channels Depending on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear The remote channel currently processing the uncompleted command is then ready to receive further commands again 2 Onthe remote channel performing the measurement send the SCPI command ABORt to abort the current measurement and reset the trigger system Ignored commands When a remote command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not auto matically adapted Therefore control programs should always define an initial instru ment status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Detecting false commands If a remote program does not provide the expected results and you are using a GPIB connection you can log the commands and any errors that may occur To a
565. vel value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display Internally the reference level is also used to determine the optimum hardware settings for the R amp S VSE The defined reference level should correspond with the maximum expected RF input level When determining the expected input level consider that the power from all input sig nals contribute to the total power The reference level must be higher than the total power from all signals The optimum reference level for the current measurement settings can be set automat ically by the R amp S VSE see Reference Level on page 136 In general the instrument in use measures the signal voltage at the RF input The level display is calibrated in RMS values of an unmodulated sine wave signal In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impe dance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 129 conversion to other units is pos sible Reference level offset If the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S VSE you can define an arithmetic offset to the reference level so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results are shifted by this value and the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly To determine the requi
566. ver several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each measurement until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S VSE saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one This mode is useful for example for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Average The average is formed over several measurements and displayed The Capture Count determines the number of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed If a trace is frozen View mode the measurement settings apart from scaling set tings can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the dis played trace no longer matches the current measurement settings is indicated by a yel low asterisk Ell on the tab label
567. w many captures are to be analyzed to create a single frame c In the Frame Count field define how many frames are to be plotted during a single measurement d To include frames from previous measurements in the analysis of the new frame for Max Hold Min Hold and Average trace modes only select Continue Frame ON 2 Define how many frames are to be stored in total Analysis a From the Trace menu select Spectrogram b In the History Depth field enter the maximum number of frames to store 3 If necessary adapt the color mapping for the spectrogram to a different value range or color scheme as described in How to Configure the Color Mapping on page 183 How to Configure the Color Mapping The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your needs The settings for color mapping are defined in the Color Mapping dialog box To dis play this dialog box do one of the following e Select the color map in the spectrogram display From the Trace menu select Spectrogram then select Color Mapping or Switch to the Color Mapping tab directly To select a color scheme You can select which colors are assigned to the measured values gt Inthe Color Mapping dialog box select the option for the color scheme to be used Editing the value range of the color map The distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the Color Map ping dialog box To
568. ware for instrument control and the VISA program library must be installed on the controller VISA library VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments The I O channel is selected at initialization time by means of the channel specific address string VISA resource string indicated in table 7 1 or by an appropriately defined VISA alias short name A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the LAN interface IP address Only the IP address or a valid DNS host name is required to set up the connection The host address is part of the VISA resource string used by the programs to identify and control the instrument The VISA resource string has the form TCPIP host address LAN device name INSTR where e TCPIP designates the network protocol used host address is the IP address or host name of the device LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub instru ment instO0 selects the VXI 11 protocol default hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol e INSTR indicates the instrument resource class optional Configuring Instruments Example e Instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 the valid resource string using VXI 11 protocol is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR e The DNS host name is VSE 123456 the valid resource string using HiSLIP is TCPIP VSE 123456 hislipO0 Identifying instrume
569. windows are docked to the main window Fig 6 6 Example for docked windows in the R amp S VSE window Optionally each subwindow can be undocked that is detached from the main R amp S VSE window Undocked windows can be placed anywhere on the screen even outside of the main R amp S VSE window This is useful for example if a second monitor is available and you want to take advantage of the additional display area However undocked windows float on the screen covering any other displays behind them and are not adapted or rearranged when you change the size of the R amp S VSE window or add new subwindows User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 43 R amp S VSE Operating Basics Fig 6 7 Example for undocked window in the R amp S VSE window Docking areas for interface elements The windows and other interface elements can be docked within predefined areas in the R amp S VSE window For details on the window types see chapter 6 1 4 Windows on page 38 e The menu bar and status bar are fixed elements and are always located at the top and bottom edge of the window respectively No windows can be docked above the menu bar or below the status bar e Toolbars can only be placed along the outer edges of the R amp S VSE window below the menu bar and above the status bar e Tool windows can only be placed along the outer edges of the R amp S VSE window below the menu bar and above the status bar and not outside of any toolb
570. wn file the R amp S VSE software starts in the default configuration the next time the R amp S VSE software is star ted again Deleting the shutdown file does not affect settings concerning the layout of the basic R amp S VSE window The display and position of toolbars and special tool windows are retained Deleting the shutdown file has the same effect as Restoring All Default Settings Pre set All directly after startup Defining a Startup Settings File You can define a settings file other than the shutdown file to be restored during soft ware startup see chapter 8 2 2 4 Startup Recall Settings on page 82 9 2 Display Settings Some general display settings are available regardless of the current application or operating mode Bisplayaeddisims epe dee exer e Amie Gat eens ees da Ride s 101 e Display Theme and Golors nine tei die ce d erue ECT EE 102 9 2 1 Displayed Items Several elements on the screen display can be hidden or shown as required for exam ple to enlarge the display area for the measurement results These settings are availa ble when you select File gt Preferences gt Displayed Items 9 2 2 Display Settings General Theme Color Network Remote Recording Status Bar Off Annotation off SEE E 102 Diagram Footer Annotaton entrent 102 Status Bar The status bar beneath the diagram indicates the global software settings the software status and any irregularities d
571. ws a trace to be analyzed 1 Frequency Sweep CF 900 0 MHz 1001 pts 500 0 kHz Span 5 0 MHz 2 Marker Table Type Rerr tre Stimulus Response Function Function Result Mi 900 4995 MHz 8 46 dBm Mi 999 0 kHz 0 Mi 499 5 kHz MI 504 5 kHz Mi D4 e 1 4985 MHz 73 83 dB Fig 10 19 Trace example The following table lists the peaks as indicated by the marker numbers in the diagram above as well as the minimum decrease in amplitude to either side of the peak Marker Min amplitude decrease to either side of the signal 1 30 dB 2 29 85 dB 3 20 dB 4 10 dB 5 18 dB rs User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 189 R amp S VSE UO Analyzer Measurements In order to eliminate the smaller peaks M3 M4 and M5 in the example above a peak excursion of at least 20 dB is required In this case the amplitude must rise at least 20 dB before falling again before a peak is detected Measuring the Power in a Channel Band When you want to determine the noise power in a transmission channel you could use a noise marker and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth However the results would only be accurate for flat noise Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span band around a marker similar to ACP measurements By default 5 of the current span is used The span is indicated by limit lines in the diagram The results can be displayed either as a power dBm or d
572. xhold a Minhold and an Average trace you can acti vate a Spectrogram that displays the maximum minimum or average power levels over time and frequency Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements E User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 168 R amp S VSE I Q Analyzer Measurements n ME IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum 1Pk Clrw CF 64 0 MHz Span 2 5 MHz een 3 1Pk Clrw X 6 0x 7 CF 64 0 MHZ 129 pts el Frame 50 Fig 10 13 Display elements for a result display with a spectrogram subwindow 1 Main result display in this case Spectrum 2 Marker info with frame number 3 Spectrogram subwindow title with trace information 4 Color map 5 Spectrogram subwindow 6 Current frame indicators 7 Deltamarker in Spectrogram and Spectrum displays 8 Current frame number For more information about spectrogram configuration see Spectrogram Settings on page 176 Remote commands Activating and configuring spectrograms chapter 13 6 2 2 Configuring Spectrograms on page 343 Storing results MMEMory STORe lt n gt SPECtrogram on page 400 e Tire E EE 169 LEE UM EE 170 Time Frames The time information in the spectrogram is displayed vertically along the y axis Each line or trace of the y axis represents one or more captured measurement and is called a time frame or simply frame As with standard spectrum traces several mea sured values are combined in one meas
573. ximum The RF input is disconnected from the input mixer to protect the device In order to re enable measurement decrease the level at the RF input connector and reconnect the RF input to the mixer input The R amp S VSE displays the keyword INPUT OVLD 4to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature Register The STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register contains information about possible temperature deviations that may occur during operation of the instrument in use A separate temperature register exists for each active channel I You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDiti on Or STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt Table 12 10 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register Bit No Meaning This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self alignment temperature During warmup this bit is always 0 1to 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable TIMe Register The STATus QUEStionable TIMe register contains information about possible time errors tha ter exists t may occur during operation of the instrument in use A separate time regis for each active channel Remote Control Basics You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition or STATus QUEStionable TIM
574. ximum record length is 524288 but may not exceed the number of samples provided by the instrument in use For the I Q data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally in the instru ment in use The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable I Q bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable UO bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable UO bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increases the maximum usable UO band width As a rule the usable I Q bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate However the bandwidth used by the R amp S VSE software is restricted by the bandwidth provided by the instrument in use 10 2 3 Basics on FFT The UO Analyzer measures the power of the signal over time In order to convert the time domain signal to a frequency spectrum an FFT Fast Fourier Transformation is performed which converts a vector of input values into a discrete spectrum of frequen cies User Manual 1176 8839 02 02 118 Basics on UO Data Acquisition and Processing Hz 10 2 3 4 Frequency Resolution of FFT Results RBW The resolution bandwidth defines the minimum frequency separation at which the individual components of a spectrum can be distinguish
575. y 8 3 2 General Recording Settings Some general settings concerning recording in the R amp S VSE are available in the gen eral software settings File Preferences Recording General Displayed Items Theme Color Network Remote Number of Records 1 The recording is always limited to the max record length of the instrument Default Comment 7 Always Maximum Record Length 7 Additional Settling Samples Number of RECORDS MM 86 Default Comment eessen eee ee a e b Ces deem t de ada 86 Always Maximum Record Length iiec nece n EP eee cda 86 Additional Settling Samples 87 Number of Records Defines the number of records to be stored One record contains the data captured during the defined measurement time for a single channel If more measurements are available than the specified number x of records only the most recent x measure ment results are stored As a rule the recording is limited by the maximum record length provided by the instrument Alternatively all available records for a channel can be stored see Always Maximum Record Length on page 86 In this case the Number of Records are disabled Remote command RECord COUNt on page 401 Default Comment Defines a default text for the comment to the stored data file This default comment is displayed in the Save I Q Recording dialog box see Comment Remote command RECord COMMent DEFault on page 400 Always Maximum Record
576. y OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Usage Query only PCB Address Pass control back Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of the triggered action Setting parameters Address Range 0 to 30 Usage Setting only PRE Value Parallel poll register enable Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value The query returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 PSC Action Power on status clear Common Commands Determines whether the contents of the ENAB1e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The contents of the status registers are prese
577. y complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http e vw rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 11 7 How to Capture Baseband I Q Data in the I Q Ana lyzer By default the UO Analyzer assumes the captured data is modulated on a carrier fre quency and consists of two components I Q How to Analyze Data in the UO Analyzer Make sure the I Q Analyzer measurement channel is currently active before you attempt to change its configuration for example by selecting one of its windows or the application in the toolbar selection list 1 From the Meas Setup menu select Overview to display the configuration Over view that guides you through the configuration steps 2 Select Input to configure the RF Input signal source 3 Select Amplitude to define the attenuation reference level or other settings that affect the input signal s amplitude and scaling 4 Select Frequency to define the input signal s center frequency 5 Optionally select Trigger to define a trigger for data acquisition for example an UO Power trigger to start capturing data only when a specific power is exceeded 6 Select Bandwidth and define the bandwidth parameters for data acquisition e Sample rate or Analysis Bandwidth
578. ysis bandwidth to be used by the measurement The bandwidth must be smaller than or equal to the bandwidth of the data that was stored in the file Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the ABW is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 lt IQChannel gt ID of the UO channel in the stored file which is to be restored to the selected measurement channel If this parameter is omitted the first channel found is restored Tip If the file was stored using the R amp S VSE software the I Q channel is included in the meta data information in the file see Meta Data Settings on page 89 Example INST SEL IQ Analyzer INST BLOC CHAN FILE CSV C Users ImportFile csv 10MHZ 2 The data from the second UO channel stored in the file is used as input for the current measurement channel IQ Analyzer The displayed bandwidth is restricted to 10 MHz Manual operation See File on page 72 See File Name on page 88 INSTrument BLOCk CHANnel SETTings FILE lt i gt CURRent SAMPle Sample This command defines the sample within the input file lt i gt which is currently displayed Suffix lt i gt 1 99 Sequential number of a configured input file required only if multiple files are loaded for a single channel Parameters lt Sample gt numeric value Range 0 to record length of stored data Controlling Instruments and Capturing Data Example INST BLOC

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

MANUAL DE INSTALACIÓN  Méthodologie réponse AOI_mars 2011 [Mode de compatibilité]  SolidSDD - SolidSourceIT  JY36A  Hansgrohe 28548001 Instructions / Assembly  オプションレンズ 取扱説明書  MÉTA-OUI, MÉTA-NON - Mastering Blocking & Stuttering  V7 Replacement Battery for selected Lenovo-IBM Notebooks  User Manual - Galileo Bioscience  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file